Owners Manual - Dealer E-Process

Copy and paste this link to your website, so they can see this document directly without any plugins.



Keywords

with, vehicle, light, system, switch, that, your, will, when, Provided, Information, engine, When, from, warning, brake, rear, tire, button, following, ignition, access, indicator, SUBARU, control, this, while, position, (type, NOTE

Transcript

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
TOKYO, JAPAN
A2490BE-A
Issued May 2012
Printed in USA 05/12
2013A
M
SA
5M
13
04
A
Owner Manual
2013 Leg
acy/O
utb
ack O
w ner M
anual
2013
Legacy/Outback
Subaru of America, Inc., Subaru Plaza,
P.O. Box 6000, Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1178500_13a_Legacy_Outback_OM_050912.indd 1 5/10/12 10:12 AM
Information Provided by:
Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A2490BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 1/ 11
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*C Copyright 2012 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Information Provided by:
This manual describes the following types of the Legacy series.
1) Legacy
2) Outback
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
Warranties
& Warranties for U.S.A.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the
United States come with the following
warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control Systems Warranty
. Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Please read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty
. Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please
read these warranties carefully.
How to use this Owner’s
Manual
& Using your Owner’s Manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indicators and
how to use the instruments and other
switches.
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate
your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and explains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem while driving, such as a
flat tire or engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
1
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about the dimensions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Tire
information, Uniform tire quality grading
standards and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
& Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
& Safety symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “Do
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
& Abbreviation list
You may find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbreviations are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation Meaning
A/C Air conditioner
A/ELR Automatic/Emergency lockingretractor
ABS Anti-lock brake system
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
AT Automatic transmission
ATF Automatic transmission fluid
AWD All-wheel drive
CVT Continuously variable trans-mission
DRL Daytime running light
EBD Electronic brake force distri-bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
FWD Front-wheel drive
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
Information Provided by:
Abbreviation Meaning
HID High intensity discharge
INT Intermittent
LATCH Lower anchors and tethers forchildren
LED Light emitting diode
LSD Limited slip differential
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl man-ganese tricarbonyl
MT Manual transmission
OBD On-board diagnostics
RON Research octane number
SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive
SRS Supplemental restraint sys-tem
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS Tire pressure monitoring sys-tem
Vehicle symbols
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F23.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Power door lock
Power door unlock
Power window
Passengers’ windows lock
Fuel
Front fog lights
Hazard warning flasher
Mark Name
Seat heater
Child restraint lower anchorages
Child restraint top tether anchorages
Horn
Windshield wiper
Wiper intermittent
Windshield washer
Rear window wiper
Rear window washer
Lights
Tail lights, license plate light
and instrument panel illumination
3
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
4
Mark Name
Headlights
Turn signal
Electronic parking brake
Cruise control
Illumination brightness
Engine hood
Trunk lid (Legacy)
Fan speed
Instrument panel outlets
Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
Foot outlets
Mark Name
Windshield defroster and foot
outlets
Windshield defroster
Rear window defogger/Outside mirror defogger/Windshield wiper deicer
Air recirculation
Engine oil
Washer
Door lock (access key/transmitter)
Door unlock (access key/
transmitter)
Trunk lid open (Legacy) or
rear gate unlock (Outback)
(access key/transmitter)
Safety precautions when
driving
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) airbag does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts.
In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious
accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
Information Provided by:
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seatbelts” F1-14.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-38.
& Child safety
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
. While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should
always be placed in the REAR
seat in an infant or child restraint
system which is appropriate for
the child’s age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a
child restraint system, the child
should sit in the REAR seat and
be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child
to stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Put children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are
not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Always turn the child safety locks
to the “LOCK” position whenever
a child rides in the rear seat.
Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opened the
door and fell out. Refer to “Child
safety locks” F2-31.
. Always lock the passengers’ windows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Refer to “Windows” F2-32.
. Never leave unattended children,
adults or animals in the vehicle.
5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
6
They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
trunk could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small children.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seatbelts” F1-14.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-25.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-38.
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system always works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate
closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the
vehicle.
& Drinking and driving
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reaction and
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after
drinking – even if you drink just a
little – it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Information Provided by:
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most
frequent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may
have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
blood is below the legal limit. The safest
thing you can do is never drink and drive.
However if you have no choice but to
drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and driving
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires
you to take drugs, please consult with
your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
& Driving when tired or sleepy
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your
passengers’ and other persons’
chances of being involved in a
serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but
instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
yourself before continuing on your journey.
When possible, you should share the
driving with others.
& Car phone/cell phone and
driving
CAUTION
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and park in a safe place before
using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
may legally be used while driving.
7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8
& Modification of your vehicle
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be covered under warranties.
& Driving with pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
be hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling
harness which can be secured to the rear
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
in the front passenger’s seat. For further
information, consult your veterinarian,
local animal protection society or pet
shop.
& Tire pressures
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the spare)
at least once a month and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard. For detailed information, refer
to “Tires and wheels” F11-28.
General information
& California proposition 65
warning
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids in vehicles and
certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
& California Perchlorate Advisory
Certain vehicle components such as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Information Provided by:
& Noise from under the vehicle
NOTE
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the engine is turned off. However,
this does not indicate a malfunction.
This noise is caused by the operation
of the fuel evaporation leakage checking system and the operation is normal.
The noise will stop after approximately
15 minutes.
& Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data
as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
9
Information Provided by:
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Information Provided by:
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1
Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13
Index 14
3
Information Provided by:
12
Illustrated index
& Exterior
1) Engine hood (page 11-7)
2) Headlight switch (page 3-41)
3) Bulb replacement (page 11-43)
4) Wiper switch (page 3-46)
5) Moonroof (page 2-39)
6) Roof rail with integrated crossbars
(page 8-14)
7) Door locks (page 2-6)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-30)
9) Flat tires (page 9-6)
10) Fog light switch (page 3-44)
11) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)
12) Towing hook (page 9-14)
Information Provided by:
1) Rear window defogger switch
(page 3-49)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-31)
4) Towing hook (page 9-14)
5) Tie-down holes (page 9-14)
6) Trunk lid (page 2-35)
7) Rear gate (page 2-38)
8) Bulb replacement (page 11-47)
9) Rear wiper switch (page 3-48)
13
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
14
& Interior
! Passenger compartment area
1) Lower anchorages for child restraint
system (page 1-33)
2) Seatbelt (page 1-14)
3) Center console (page 6-6)
4) Front seat (page 1-2)
5) Rear seat (page 1-9)
Information Provided by:
1) Top tether anchorages (page 1-35)
2) Cargo area light (page 6-3)
3) Rear center seatbelt (page 1-19)
4) Cargo area cover (page 6-15)
15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
16
1) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-20)/Select lever
(AT and CVT) (page 7-23)
2) Climate control (page 4-1)
3) Audio (page 5-1)
4) Navigation system (Refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the navigation
system)
5) Multi function display (page 3-33)
6) Glove box (page 6-6)
7) Accessory power outlet (page 6-10)
8) Cup holder (page 6-8)
Information Provided by:
& Instrument panel 1) Door locks (page 2-6)
2) Electronic parking brake switch
(page 7-36)
3) Hill Holder switch (page 7-37)
4) Trunk lid opener switch (page 2-35)
5) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-33)
6) Remote control mirror switch (page 3-63)
7) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-44)
8) Light control switch (page 3-41)
9) Audio control buttons (page 5-37)
10) Combination meter (page 3-7)
11) Cruise control (page 7-40)
12) Shift paddle (page 7-25)
13) Wiper control lever (page 3-45)
14) Horn (page 3-65)
15) SRS airbag (page 1-38)
16) Multi information display control switches
(page 3-36)
17) Fuse box (page 11-42)
18) Hood lock release knob (page 11-7)
19) Power windows (page 2-32)
17
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
18
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-45)
2) Mist (page 3-46)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-47)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-48)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-47)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-46)
7) Light control switch (page 3-41)
8) Front fog light switch (page 3-44)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-41)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-42)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-43)
Information Provided by:
& Combination meter
! U.S. spec. models (type A)
1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-9)
2) Tachometer (page 3-10)
3) ECO gauge (page 3-11)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) Multi function display switching knob
(page 3-33)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)
8) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
19
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
20
! U.S. spec. models (type B) 1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-9)
2) Tachometer (page 3-10)
3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) Multi function display switching knob
(page 3-33)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
7) Coolant temperature warning/indicator
light (page 3-16)
8) ECO gauge (page 3-11)
Information Provided by:
! Except U.S. spec. models (type A) 1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-9)
2) Tachometer (page 3-10)
3) ECO gauge (page 3-11)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) Multi function display switching knob
(page 3-33)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)
8) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
21
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
22
! Except U.S. spec. models (type B) 1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-9)
2) Tachometer (page 3-10)
3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) Multi function display switching knob
(page 3-33)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
7) Coolant temperature warning/indicator
light (page 3-16)
8) ECO gauge (page 3-11)
Information Provided by:
& Warning and indicator lights
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-13
Front passenger’s
seatbelt warning light 3-13
SRS airbag system
warning light 3-15
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light
3-16
Coolant temperature
low indicator light (if
equipped)/Coolant temperature high warning
light (if equipped)
3-16
Charge warning light 3-17
Oil pressure warning
light 3-17
Engine low oil level
warning light 3-18
AT OIL TEMP warning
light (AT and CVT models)
3-18
/ ABS warning light 3-20
Mark Name Page
/ Brake system warninglight 3-21
Hill Holder indicator
light 3-23
Door open warning light
(if equipped) 3-23
Door open indicator
light 3-23
Low fuel warning light 3-23
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT and CVT
models)
3-24
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light
3-24
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light 3-25
Access key warning
light (if equipped) 3-25
Security indicator light 3-30
Turn signal indicator
lights 3-31
Mark Name Page
High beam indicator
light 3-31
Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped) 3-32
Cruise control indicator
light 3-32
Cruise control set indicator light 3-32
Headlight indicator light 3-32
Low tire pressure
warning light (U.S.
spec. models)
3-18
/
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
light
3-15
/
Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF indicator
light
3-15
Shift-up indicator 3-30
Windshield washer fluid
warning light 3-23
23
Information Provided by:
24
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-25
Monitoring start delay time (after closure
of doors)
0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-26
Impact sensor operation (only models
with shock sensors (dealer option))
Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-31
Passive arming* Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-30
Map light/Dome light/Cargo area light
illumination
ON/OFF OFF 2-25
Keyless access* Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-9
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-17
Door unlock selection function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-17
Remote keyless entry system
Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-19
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-21
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8
Defogger and deicer system
for models with the automatic
climate control system
Rear window defogger, outside mirror
defogger and windshield wiper deicer
Operation for 15 minutes/
Continuous operation
Operation for 15 minutes 3-49
Map light/Dome light/Cargo
area light
Operation of map light/Dome light/Cargo
area light OFF delay timer
OFF/Short/Normal/Long Long 6-3
Battery drainage prevention
function
Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation 3-13
Information Provided by:
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Auto on/off headlights Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/
off headlights
Min/Low/Mid/Max Normal 3-41
*: If equipped
25
Information Provided by:
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Information Provided by:
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Manual seat (if equipped) .................................... 1-3
Power seat (if equipped)...................................... 1-4
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-8
Rear seats............................................................ 1-9
Reclining the seatback (Outback)........................ 1-10
Folding down the rear seatback.......................... 1-11
Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-12
Armrest ............................................................. 1-14
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-14
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-14
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-15
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-15
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-16
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-16
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-22
Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-23
System monitors ................................................ 1-24
System servicing................................................ 1-24
Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-25
Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-25
Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-26
Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-28
Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
seatbelt ........................................................... 1-28
Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-31
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-33
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-35
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)................................................ 1-38
General precautions regarding SRS airbag
system ............................................................ 1-39
Components...................................................... 1-45
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system, SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag .................. 1-48
System operation............................................... 1-53
SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-65
SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-67
Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-68
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Information Provided by:
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers or cargo are
clear of the adjusting mechanism.
. After adjusting the seat, push it
slightly to make sure it is securely locked. If the seat is not
securely locked, it may move or
the seatbelt may not operate
properly.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with
front seat locking and cause an
accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are not in the
proper position when the SRS
airbag deploys could suffer very
serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space
for deployment, the driver should
always sit upright and well back
in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
Put children in the rear seat properly
restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deployment is greater. Consequently, we
strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats
and those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all times
in a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate
Information Provided by:
for the child’s age, height and
weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child restraint systems, refer to “Child restraint systems” F1-25.
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
& Manual seat (if equipped)
! Forward and backward adjustment
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
the desired position. Then release the
lever and try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure that it is securely locked
into place.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Reclining the seatback
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
seatback to the desired position. Then
release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
the lever is pulled. When operating the
reclining lever to return the seatback, hold
the seatback lightly so that it may be
raised back gradually.
! Seat height adjustment (driver’s
seat)
1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
is lowered.
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
rises.
The height of the seat can be adjusted by
moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
up or down.
& Power seat (if equipped)
! Driver’s seat
1) Seat position forward/backward control switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
Information Provided by:
backward. During forward/backward adjustment of the seat, you cannot adjust
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
height.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch.
4) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
5) Lumbar support control switch
To increase lower back support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease
lower back support, push the rear side of
the switch.
! Front passenger’s seat (if
equipped)
1) Seat position forward/backward control switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward.
2) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch.
! Memory function (driver’s seat — if
equipped)
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure that cargo or the hands and
feet of rear seat passengers are
clear of the adjusting mechanism.
. Never retrieve the seat position
while driving to avoid loss of
vehicle control and personal injury.
. Perform the seat position retrieval before driving. Be sure to
confirm that the select lever is
in the “P” position, and the
parking brake is applied, when
adjusting the seat position. Do
not drive until the retrieval of the
seat position is complete.
. When retrieving a registered seat
position, make sure the hands,
feet and possessions of rear seat
passengers are clear of the seat
adjusting mechanism.
. When any unusual conditions or
malfunctions occur during the
retrieval of the seat position, stop
the retrieval of the seat position
by performing any of the following procedures.
– Operate any of the power seat
switches
– Press the “SET” button
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– Press button “1” or “2”
Some of your desired seat positions can
be registered. Register the seat position
with button “1” or “2” or each of the access
keys and retrieve the seat position.
The following seat positions can be
registered.
. Forward/backward position of the seat
. Angle of seatback
. Angle of seat cushion
. Height of seat
! Registration of seat position with
button “1” or “2”
1. Adjust the seat position under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied.
. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
2. While pressing the “SET” button, press
and hold the desired button “1” or “2”.
3. The chirp sound sounds once, and the
seat position is registered.
! Registration of seat position with
each access key
1. Adjust the seat position under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied.
. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
2. While holding the access key and
pressing the “SET” button, press the “ ”
button of the access key.
3. The chirp sound sounds once, and the
seat position is registered.
! Retrieval of seat position registered
with button “1” or “2”
WARNING
Be sure to press the correct button
to retrieve your registered seat
position. If the seat position is not
optimum for you, it may adversely
affect your driving and may reduce
the effectiveness of the seatbelt.
That could result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Information Provided by:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. While the select lever is in the “P”
position and the parking brake is applied,
press button “1” or “2”.
3. The chirp sound sounds and the seat
moves to the registered position.
4. When the seat moves to the registered
position, the chirp sound sounds.
NOTE
. If a new position is registered for the
same button, the previously registered
seat position is deleted.
. If the vehicle battery is removed, the
registered seat position is not deleted.
. When the button “1” or “2” is
pressed within 45 seconds after the
driver’s door is opened, the registered
seat position can be retrieved even if
the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or
“OFF” position.
! Retrieval of the seat position registered with access key
1. Hold the registered access key.
2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing
the “ ” button or gripping the door
handle.
3. Open the driver’s door.
4. The chirp sound sounds and the seat
moves to the registered position.
5. When the seat moves to the registered
position, the chirp sound sounds.
NOTE
. If the registered seat position cannot
be retrieved after performing the previous procedures, try the following
procedures.
(1) Press the “SET” button on the
driver’s door.
(2) Press the “ ” button on the
access key or the door lock button
to lock the doors.
(3) Perform the prior procedures
again.
. If the keyless access function is
disabled, the seat position cannot be
retrieved by gripping the driver’s door
handle. However, the seat position can
still be retrieved by pressing the “ ”
button on the access key. For information about how to enable/disable the
keyless access function, refer to “Disabling keyless access function” F2-17.
. If a new position is registered for the
same access key, the previously registered seat position is deleted.
! Clearing the registered seat position
with access key
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. While holding the access key and
pressing the “SET” button, press the “ ”
button on the access key.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
3. The chirp sound sounds, and the
registered seat position is cleared.
& Head restraint adjustment
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
Both the driver’s seat and the front
passenger’s seat are equipped with head
restraints.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head restraints to protect vehicle occupants.
. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
Seat heater (if equipped)
1) HIGH – Rapid heating
2) LOW – Normal heating
3) OFF – Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
Information Provided by:
The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
To turn on the seat heater, press the
“LOW” or “HIGH” position on the switch,
as desired, depending on the temperature.
Selecting the “HIGH” position will cause
the seat to heat up quicker.
To turn off the seat heater, slightly press
the opposite side of the current position.
The indicator located on the switch illuminates when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.
CAUTION
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low temperatures if they use the seat heater
for a long period of time. When
using the heater, always be sure
to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
can cause battery discharge.
Rear seats
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
& Reclining the seatback (Outback)
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is equipped with a
cargo area cover, observe the following precautions.
. Be careful not to pinch your hand
between the headrest and the
cargo area cover when you recline the rear seat.
. Move the front cover of the cargo
area cover backward so that the
cover is not damaged by the
reclined seatback. Refer to “Cargo area cover (Outback – if
equipped)” F6-15.
Pull the lever and adjust the seatback to
the desired position.
Then release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
Information Provided by:
& Folding down the rear seatback
WARNING
. When you fold down the seatback, check that there are no
passengers or objects on the
rear seat. Not doing so creates
a risk of injury or property damage if the seatback suddenly
folds down.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area or trunk. Doing so
may result in serious injury or
death.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
stop, a sudden steering maneuver or a rapid acceleration.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake the
seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may suddenly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
move out from the cargo area,
which could cause serious injury
or death.
. After returning the rear seat to its
original position, be certain to
place all of the seatbelts and the
tab attached to the seat cushion
above the seat cushion. Also,
make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
CAUTION
The rear seatback may fold down
quickly due to the internal spring.
Hold the seatback while pulling the
release lever to slow it down.
! Legacy
To fold down the seatback, perform the
following procedure.
1. Open the trunk lid. Refer to “Opening
the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-20 or “To open
the trunk lid from inside” F2-35.
1) Release lever
2. Pull the release lever on the side that
you want to fold down.
3. Fold the seatback down.
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that it is securely
locked.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Outback
Unlock the seatback by pulling the release
lever and then fold the seatback down.
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that it is securely
locked.
& Head restraint adjustment
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head restraints to protect vehicle occupants.
. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
! Rear window side seating position
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
Information Provided by:
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower
the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
NOTE
For Legacy, it is not possible to remove
or install the head restraint without
folding down the rear seatback. Fold
down the rear seatback and then
remove or install the head restraint.
! Rear center seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended position.
A) When not used (retracted position)
B) When used (extended position)
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
extended position. When the rear center
seating position is not occupied, lower the
head restraint to improve rearward visibility.
& Armrest
To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest’s
top edge.
WARNING
To avoid serious injury, passengers
must never be allowed to sit on the
center armrest while the vehicle is in
motion.
Seatbelts
& Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to
support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more
persons – even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious
injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attaching hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
. Put children in the rear seat
properly restrained at all times.
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. Consequently, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those
that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s height
and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
Information Provided by:
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions
and precautions concerning the
child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-25.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
side and curtain airbags deploys.
! Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child
restraint systems” F1-25.
! Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to
the belt buckle to help provide a good
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as
possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
! Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
& Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
& Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
Retractor normally functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
ELR has an additional locking mode,
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode”, intended to secure a child restraint
system.
The ALR mode functions as follows.
When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled
and the ELR mode is restored.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
For instructions on how to install the child
restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to
“Installing child restraint systems with A/
ELR seatbelt” F1-28.
When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the retractor is
restored to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and
chime” F3-13.
& Fastening the seatbelt
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or
death.
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.
Information Provided by:
! Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
belt anchor height
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Push the release button and slide the
anchor down.
Pull down the anchor to make sure that it
is locked in place.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
seatbelt on Outback)
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Information Provided by:
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear center seatbelt on Outback
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Connector (tongue)
3) Connector (buckle)
4) Center seatbelt buckle
WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, especially when inserting the connector’s tongue plate into the mating
buckle (on right-hand side), always
check that the webbing is not
twisted.
WARNING
Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
to the respective buckles. If the
seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
belt (with the connector’s tongue
plate not fastened to the connector’s buckle on the right-hand side),
it cannot properly restrain the wearer in position in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or
death.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the
recess of the ceiling.
1. Retrieve the connector (tongue) plate
from the slot in the recess by pulling the
connector (tongue) plate.
2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the
retractor.
3. After confirming that the webbing is not
twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard. If the belt stops before reaching
the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull
it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. After fastening the seatbelt, make sure
that the “ ” mark on the connector
(tongue) and the “ ” mark on the buckle
face outwards.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
into the center seatbelt buckle marked
Information Provided by:
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
clicks.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as
low as possible on your hips, not on your
waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed
object into the slot in the connector
(buckle) on the right-hand side and push
it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will
disconnect from the buckle.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in
the recess and then insert the connector
(tongue) plate into the slot.
CAUTION
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
Otherwise, the metal tongue
plates may hit against the trim,
resulting in damaged trim.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
damage to the trim.
& Seatbelt maintenance
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating properly.
Information Provided by:
Front seatbelt pretensioners
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder
belt pretensioner)
2) Lap belt pretensioner
The driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
collision.
The shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemented by a lap belt pretensioner, which is
located at the base of the center pillar.
Like the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap
belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls in
the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level
of frontal collision force is detected. As a
result, the belt restrains the driver more
effectively.
The pretensioner sensor also serves as a
SRS frontal airbag sensor. If the sensor
detects a certain predetermined amount of
force during a frontal collision, the front
seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the
retractor to take up the slack so that the
belt more effectively restrains the front
seat occupant.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
cannot be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor frontal
impacts, in side or rear impacts or in
roll-over accidents.
. The driver’s and passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners and frontal airbag
operate simultaneously.
. Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seatbelt retractor assemblies must be
replaced and only by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
. If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
. If the front seatbelt assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged,
contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
buyer to the contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
occupants should sit in an upright position with their seatbelts
properly fastened. Refer to “Seatbelts” F1-14.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt assemblies or
surrounding area. This could
result in accidental activation of
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the seatbelt pretensioners or
could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in serious
injury. Seatbelt pretensioners
have no user-serviceable parts.
For required servicing of front
seatbelt assembly equipped with
seatbelt pretensioners, see your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
& System monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
while the vehicle is being driven. The
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
module with the airbag system. Therefore,
if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt
pretensioner, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. For details,
refer to “SRS airbag system monitors”F165.
& System servicing
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt retractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury. Do not use electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and airbag systems. For required servicing of
the seatbelt pretensioner, consult
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
The front sub sensors are located in
both front fenders and the airbag
control module including the impact
sensors is located under the center
console. If you need service or
repair in those areas or near the
front seatbelt retractors, have the
work performed by your authorized
SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the front part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
Information Provided by:
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts to
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the door
pillar or specified for individual
vehicle models in this Owner’s
Manual.
Child restraint systems
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle.
You should use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those covered under the section in
this manual, entitled “Installation of child
restraint systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-33).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
properly secured in the vehicle. When
installing the child restraint system, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be
caught between the passenger and
objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, holding a child in your lap or
arms in the front seat exposes that
child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
WARNING
Children should be properly restrained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or
kneeling on or in front of the front
seat are exposed another serious
danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
& Where to place a child restraint system
The following descriptions are SUBARU’s
recommendations on where to place a
child restraint system in your vehicle.
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
Information Provided by:
installing a child restraint system.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
Installing a child restraint system is not
recommended, although the A/ELR seatbelt and an upper anchorage (tether
anchorage) are provided in this position.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
WARNING
Put children in the rear seat properly
restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure
ALL types of child restraint devices
(including forward facing child
seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
You should choose a restraint device which is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
WARNING
S I N CE YOUR VEH I C L E I S
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S
SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A
REARWARD FAC ING CH ILD
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Choosing a child restraint
system
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protection. The child
restraint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for United States or
Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
for Canada. It can be identified by looking
for the label on the child restraint system
or the manufacture’s statement of compliance in the document attached to the
system. Also it is important for you to
make sure that the child restraint system
is compatible with the vehicle in which it
will be used.
& Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be increased.
! Installing a rearward facing child
restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
Information Provided by:
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
6. Push and pull the child restraint
system forward and side to side to check
that it is firmly secured in the center of the
seat.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more
firmly secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
8. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by retracting the
seatbelt fully.
! Installing forward facing child restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
6. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and left and right to verify that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more
firmly secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
Information Provided by:
Legacy
Outback
8. If the child restraint system requires a
top tether, latch the hook onto the top
tether anchor and tighten the top tether.
For additional instructions, refer to “Top
tether anchorages” F1-35.
9. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
& Installing a booster seat
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be increased.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster
seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
4. To remove the booster seat, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or reducing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will increase the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.
Information Provided by:
& Installation of child restraint
systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be increased.
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your
vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
child restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchorages are
sometimes referred to as the LATCH
system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren).
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
anchorages (bars) and three upper anchorages (tether anchorages) for accommodating such child restraint systems.
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
installing a child restraint system only on
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the rear seat window-side seating positions. For each window-side seating position, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
Legacy
Outback
The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are provided for all the seating
positions (center and both window-side
ones) of the rear seat.
You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of the
rear seat seatbacks. These marks indicate
the positions of the lower anchorages
(bars).
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be increased.
Peel off the anchorage cover from the
Information Provided by:
selected side of the rear seatback to
expose the anchorages (bars) to be used
for installation of the child restraint system.
1. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make sure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
2. If your child restraint system is of a
flexible attachment type (which uses
tether belts to connect the child restraint
system properly to the lower anchorages),
while pushing the child restraint into the
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt.
3. Connect the top tether hook to the
tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
tether. For information on how to set the
top tether, refer to “Top tether anchorages”
F1-35.
4. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and left and right to verify that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
5. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installation.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
& Top tether anchorages
Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
instructions by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or available.
! Tether anchorage location
! Legacy
Three tether anchorages are installed on
the rear shelf behind the rear seat head
restraint. Open the cover flap to use each
anchorage.
! Outback
Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the
right, center and left positions, are already
installed on the rear edge of the roof.
Open the cover flap to use each anchorage.
! To hook the top tether
CAUTION
. Always remove the head restraint
when mounting a child restraint
system with a top tether. Failure
to do so may prevent the top
tether from being fastened
tightly.
. Avoid placing the head restraint
that has been removed in the
passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around
in the passenger compartment in
a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
! Legacy
1. Fold down the rear seatback for the
window side seating position. Refer to
“Folding down the rear seatback” F1-11.
Information Provided by:
2. Remove the head restraint at the
seating position where the child restraint
system has been installed with the seatbelt or lower anchorages; lift up the head
restraint while pressing the release button.
Store the head restraint in the trunk.
3. Open the cover flaps to use the
anchorages.
4. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
5. Tighten the top tether securely.
! Outback
1. Remove the head restraint at the
seating position where the child restraint
system has been installed with the seatbelt or lower anchorages; lift up the head
restraint while pressing the release button.
Store the head restraint in the cargo area.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
2. Open the cover flaps to use the
anchorages.
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
4. Tighten the top tether securely. *SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used because the airbag system supplements the
vehicle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition to a
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
position and each rear window-side seating position. The supplemental restraint
system (SRS) consists of six airbags.
The configurations are as follows:
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
airbags
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side
airbags
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front passenger, and window-side rear passengers)
These SRS airbags are designed only
as a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pretensioners” F1-23.
Information Provided by:
& General precautions regarding SRS airbag system
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS airbag is designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not eliminate the
need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it
offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-14.
. The SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt. They do not eliminate the
need to fasten seatbelts. It is also
important to wear your seatbelt
to help avoid injuries that can
result when an occupant is not
seated in a proper upright position.
WARNING
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbags are stored in
both front seat seatbacks next to
the door, and they provide protection by deploying rapidly (faster than the blink of an eye) in the
event of a side impact collision.
However, the force of SRS side
airbag deployment may cause
injuries if your head or other
parts of the body are too close
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
to the SRS side airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms or hands out of the window.
The SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the cabin are stored in
the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point over the rear
seat), and they provide protection by deploying rapidly (faster
than the blink of an eye) in the
event of a side impact. For Outback models, the SRS curtain
airbags also deploy in the event
of a rollover. However, the force
of its deployment may cause
injuries if your head is too close
to it.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed – faster than
the blink of an eye – and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS
airbag contacts an occupant not
in proper position such as one
thrown forward during pre-accident braking.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms
because of the SRS airbag deployment force.
WARNING
. Do not rest your arm on either
front door or its internal trim. You
could be injured in the event of
SRS side airbag deployment.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, these
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
WARNING
Do not put any objects over the
steering wheel pad and dashboard.
If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
these objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing
Information Provided by:
injury.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mirror over the rear view mirror. If the
SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could become projectiles that could
seriously injure vehicle occupants.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deployment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s
occupants and cause injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free microphone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
A hands-free microphone or
other accessory in such a location could be propelled through
the cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deployment of the SRS curtain airbags,
they could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing deployment of the curSeat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
tain airbags.
Before hanging clothing on the coat
hooks, make sure there are no sharp
objects in the pockets. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.
WARNING
Do not put any kind of cover or
clothes or other objects over either
front seatback and do not attach
labels or stickers to the front seat
surface on or near the SRS side
airbag. They could prevent proper
deployment of the SRS side airbag,
reducing protection available to the
front seat’s occupant.
WARNING
Put children in the rear seat properly
restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deployment is greater.
Consequently, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that
have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint system, refer to “Child restraint systems” F1-25.
Information Provided by:
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
WARNING
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
seat facing the side window
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback
– Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
aged 12 and under should be
placed in the rear seat anyway
and should be properly restrained at all times.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
the buyer to the applicable section in
this Owner’s Manual.
Information Provided by:
& Components
1) SRS frontal airbag
2) SRS side airbag
3) SRS curtain airbag
The SRS airbags are stowed in the
following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center
portion of the steering wheel
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard under an
“SRS AIRBAG” mark
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each
front seat seatback which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” label
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat)
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
top of each center pillar.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
2) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
3) SRS airbag system warning light
4) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
5) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
6) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
7) Airbag control module (including impact
sensor [all models] and rollover sensor
[Outback])
Information Provided by:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1) Rear wheel house impact sensor (lefthand side)
2) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
3) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
4) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
5) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
6) Center pillar impact sensor (left-hand
side)
7) Seatbelt pretensioner (left-hand side)
8) Lap belt pretensioner (driver’s side)
9) Side airbag module (left-hand side)
10) Seatbelt buckle switch (right-hand side)
11) Rear wheel house impact sensor (righthand side)
12) Side airbag module (right-hand side)
13) Seatbelt pretensioner (right-hand side)
14) Center pillar impact sensor (right-hand
side)
15) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
16) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
17) Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
& SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system, SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that complies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the deployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
For the locations of the driver’s SRS
frontal airbag, front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag, refer to “Components” F145.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags deploy and supplement the
seatbelts by reducing the impact on the
driver’s and front passenger’s head and
chest.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact to the occupant’s chest and
waist.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact to the occupant’s
head.
NOTE
The SRS side airbag, SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pretensioner are not
Information Provided by:
controlled by the SUBARU advanced
frontal airbag system.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact.
Have the system inspected by your
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
The total load on the seat is monitored by
the passenger’s occupant detection system weight sensor under the seat.
Using the total seat load and seatbelt
buckle switch, the occupant detection
system determines whether the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag should or
should not be inflated.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system from functioning correctly
or cause the system to fail.
. Do not apply any strong impact
to the front passenger’s seat
such as by kicking.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
passenger’s seat. If liquid is
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble
the front passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory
(such as an audio amplifier) other
than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the front passenger’s
seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
seat with the head restraint removed.
. Do not leave any articles on the
front passenger’s seat or the
seatbelt tongue and buckle engaged when you leave your vehicle.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
retractor.
. Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Manual seat” F1-3
(models equipped with manual
seats only).
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. Have the
system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system
warning light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle inspected at your
SUBARU dealer.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON and OFF indicators” F3-15.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Conditions in which front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding the
front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with a rearward
facing child restraint system and an infant
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that
follows.)
. The seat is equipped with a forward
facing child restraint system and a small
child is restrained with it. (See WARNING
that follows.)
. The seat is equipped with a booster
seat and a small child is in the booster
seat. (See WARNING that follows.)
. The seat is relieved of the occupant
load for a time exceeding the predetermined monitoring time period.
. The seat is occupied by a child who
has outgrown a child restraint system
(See WARNING that follows.) or by a
small adult.
. The front passenger’s occupant detection system is malfunctioning.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
sure to install it in the REAR seat in
a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
recommended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also
seated in the REAR seat. This is
because children sitting in the front
passenger’s seat may be killed or
severely injured should the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest
place for children.
CAUTION
When the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by a child, observe the
following precautions. Failure to do
so may increase the load on the
front passenger’s seat, activating
the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even though that seat is
occupied by a child.
. Do not place any article on the
seat other than the child occupant and a child restraint system.
. Do not place more than one child
on the seat.
. Do not install any accessory
such as a table or TV onto the
seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or
legs on the front passenger’s
seatback, or allow him/her to pull
the seatback.
! If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator turns off even when
an infant or a small child is in a child
restraint system (including booster
seat)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Remove the child restraint system
from the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint
manufacturer’s recommendations as well
as the child restraint system installation
procedures in “Child restraint systems”
Information Provided by:
F1-25, correctly install the child restraint
system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and make sure that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off after
taking relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child restraint
system to the rear seat and immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating
posture. If the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag is activated (the ON
indicator remains illuminated while
the OFF indicator turns off), take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
the seat other than the occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in
the seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off
despite the fact that the actions noted
above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection. Even if the system
has passed the dealer inspection, it is
recommended that on subsequent trips
the child/small adult always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following conditions is met regarding the front passenger’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When a heavy article is placed on the
seat.
CAUTION
When the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an adult, observe the
following precautions. Failure to do
so may lessen the load on the front
passenger’s seat, deactivating the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
despite the fact that the seat is
occupied by an adult. This may
result in personal injury.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to lift the front passenger’s
seat cushion using his/her feet.
. Do not place any article under the
front passenger ’s seat, or
squeeze any article from behind
and under the seat. This may lift
the seat cushion.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. Do not squeeze any article between the front passenger’s seat
and side trim/pillar, door or center console box. This may lift the
seat cushion.
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator illuminates and the ON
indicator turns off even when the
front passenger’s seat is occupied
by an adult
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
while the ON indicator remains off, take
the following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Ensure that there is no article, book,
shoe, or other object trapped under the
seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side
of the seat.
3. Ensure that the backward-forward
position and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
system to complete self-checking. Following the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
should illuminate while the OFF indicator
remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
! Effect vehicle modifications made
for persons with disabilities may
have on SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only)
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side
frame, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire,
suspension or floor panel can affect the
operation of the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you have any questions,
you may contact the following SUBARU
distributors:
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Dealer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
HI 96819
808-839-2273

Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automobile
491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
Guam
671-633-2698

Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828
There are currently no SUBARU distributors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
Information Provided by:
& System operation
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components with bare hands right
after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
The SRS airbags can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
When the SRS airbag(s) deploy(s), a
sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be
heard and some smoke will be released.
These occurrences are a normal result of
the deployment. This smoke does not
indicate a fire in the vehicle.
! SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
operation
1) Driver’s side
2) Passenger’s side
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the total load on the front
passenger’s seat monitored by the front
passenger’s occupant detection system
weight sensor. For this reason, only the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in
the event of a collision, but this does not
mean failure of the system.
If the front sub sensors inside both front
fenders and the impact sensors in the
airbag control module detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passenger’s modules) instructing the module(s)
to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags use dual stage inflators. The two
inflators of each airbag are triggered either
sequentially or simultaneously, depending
on the severity of impact in the case of the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag and depending
on the severity of impact and the total load
on the seat in the case of the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
After deployment, the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
not impaired. The time required from
detecting impact to the deflation of the
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are designed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
frontal collision. They are not designed to
deploy in most lesser frontal impacts
because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
are not designed to deploy in most side or
rear impacts or in most rollover accidents
because deployment of only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not help the occupant in those
situations. The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to
function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
! Examples of accident in which the
driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most
likely deploy
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which it is possible that the
driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
Information Provided by:
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.
Information Provided by:
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the driver’s/driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) is not designed to deploy
in most cases
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are designed not to deploy
in most cases if the vehicle is struck from
the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will not
be activated on the second impact.
WARNING
If the vehicle is damaged in an
accident but the SRS frontal airbag
does not deploy, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
! SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag operation
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
side airbags and SRS curtain airbags
deploy independently of each other because each has its own impact sensor.
Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepenSeat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
dently of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags in the steering
wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor, which senses impact
force, is located in each of the following
locations.
. In the left and right front doors
. In the left and right center pillars
. In the left and right rear wheel houses
. In the airbag control module
For Outback models, a rollover sensor is
also located inside the airbag control
module.
If the impact sensor that is located in the
airbag control module and one of the
center pillar impact sensors or front door
impact sensors together sense an impact
force above a predetermined level in a
side collision, the control module causes
both the SRS side airbag and curtain
airbag on the impacted side to inflate
regardless of whether the rear wheel
house impact sensor on the same side
senses an impact.
If the impact sensor that is located in the
airbag control module and one of the rear
wheel house impact sensors together
sense an impact force above a predetermined level in a side collision, the control
module causes only the SRS curtain
airbag on the impacted side to inflate.
For Outback models, if the rollover sensor
detects rollover of the vehicle, the control
module inflates the SRS curtain airbags.
At this time, the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners also operate
at the same time.
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of
an eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while following deployment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploy even when no one occupies
the seat on the side on which an impact is
applied.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed to deploy in the event
of an accident involving a moderate to
severe side impact collision. They are
basically not designed to deploy in a
lesser side impact.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deployment depend on the level of
force experienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision.
That level differs from one type of collision
to another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
For Outback models, the SRS curtain
airbags are also designed to deploy when
the vehicle is in an extremely inclined
state such as during a rollover. They are
not designed to deploy in most lesser
inclined state.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are not designed to deploy in most
frontal or rear impacts because the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment would not help the occupant
in those situations.
Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed to function on a onetime-only basis.
Information Provided by:
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS side airbag will most
likely deploy
A severe side impact near the front seat
activates the SRS side airbag.
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the SRS curtain airbag will
most likely deploy
Legacy models
A severe side impact near the front seat or
the rear seat activates the SRS curtain
airbag.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Outback models 1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
impact near the front seat or the rear
seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone laterally.
Information Provided by:
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy (Outback)
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustration.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-61
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to
deploy
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
Information Provided by:
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely
to deploy
Legacy models
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-63
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-64 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Outback models 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
Information Provided by:
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the SRS side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag is not designed
to deploy in most cases
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision
with another vehicle (moving or stationary).
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
3) The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy
in most cases.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
& SRS airbag system monitors
SRS airbag system warning light (type A)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-65
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-66 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
SRS airbag system warning light (type B)
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
while the vehicle is being driven. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show
normal system operation by illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator.
. Front sub sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Airbag control module (including impact sensors [all models] and rollover
sensors [Outback])
. Frontal airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Center pillar impact sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Front door impact sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Side airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Rear wheel house impact sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Curtain airbag module
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Seatbelt pretensioner
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Lap belt pretensioner
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s side)
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which may increase the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warning light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
Information Provided by:
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
& SRS airbag system servicing
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no userserviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the
system’s wiring could result in
accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas.
. Under the center console
. Inside each front fender
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’s side and nearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. Inside each front door
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
. Under the rear center seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the components of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear
seat) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
. The center pillar, front door, rear
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
area near these parts, was involved in
an accident in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-67
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
1-68 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
WARNING
To avoid accidental activation of the
system or rendering the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury, no modifications
should be made to any components
or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
This includes the following modifications.
. Installation of custom steering
wheels
. Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
. Installation of custom seats
. Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
. Installation of additional fabric or
leather on the front seat
. Attachment of a hands-free microphone or any other accessory
to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
rear pillar, the windshield, a side
window, an assist grip, or any
other cabin surface that would be
near a deploying SRS curtain
airbag
. Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment such as
a mobile two-way radio on or
near the SRS airbag system
components and/or wiring
. Modifications on or inside the
front door panels for the purpose
of a speaker replacement or
sound insulation
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, bullbar, winches, snow
plow, skid/sump plate, etc.) other
than genuine SUBARU accessory parts.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owner’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts on
your vehicle.
Information Provided by:
Keys ..................................................................... 2-3
Key number plate................................................ 2-3
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-4
Certification for immobilizer system..................... 2-4
Security ID plate (models without “keyless
access with push-button start system”) ............. 2-5
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-5
Key replacement (models without “keyless
access with push-button start system”) ............. 2-5
Door locks ........................................................... 2-6
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-6
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-7
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-8
Power door locking switches............................. 2-8
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-9
Keyless access with push-button start
system (Outback – if equipped) ...................... 2-9
Certification for keyless access with push-button
start system..................................................... 2-10
Safety precautions ............................................. 2-11
Locking and unlocking with “keyless access”
entry function................................................... 2-13
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-17
Warning chimes and warning light ...................... 2-17
Disabling keyless access function ...................... 2-17
When access key does not operate properly ....... 2-18
Replacing battery of access key ......................... 2-18
Replacing access key......................................... 2-18
Remote keyless entry system ........................... 2-19
Locking the doors .............................................. 2-20
Unlocking the doors ........................................... 2-20
Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) ........................... 2-20
Unlocking the rear gate (Outback) ...................... 2-21
Vehicle finder function ....................................... 2-21
Sounding a panic alarm ..................................... 2-21
Selecting audible signal operation (models
without “keyless access with push-button start
system”).......................................................... 2-21
Replacing the battery......................................... 2-22
Replacing lost transmitters ................................ 2-22
Alarm system..................................................... 2-25
System alarm operation ..................................... 2-25
Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-26
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-26
Arming the system ............................................ 2-26
Disarming the system ........................................ 2-29
Valet mode ........................................................ 2-29
Passive arming (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”) ....................... 2-30
Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-31
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-31
Child safety locks .............................................. 2-31
Windows............................................................. 2-32
Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-32
Power window operation by passengers............. 2-34
Initialization of power window ............................ 2-35
Trunk lid (Legacy).............................................. 2-35
To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-35
To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-35
Internal trunk lid release handle ......................... 2-36
Rear gate (Outback)........................................... 2-38
Keys and doors
2
Information Provided by:
Keys and doors
Moonroof (if equipped) ...................................... 2-39
Moonroof switches............................................. 2-40
Sun shade ......................................................... 2-41
Information Provided by:
Keys
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, refer to
“Keyless access with push-button start
system (Outback – if equipped)” F2-9.
1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate
5) Security ID plate
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle:
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all
locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door
. Glove box
. Trunk lid (Legacy)
The valet key fits only the ignition switch
and door locks. You can keep the trunk
and glove box locked when you leave your
vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby
stopping the engine.
& Key number plate
1) Key number plate
2) Security ID plate (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle.
To make replacement keys, the security ID
is also needed. Refer to “Key replacement
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)” F2-5.
Keys and doors 2-3
Information Provided by:
2-4 Keys and doors
Immobilizer
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
If you press the push-button ignition
switch when carrying an unregistered
access key, the switch will not turn to the
“ON” position and the engine will not start.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
Even if an unregistered key fits into the
ignition switch and can be turned to the
“START” position, the engine will automatically stop after several seconds.
Each immobilizer key contains a transponder in which the key’s ID code is
stored. The transponder transmits the
key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
receiver under any of the following conditions.
. When an access key is detected within
the operating range of the antennas inside
the vehicle (models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
. When a key is inserted into the ignition
switch and turned to the “ON” position
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
If the transmitted ID code matches the ID
code registered in the immobilizer system,
the system allows the engine to be
started. Since the ID code is transmitted
and acted upon almost instantly, the
immobilizer system does not impede
normal starting of the engine.
If the engine does not start, perform either
of the following procedures.
. Perform the procedure described in
“Starting engine” F9-21 (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”).
. Pull out the key once before trying
again (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”). Refer to
“Ignition switch (models without pushbutton start system)” F3-3.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may
become hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
NOTE
To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the following security precautions:
. Never leave your vehicle unattended
with its keys inside.
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
windows and the moonroof, and lock
the doors (all models) and rear gate
(Outback).
. Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
& Certification for immobilizer
system
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
Refer to “Certification for keyless access
with push-button start system” F2-10.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Information Provided by:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
& Security ID plate (models
without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
1) Key number plate
2) Security ID plate
The security ID is stamped on the security
ID plate attached to the key set. Write
down the security ID and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle.
This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it
inside the vehicle.
To make replacement keys, the key
number is also needed. Refer to “Key
replacement (models without “keyless
access with push-button start system”)”
F2-5.
The security ID is also needed for
replacement or repair of the engine control
unit, integrated unit, etc. For details,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
& Security indicator light
Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-30.
& Key replacement (models
without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
Your key number plate and security ID
plate will be required if you ever need a
replacement key made. Any new key must
be registered for use with your vehicle’s
immobilizer system before it can be used.
Up to four keys can be registered for use
with one vehicle.
For security, all the keys registered with
your vehicle’s immobilizer system will
have their ID codes erased and reregistered when a new key is made.
Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must
be presented when a new key is registered. Any key that is not re-registered
when a new key is made cannot be used
after the other keys are re-registered. For
information on replacement keys and on
the registration of keys with your immobilizer system, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Keys and doors 2-5
Information Provided by:
2-6 Keys and doors
Door locks
& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with a
key (including a mechanical key) and
open the door while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Press any button on the access key
(except when the access key battery is
discharged).
. Turn the push-button ignition switch
to the “Acc” position.
. Carry the access key and perform
either of the following procedures.
– Grip the front door handle
– Press the rear gate opener button
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter (except when the transmitter battery is discharged).
. Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm system” F2-25.
To lock the driver’s door from the outside
with the key, turn the key toward the rear.
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
front.
Pull the outside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Locking without the key
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside without
the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and
then close the door.
Information Provided by:
Locking without the key
1) Press the front side of the power door
locking switch.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the
power door locking switch, press the front
side of the switch (“LOCK” side) and then
close the door. In this case, all closed
doors and the rear gate (Outback) are
locked at the same time.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are locked before leaving your
vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
& Locking and unlocking from
the inside
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small children are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child restraints, locking
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out by preventing a door
from being accidentally opened, and
intruders from unexpectedly opening doors and entering your vehicle.
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever rearward. To unlock the door
from the inside, rotate the lock lever
forward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate (Outback) are closed before
starting to drive.
Keys and doors 2-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-8 Keys and doors
& Battery drainage prevention
function
If a door or the rear gate (Outback) is not
completely closed, the interior lights will
remain illuminated as a result. However,
several lights are automatically turned off
by the battery drainage prevention function to prevent the battery from going
dead. The following interior lights are
affected by this function.
Item Switchposition
Automatically turning
off
Map lights OFF*1 Approximately 20minutes later
Dome light DOOR Approximately 20minutes later
Ignition
switch light —
Approximately 20
minutes later
Door step
lights — None
*2
Cargo area
light DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
*1: The map lights can be controlled by the
battery drainage prevention function only when
the map light switches are in the OFF position
and the door interlock switch is in the DOOR
position. For the switch positions, refer to “Map
light” F6-2.
*2: The door step lights are not affected by the
battery drainage prevention function, so the
lights do not turn off automatically. To turn off
the lights, it is necessary that each door is
completely closed.
The operational/non-operational setting of
this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest
SUBARU dealer if you would like to
change the setting.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When leaving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear
gate (Outback) are completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate while the
key is in the ignition switch.
Power door locking switches
1) Lock
2) Unlock
All doors and the rear gate (Outback) can
be locked and unlocked by the power door
locking switches located at the driver’s
side and the front passenger’s side doors.
To lock the doors, press the front side of
the switch.
To unlock the doors, press the rear side of
the switch.
When you close the doors after you set
the door locks, the doors remain locked.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
Information Provided by:
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
& Key lock-in prevention function
This function prevents the doors from
being locked under the following conditions.
. The key is still in the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position (models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
This function’s operational/non-operational setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
! Behavior with key lock-in prevention function operational
With the driver’s door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
front side of the power door locking switch
is pressed.
! Behavior with key lock-in prevention function non-operational
. If the lock lever is turned to the rear
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
driver’s door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door is locked.
Keyless access with pushbutton start system (Outback
– if equipped)
1) Access key (main)
2) Access key (sub)
3) Key number plate
The vehicle has two access keys and a
key number plate. For details about the
key number plate, refer to “Key number
plate” F2-3.
The keyless access with push-button start
system allows you to perform the following
functions when you are carrying the
access key.
. Locking and unlocking of the doors and
rear gate
. Starting and stopping the engine. For
Keys and doors 2-9
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-10 Keys and doors
detailed information, refer to “Starting and
stopping engine (models with push-button
start system)” F7-11.
. Arming and disarming the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-25.
Locking and unlocking by the remote
keyless entry system can also be controlled with the buttons on the access key.
For detailed information, refer to “Remote
keyless entry system” F2-19.
A mechanical key is attached to each
access key. The mechanical key is used
for the following operations.
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
. Locking and unlocking the glove box
You cannot unlock the glove box without
using the mechanical key. You can keep
the glove box locked when you leave your
vehicle and the access key (with the
mechanical key removed) at a parking
facility.
1) Knob
2) Mechanical key
While pulling the knob of the access key,
take out the mechanical key.
& Certification for keyless access with push-button start
system
! U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: HYQ14AGX
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
! Canada-spec. models
NOTE
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions
suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même
si ce brouillage est susceptible de
compromettre le fonctionnement du
dispositif.
Information Provided by:
& Safety precautions
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
transmitting antennas installed on
the vehicle.
The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of
implanted pacemakers and implanted defibrillators.
If you wear electric medical equipment other than an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator,
before using the keyless access
with push-button start system, refer
to “Radio waves used for the keyless access with push-button start
system” mentioned later, and contact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for more information.
The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of the
electric medical equipment.
. The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access
function can be changed. For
the setting procedure, refer to
“Disabling keyless access function” F2-17. The setting can also
be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
For more details, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. For detailed information about
the operation method for the
push-button ignition switch while
the keyless access function is
switched to the non-operational
mode, refer to “Access key – if
access key does not operate
properly” F9-20.
“Radio waves used for the keyless
access with push-button start system”
. The keyless access with pushbutton start system uses radio
waves of the following frequency* in addition to the radio
waves used for the remote keyless entry system. The radio
waves are periodically output
from the antennas installed on
the vehicle as shown in the
following illustrations.
* Radio frequency: 134 kHz
1) Antenna
CAUTION
. The keyless access with pushbutton start system uses weak
radio waves. The status of the
Keys and doors 2-11
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-12 Keys and doors
access key and environmental
conditions may interfere with
the communication between the
access key and the vehicle under
the following conditions, and it
may not be possible to lock or
unlock the doors or start the
engine.
– When operating near a facility
where strong radio waves are
transmitted, such as a broadcast station and power transmission lines
– When products that transmit
radio waves are used, such as
an access key or a remote
transmitter key of another vehicle
– When carrying more than one
access key
– When the access key is
placed near wireless communication equipment such as a
cell phone
– When the access key is
placed near a metallic object
– When metallic accessories are
attached to the access key
– When carrying the access key
with electronic appliances
such as a laptop computer
– When the battery of the access key is discharged
. Never leave or store the access
key inside the vehicle (e.g., on
the instrumental panel, inside the
glove box, on the seat, in the
door pocket or at the corner of
the cargo area) or within 6.6 ft (2
m) around the vehicle (e.g., in the
garage). The access key may be
locked inside the vehicle, or the
battery may discharge rapidly.
Note that the push-button ignition switch may not turn on in
some cases depending on the
location of the access key.
. The access key contains electronic components. Observe the
following precautions to prevent
malfunctions.
– Although you can replace the
battery of the access key
yourself, it is recommended
that the battery be replaced by
a SUBARU dealer to avoid the
risk of damage at the time of
replacement.
– Do not get the access key wet.
If the access key gets wet,
wipe it off immediately and let
it dry completely.
– Do not apply strong impacts
to the access key.
– Keep the access key away
from magnetic sources.
– Never leave the access key in
direct sunlight or anywhere
that may become hot, such
as on the dashboard. It may
damage the battery or cause
circuit malfunctions.
– Do not wash the access key in
an ultrasonic washer.
– Do not leave the access key in
humid or dusty locations.
Doing so may cause malfunctions.
– Do not leave the access key
near personal computers or
home electric appliances.
Doing so may cause the access key to malfunction, resulting in battery discharge.
. If the access key is dropped, the
integrated mechanical key inside
may become loose. Be careful
not to lose the mechanical key.
. When you carry the access key
on an airplane, do not press the
button of the access key while in
Information Provided by:
the airplane. When any button of
the access key is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the access key
in a bag on an airplane, take
measures to prevent the buttons
of the access key from being
pressed.
NOTE
. The access key is always communicating with the vehicle and is continuously using the battery. Although
the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery
becomes fully discharged, replace it
with a new one.
. If an access key is lost, it is
recommended that the access key be
reregistered. For reregistration of an
access key, contact a SUBARU dealer.
. For a spare access key, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. Up to 7 access keys can be registered for one vehicle.
. Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with the access key. It is
necessary for vehicle repair.
. Do not leave the access key in the
storage spaces inside the vehicle, such
as the door pocket, dashboard and the
corner of the cargo area. Vibrations
may damage the key or turn on the
switch, possibly resulting in a lockout.
. After the vehicle battery is discharged or replaced, initialization of
the steering lock system may be required to start the engine. In this case,
perform the following procedure to
initialize the steering lock.
(1) Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “OFF” position. For
details, refer to “Switching power”
F3-5.
(2) Open and close the driver’s
door.
(3) Wait for approximately 10 seconds.
When the steering is locked, the initialization is completed.
& Locking and unlocking with
“keyless access” entry function
! Operating ranges
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
The operating ranges of the door and rear
gate locking/unlocking functions are approximately 16 to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from
the respective door handles and the rear
gate ornament.
Keys and doors 2-13
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-14 Keys and doors
1) LED indicator
When the access key is within either of the
operating ranges of the front doors, the
LED indicator on the access key flashes.
When the keyless access functions are
disabled, the LED indicator does not flash
unless a button on the access key is
pressed.
NOTE
. Locking by using the keyless access function can be operated only by
the door lock button in the operating
range in which the access key is
detected.
. Unlocking by using the keyless
access function can be operated only
by the door handle in the operating
range in which the access key is
detected.
. If the access key is placed too close
to the vehicle body, the keyless access
functions may not operate properly. If
they do not operate properly, repeat the
operation from further away.
. If the access key is placed near the
ground or in an elevated location from
the ground, even if it is in the indicated
operating range, the keyless access
function may not operate properly.
. When the access key is within the
operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who is not carrying
the access key, to operate the keyless
access function. Note that locking and
unlocking can be operated only by the
door handle, door lock button, rear
gate opener button or rear lock button
in the operating range in which the
access key is detected.
. It is not possible to lock the doors
and rear gate using the keyless access
function when the access key is inside
the vehicle. However, depending on the
status of the access key and the
environmental conditions, the access
key may be locked inside the vehicle.
Before locking, make sure that you
have the access key.
. When the battery of the access key
is discharged, or when operating it in a
location with strong radio waves or
noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power
plant, broadcast station or an area
where wireless equipment is used), or
while talking on a cell phone, the
operating ranges may be reduced, or
the keyless access function may not
operate.
In such a case, perform the procedure
described in “Locking and unlocking”
F9-20.
. When an access key is in the
operating range, if the door handle
becomes wet due to exposure to a
significant amount of water when the
vehicle is washed or during heavy rain,
the doors may be locked or unlocked.
. If the door handle is gripped with a
gloved hand, the door lock may not be
released.
! How to use keyless access functions
NOTE
. When you lock the doors and rear
gate using the keyless access function,
turn the push-button ignition switch
off. It is not possible to lock the doors
and rear gate using the keyless access
function when the push-button ignition
switch is on the “Acc” or “ON” position. Refer to “Switching power” F3-5.
. Locking and unlocking by using the
Information Provided by:
keyless access function cannot be
operated for a short period of time
(approximately less than 3 seconds)
after locking or unlocking to prevent
malfunctions.
. When performing the locking procedure too quickly, locking may not have
been completed. After locking the
doors, it is recommended to pull the
REAR door handles to confirm that the
doors have been locked.
. The keyless access function may
not operate properly depending on the
status of the access key and the radio
wave conditions around the vehicle. In
such a case, perform the procedure
described in “Locking and unlocking”
F9-20.
. It is possible to lock the doors even
when one of the doors is open. After
performing the locking procedure,
close the opened door or rear gate to
lock it.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate by using the
keyless access function, it is not
possible to unlock doors and/or the
rear gate by using the keyless access
function.
. If any of the doors or the rear gate is
open, the doors and the rear gate
cannot be locked.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key to prevent locking the
access key in the vehicle.
! Unlocking
Carry the access key, and grip the door
handle.
. When the driver’s door handle is
gripped, only the driver’s door will be
unlocked.
. When the front passenger’s door handle is gripped, all doors including the rear
gate will be unlocked.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
! Opening rear gate
1) Rear gate opener button
Carry the access key, and press the rear
gate opener button. Only the rear gate will
be unlocked and opened. Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
Keys and doors 2-15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-16 Keys and doors
! Locking with the door lock button
1) Door lock button
Carry the access key, close all doors
including the rear gate and press the door
lock button on the door handle. All doors
including the rear gate will be locked. Also,
an electronic chirp will sound once and the
hazard warning flashers will flash once.
! Locking with the rear lock button
1) Rear lock button
Carry the access key, close all doors
including the rear gate and press the rear
lock button. The rear gate and all doors
will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
sound once and the hazard warning
flashers will flash once.
! Power saving function
The keyless access function will be
disabled in the following cases to protect
the access key battery and the vehicle
battery.
Case 1: When the keyless access function and the remote keyless entry system
have not been used for 2 weeks or longer
while all doors are locked
Case 2: When the access key has been
left in the operating range for 10 minutes
or longer while all doors are locked
! Recovery from power saving mode
When one of the following is operated, the
keyless access function will be recovered.
Case 1:
. Unlock the doors by operating any
procedure other than gripping the door
handle
. Lock the doors
. Open a door and then close it
Case 2:
. Unlock the doors by gripping the door
handle
. Unlock the doors by pressing the rear
gate opener button
. Lock the doors by pressing the door
lock button
. Lock or unlock the doors by using the
remote keyless entry system
. Lock or unlock the doors by using the
power door locking switch
. Open either of the front doors
! Automatic locking
If any of the doors or the rear gate was not
opened within 30 seconds after unlocking,
they will be automatically locked again.
Information Provided by:
The function’s operational/non-operational
setting and the time until automatic locking
takes place can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. For more details, contact
a SUBARU dealer.
! Door unlock selection function
The door unlock selection function makes
the following operations possible.
. Unlocking the driver’s door without
unlocking any other doors (including the
rear gate) when gripping the driver’s door
handle
. Opening the rear gate without unlocking any doors when pressing the rear gate
opener button
The operational/non-operational setting
for this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer.
Operational:
. Only the driver’s door will be unlocked
when the driver’s door handle is gripped.
. The rear gate will open, but the other
doors will remain locked when the rear
gate opener button is pressed.
Non-operational:
. All doors and the rear gate will be
unlocked when the driver’s door handle is
gripped.
. The rear gate will open and all doors
will be unlocked when the rear gate
opener button is pressed.
The factory setting (default setting) is set
as “operational”.
For further details, consult a SUBARU
dealer.
& Selecting audible signal operation
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
& Warning chimes and warning
light
The keyless access with push-button start
system sounds a warning chime and
flashes the access key warning light on
the combination meter in order to minimize
improper operations and help protect your
vehicle from theft.
For details, refer to “Warning chimes and
warning light of the keyless access with
push-button start system” F3-25.
& Disabling keyless access
function
When the vehicle is not going to be used
for a long time, or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the
keyless access function can be disabled.
NOTE
. The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is
not disabled.
. The setting can also be changed at
SUBARU dealers. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
. To start the engine while the functions are disabled, perform the procedure described in “Starting engine”
F9-21.
. We recommend that you disable the
keyless access functions under the
following conditions.
– When the vehicle is not going to
be used for an extended period of
time
– When the keyless access functions are not going to be used
– When the access key needs to be
stored inside or near the vehicle
Keys and doors 2-17
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-18 Keys and doors
! Disabling functions
1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the
door.
2. Push the rear side (unlock side) of the
power door locking switch.
3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is
performed, open the driver’s door.
4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
5. Within 30 seconds after step 4 is
performed, close and open the driver’s
door twice.
6. Within 30 seconds after step 5 is
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
7. Within 30 seconds after step 6 is
performed, close and open the driver’s
door once.
8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is
performed, close the door. A chirp sound
will be heard, and the functions are
disabled.
NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door
locking switch slowly. If the switch is
pressed quickly, the functions may not
be disabled.
! Enabling functions
When the procedure to disable the functions is performed again, the functions are
enabled.
& When access key does not
operate properly
Refer to “Access key – if access key does
not operate properly” F9-20.
& Replacing battery of access
key
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key”
F11-54.
& Replacing access key
Access keys can be replaced at SUBARU
dealers. For more details, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
Information Provided by:
Remote keyless entry system
CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote transmitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmitter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote transmitter on an airplane, do not
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the remote transmitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
. FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, the access
key is used as the transmitter for the
remote keyless entry system. For models
without “keyless access with push-button
start system”, the transmitter for the
remote keyless entry system is located
inside the key head.
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and
rear gate (Outback)) without a key
. Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) without
key
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-25.
The operable distance of the remote
keyless entry system is approximately 30
feet (10 meters). However, this distance
will vary depending on environmental
conditions. The system’s operable distance will be shorter in areas near a
facility or electronic equipment emitting
strong radio waves such as a power plant,
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
controller of home electronic appliances.
NOTE
. For models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”, the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the push-button
ignition switch is in any position other
than the “OFF” position.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”, the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the key is inserted in
the ignition switch.
Keys and doors 2-19
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-20 Keys and doors
Access key
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button
Transmitter
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid opener/rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button
& Locking the doors
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors
and rear gate (Outback). An electronic
chirp will sound once and the hazard
warning flashers will flash once.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk
lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp
will sound five times and the hazard
warning flashers will flash five times to
alert you that the doors (or the rear gate/
trunk lid) are not properly closed. When
you close the door, it will automatically
lock and then an electronic chirp will
sound once and the hazard warning
flashers will flash once.
& Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock
the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will
sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice. To unlock all
doors and the rear gate (Outback), briefly
press the unlock/disarm button a second
time within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the unlock/disarm
button (for unlocking of all of the doors
and the rear gate) is extremely short,
the system may not respond.
& Opening the trunk lid
(Legacy)
Press and hold the trunk lid opener button
to open the trunk lid. An electronic chirp
will sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice.
Information Provided by:
& Unlocking the rear gate
(Outback)
Press the rear gate unlock button to
unlock the rear gate.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
& Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
sound once and its hazard warning
flashers to flash three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the lock/arm
button three times, the system may
not respond to the signals from the
remote transmitter.
& Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. If a
button on the remote transmitter is not
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds.
& Selecting audible signal operation (models without
“keyless access with pushbutton start system”)
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off.
To deactivate the audible signal, perform
the following procedure. You can also use
the same steps to restore the function.
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate.
2. Press the unlock side of the power
door locking switch.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch.
4. While holding down the unlock side of
the power door locking switch, pull the key
out and re-insert it into the ignition switch
at least 5 times within 10 seconds after
performing step 2.
5. Open and close the driver’s door
within 10 seconds after performing step 4.
6. To indicate completion of the setting,
the hazard warning flashers flash 3 times
and the chirp sounds 3 times.
You may have the above procedure
performed by your SUBARU dealer.
Keys and doors 2-21
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-22 Keys and doors
& Replacing the battery
Refer to “Replacing battery” F11-54.
& Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), you should reprogram all of your transmitters for security reasons. It is recommended that you
have your dealer program all of your
transmitters into your system.
! Programming the transmitters
The remote keyless entry system is
equipped with a special code learning
feature that allows you to program new
transmitter codes into the system or to
delete old ones. The system can learn up
to four unique transmitter codes. The four
transmitter codes may be the same or
different.
Programming transmitter codes into
system:
Key unit tag
Transmitter circuit board
To register a new transmitter with the
remote keyless entry system, it is necessary to program the transmitter’s code
(identification number) into the system. A
tag showing the code is affixed to the key
unit, and another is affixed to the circuit
board inside the transmitter. If there is no
tag, open the transmitter case and make a
note of the eight-digit number. Program
the number into the system in accordance
with the following procedure.
1. Firmly close the doors and the rear
gate (Outback) or trunk lid (Legacy).
2. Open the driver’s door, sit in the
driver’s seat, and close the door.
3. Perform the following steps within 45
seconds.
(1) Open and close the driver’s door
once.
Information Provided by:
1) LOCK
2) ON
(2) Insert the key into the ignition
switch, then turn it from the “LOCK”
position to the “ON” position 10 times
within 15 seconds.
NOTE
. When you complete step (2), an
electronic tone will sound once.
. If you do not perform steps (1) and
(2) within 45 seconds, an error will
occur. An electronic tone will not
sound. In this event, perform the whole
procedure again beginning with part 1.
4. Open and close the door once within
15 seconds.
NOTE
. When part 4 of the procedure is
completed, an electronic tone will
sound for 30 seconds.
. If you do not perform the operations
in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error
will occur and the electronic tone will
not sound. In this event, perform the
registration steps again beginning with
part 3 of the procedure.
5. Before the electronic tone stops
sounding, press the lock side of the power
door lock switch the same number of
times as the leftmost digit of the transmitter code. For example, press the lock
switch eight times if the leftmost digit of
the code is 8.
NOTE
. The electronic tone will stop sounding when you start entering the number.
. If you do not start entering the
number using the lock switch before
the electronic tone stops sounding, an
error will occur. In this event, perform
the registration steps again beginning
with part 3 of the procedure.
. If the interval between one press of
the switch and the next exceeds 5
seconds, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
6. When you have finished entering the
number, press the unlock side of the lock
Keys and doors 2-23
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-24 Keys and doors
switch within 5 seconds.
NOTE
. An electronic tone will sound.
. If you press the unlock side of the
lock switch when more than 5 seconds
have passed, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure
for each of the remaining digits of the
transmitter code beginning with the second digit (counting from the left) and
finishing with the eighth digit.
NOTE
. When you finish entering the eighth
digit, an electronic tone will sound for
30 seconds.
. If the interval between one press of
the switch and the next exceeds 5
seconds, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
8. Before the electronic tone stops
sounding, use the power door lock switch
to reenter the transmitter code beginning
with the leftmost digit.
NOTE
If you do not start entering the number
using the lock switch before the electronic tone stops sounding, an error
will occur. In this event, perform the
procedure again beginning with part 3.
9. When you have finished entering the
code a second time, an electronic tone will
sound for 1 second to indicate completion
of registration, provided the code entered
the second time is identical to that entered
the first time.
NOTE
If the code entered the second time is
not identical to the code entered the
first time, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 5. If an error occurs
five times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
10. If you wish to program another transmitter code into the system (up to four
transmitter codes can be programmed into
the system), perform the procedure beginning with part 4. When you have finished
programming all of the necessary transmitter codes into the system, remove the
key from the ignition switch.
11. Test every registered transmitter to
confirm correct operation.
! Deleting old transmitter codes
The control unit of the remote keyless
entry system has four memory locations to
store transmitter codes, giving it the ability
to operate with up to four transmitters.
When you lose a transmitter, the lost
transmitter’s code remains in the memory.
For security reasons, lost transmitter
codes should be deleted from the memory.
To delete old transmitter codes, program
four transmitter codes into the system. If
you have only one current transmitter,
program it four times. If you have two
current transmitters, program each one
twice. If you have three current transmitters, program two of them once and the
third one twice. This process will leave
only current transmitter codes in the
system’s memory.
Information Provided by:
NOTE
Make sure no one else is operating
their remote keyless entry system within range of your vehicle when programming transmitters. If someone else
were to operate their remote transmitter while you are programming your
transmitters, it is possible that their
transmitter code will be programmed
into your system, allowing them unauthorized access to your vehicle.
Alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the hazard warning flashers
flash if someone attempts to break into
your vehicle.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the access key.
The system will not be activated when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “Acc”
or “ON” position.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
The system can be armed and disarmed
with the remote transmitter.
The system will not be activated when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
& System alarm operation
The alarm system will give the following
alarms when triggered:
. The vehicle’s horn will sound and the
hazard warning flashers will flash for 30
seconds.
. If any door (or the rear gate/trunk lid)
remains open after the 30-second period,
the horn will continue to sound for a
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door (or
the rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the
horn is sounding, the horn will stop
sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
The alarm is triggered by:
. Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk
lid
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
forced entry (only models with shock
sensors (dealer option))
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
illumination of map lights and dome
light. The map lights and dome light
notification is deactivated as the factory setting. Refer to “Function settings” F24. A SUBARU dealer can
activate the system. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
Keys and doors 2-25
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-26 Keys and doors
& Activating and deactivating
the alarm system
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactivation, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Disarming the system” F2-29.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors (and the rear gate (Outback)).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
of the driver’s power door locking switch,
open the driver’s door within the following
1 second, and wait 10 seconds without
releasing the switch. The setting will then
be changed as follows:
If the system was previously activated:
The trip meter screen displays as follows
and the horn sounds twice, indicating that
the system is now deactivated.
. “ALOF” (models with type A combination meter)
. “AL oF” (models with type B combination meter)
If the system was previously deactivated:
The trip meter screen displays as follows
and the horn sounds once, indicating that
the system is now activated.
. “ALON” (models with type A combination meter)
. “AL on” (models with type B combination meter)
NOTE
You may have the above setting
change done by your SUBARU dealer.
& If you have accidentally triggered the alarm system
! To stop the alarm
Perform any of the following operations.
. Press any button on the access key/
remote transmitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
. Turn the push-button ignition to the
“Acc” position (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”).
. Carry the access key and press the
rear gate opener button (if equipped).
. Carry the access key and press the
door lock button (if equipped).
& Arming the system
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
engine hood, the windows and/or
moonroof are open. Always make sure
that they are fully closed before arming
the system.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it performed by your SUBARU dealer.
. If your vehicle is a Legacy and you
open the trunk using the remote transmitter’s “ ” button with the alarm
system armed, the system will be
temporarily placed in a standby state.
The system will go back to the surveillance state upon locking the trunk.
. The system is in the standby mode
for a 30-second period after locking the
doors with the remote transmitter. The
security indicator light will flash at
short intervals during this period.
. If any of the following actions is
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveillance state.
– Doors are unlocked using the
remote transmitter.
– Doors are unlocked using the
key less access funct ion ( i f
equipped).
Information Provided by:
– Any door (including the rear gate
(Outback) or the trunk (Legacy)) is
opened.
– The key is inserted into the
ignition switch (models without
“keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “Acc” position (models with “keyless access with pushbutton start system”).
! To arm the system using access
key/remote transmitter
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)/turn the
push-button ignition switch to the “OFF”
position (models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and
the trunk lid (Legacy)) are locked.
5. Close all doors (and the rear gate
(Outback)).
Access key
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the
system
Transmitter
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the
system
Security indicator light (type A)
Keys and doors 2-27
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-28 Keys and doors
Security indicator light (type B)
6. Briefly press the arm button (for less
than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear
gate (Outback)) will lock, an electronic
chirp will sound once, the hazard warning
flashers will flash once, and the security
indicator light will start flashing rapidly.
After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the security indicator light will
then flash slowly (twice approximately
every 2 seconds), indicating that the
system has been armed for surveillance.
If any of the doors (rear gate or trunk lid) is
not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
five times, the hazard warning flashers
flash five times to alert you that the doors
(or the rear gate) are not properly closed.
When you close the door, the system will
automatically arm and doors will automatically lock.
! To arm the system using power
door locking switch
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch (models without keyless access
function)/make sure the push-button ignition switch is turned off (models with
keyless access function).
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and
the trunk lid (Legacy)) are locked.
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate
(Outback)) but leave only the driver’s door
or the front passenger’s door open.
6. Press the front side (“LOCK” side) of
the power door locking switch to set the
door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the hazard warning flashers
will flash once and the security indicator
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
security indicator light will then flash
slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the system has been
armed for surveillance.
! To arm the system using the keyless access function (if equipped)
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped)
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the rear gate.
Information Provided by:
1) Door lock button
Security indicator light
6. Carry the access key and press the
door lock button. All doors (and the rear
gate) will lock, an electronic chirp will
sound once, the hazard warning flashers
will flash once, and the security indicator
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
security indicator light will then flash
slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the system has been
armed for surveillance.
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
five times, the hazard warning flashers
flash five times to alert you that the doors
(or the rear gate) are not properly closed.
When you close the door, the system will
automatically arm and doors will automatically lock.
& Disarming the system
Perform either of the following procedures.
. Briefly press the disarm button (for less
than 2 seconds) on the access key/remote
transmitter.
. Carry the access key and perform
either of the following procedures (models
with “keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear gate opener button.
The driver’s door will unlock (or the rear
gate will open), an electronic chirp will
sound twice, the hazard warning flashers
will flash twice and the security indicator
light will turn off.
To unlock all other doors and the rear gate
(Outback), briefly press the disarm button
a second time within 5 seconds.
! Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the
transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,
broken or the transmitter battery is too
weak), you can disarm the system without
using the transmitter.
The system can be disarmed if you turn
the ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”
to the “ON” position with a registered key/
access key.
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, if the access key battery is discharged, perform
the procedure described in “Switching
power” F9-20. In such a case, replace
the battery immediately. Refer to “Replacing battery of access key” F11-54.
& Valet mode
When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the access key/remote transmitter
is used only for locking and unlocking the
doors and rear gate (Outback) and panic
Keys and doors 2-29
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-30 Keys and doors
activation.
To enter the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating
and deactivating the alarm system” F226. The security indicator light will continue to flash once every 3 seconds
indicating that the system is in the valet
mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivating the alarm system” F2-26.
& Passive arming (models
without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
When passive arming mode has been
programmed by the dealer, arming of the
system is automatically accomplished
without using the access key/remote
transmitter. Note that in this mode,
DOORS MUST BE MANUALLY LOCKED.
! To enter the passive mode
If you wish to program the passive arming
mode, have it done by your SUBARU
dealer.
! Arming the system
CAUTION
In passive mode, the system will
automatically activate the alarm but
WILL NOT automatically lock the
doors. In order to lock the doors
you must either lock them as indicated in step 4 below or with the
key once they have been closed.
Failure to lock the doors manually
will result in a higher security risk.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to
“LOCK”/“OFF” position (all models) and
remove the key from the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors
with the inside door lock levers.
5. Close the doors. The system will
automatically arm after 1 minute.
In the passive mode, the system can also
be armed with the remote transmitter,
access key, keyless access function or
the power door locking switch. If the
remote transmitter, access key, keyless
access function or power door locking
switch is used to lock the vehicle, arming
will take place immediately regardless of
whether or not the passive mode has
been selected.
! Disarming the system
To disarm the system, briefly press the
disarm button on the access key/transmitter.
Information Provided by:
& Tripped sensor identification
The security indicator light flashes when
the alarm system has been triggered.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the
location of unauthorized intrusion or the
severity of impact on the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the indicator light will
illuminate for 1 second and then flash as
follows:
. When a door or rear gate (Outback)
was opened: 5 times
. When the trunk (Legacy) was opened:
4 times
. When a strong impact or multiple
impacts were sensed: twice (only models
with shock sensors (dealer option))
. When a light impact was sensed: once
(only models with shock sensors (dealer
option))
& Shock sensors (dealer option)
The shock sensors trigger the alarm
system when they sense impacts applied
to the vehicle and when any of their
electric wires is cut. The alarm system
causes the horn to sound and the hazard
warning flashers to flash for a short time
when the sensed impact is weak, but it
warns of a strong impact or multiple
impacts by sounding the horn and flashing
the hazard warning flashers, both lasting
approximately 30 seconds.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
connect them and set them for activation
or deactivation.
NOTE
. The shock sensors are not always
able to sense impacts caused by breaking in, and cannot sense an impact that
does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue
hammer).
. The shock sensors may sense vibration like those shown in the following and trigger the alarm system.
Select the settings of the alarm system
and shock sensors appropriately depending on where you usually park
your vehicle.
Examples:
– Vibration from construction site
– Vibration in multistory car park
– Vibration from trains
. You can have the sensitivity of the
shock sensors adjusted to your preference by your SUBARU dealer.
Child safety locks
WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the “LOCK” position when children
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
Each rear door has a child safety lock.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
“LOCK” position, the door cannot be
opened from inside. The door can only
be opened from the outside.
Keys and doors 2-31
Information Provided by:
2-32 Keys and doors
Windows
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always conform to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power windows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
being caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ windows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operating the power window.
The power windows operate only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& Power window operation by
driver
! Driver’s side power window
switches
1) Lock switch
2) For driver’s window
3) For front passenger’s window
4) For rear left passenger’s window
5) For rear right passenger’s window
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
! Operating the driver’s window
1) Automatically open/close
2) Open/close
To open:
Press the switch down lightly and hold it.
The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto
down function that allows the window to
be opened fully without holding the switch.
Press the switch down until it clicks and
release it, and the window will fully open.
To stop the window halfway, pull the
switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
Information Provided by:
For some models, this switch also has a
one-touch auto up function that allows the
window to be closed fully without holding
the switch.
Pull the switch up until it clicks and release
it, and the window will fully close. To stop
the window halfway, press the switch
down lightly.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery or
fuse replacement, the one-touch auto
up/down function is deactivated. Initialize the power window to reactivate
the one-touch auto up/down function.
Refer to “Initialization of power window” F2-35.
! Anti-entrapment function (driver’s
door) (models with one-touch auto
up function)
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test this function using fingers, hands or other
parts of your body.
. The anti-entrapment function
may not operate properly if some
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact similar to that caused by trapping an object
(for example, when the vehicle encounters a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment function may operate.
. The window cannot be operated for
a few seconds after the anti-entrapment function operates.
. If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due to situations such as
battery or fuse replacement, the antientrapment function is deactivated.
Initialize the power window to reactivate the anti-entrapment function. Refer to “Initialization of power window”
F2-35.
While closing with the one-touch auto up
function, if the window senses a substantial enough object trapped between the
window and the window frame, it automatically moves down slightly and stops.
! Operating the passengers’ windows
To open:
Press the appropriate switch down and
hold it until the window reaches the
desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
Keys and doors 2-33
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-34 Keys and doors
! Locking the passengers’ windows
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To lock:
Press the lock switch. When the lock
switch is in the lock position, the passengers’ windows cannot be opened or
closed.
To unlock:
Press the lock switch again.
& Power window operation by
passengers
! Passenger’s side power window
switches
Each passenger window can be controlled
by the power window switch located on
the door.
! Operating the windows
To open:
Press the switch down and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power
window switch cluster, located on the
driver’s side door, is in the lock position,
the passengers’ windows cannot be operated with the passengers’ switches.
Information Provided by:
& Initialization of power window
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due
to situations such as battery or fuse
replacement, the following functions are
deactivated.
. One-touch auto up/down function
. Anti-entrapment function (if equipped)
Initialize the power window in the following
procedure to reactivate such functions.
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway
by pushing down the power window
switch.
4. Pull up the power window switch and
close the window completely. Continue
pulling up the switch for approximately 1
second after the window is closed completely.
Trunk lid (Legacy)
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed
while driving.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
trunk could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small children.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
& To open and close the trunk
lid from outside
The trunk lid can be opened using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-20.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
trunk lid down until the latch engages.
NOTE
. Do not leave your valuables in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
. Even when the trunk lid cannot be
opened using the remote keyless entry
system, you can open the trunk lid by
using the key. Refer to “Trunk lid
(Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot be
opened” F9-21.
& To open the trunk lid from
inside
Press and hold the trunk lid opener switch
for more than 1 second.
Keys and doors 2-35
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-36 Keys and doors
! To lock and unlock the trunk lid
opener switch
When you entrust your valet key to
another person, you can lock the trunk
lid opener switch to prevent items in the
trunk from being stolen.
To lock the trunk lid opener switch, perform the following procedure.
1. Open the glove box. Refer to “Glove
box” F6-6.
2. Press the trunk lid opener lock button.
To unlock the trunk lid opener switch,
perform the same procedure again.
& Internal trunk lid release
handle
The internal trunk lid release handle is a
device designed to open the trunk lid from
inside the trunk. In the event children or
adults become locked inside the trunk, the
handle allows them to open the lid. The
handle is located on the inside of the trunk
lid.
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,
pull the yellow handle as indicated by the
arrow on the handle. This operation
unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the
lid.
The handle is made of material that
remains luminescent for approximately
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
WARNING
Never allow any child to get in the
trunk and play with the release
handle. If the driver starts the vehicle without knowing that a child is
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while gripping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage
of the handle.
. Load the trunk so that cargo
cannot strike the release handle.
If the cargo hits the handle while
the vehicle is being driven, the
handle may be pulled and the
trunk lid may open. That may
cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic
safety hazard.
Information Provided by:
! Inspection
Perform the following steps at least twice
a year to check the release handle for
correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin
blade. Slide the flat-head screwdriver
blade from the slit aperture of the lock
assembly fully to the end until you hear a
click.
This places the latch in the locked position.
3. Move the release handle, from outside
the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
check if the latch is released.
If the latch is not released, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the
latch, then close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the release
handle feels restricted or not entirely
smooth during operation, or the handle
and/or handle base is cracked, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
Keys and doors 2-37
Information Provided by:
2-38 Keys and doors
Rear gate (Outback)
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
“Power door locking switches” F2-8.
. Keyless access with push-button start
system (if equipped): Refer to “Keyless
access with push-button start system
(Outback – if equipped)” F2-9.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-19.
To open:
First unlock the rear gate lock then push
the rear gate opener button.
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull it down holding the recessed grip.
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while driving.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also avoid closing the rear
gate by pulling on the recessed
grip from inside the cargo space.
There is a danger of your hand
being caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when opening or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading cargo.
Information Provided by:
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a
malfunction in the door locking/unlocking system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the
rear gate lock release lever. For the
procedure, refer to “Rear gate (Outback) – if the rear gate cannot be
unlocked” F9-22.
Moonroof (if equipped)
WARNING
Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude from
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or turns sharply or if the
vehicle is involved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, you must
conform to the following instructions without exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety (models
without “keyless access with
push-button start system”) and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operating the moonroof.
. Never try to check the anti-entrapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the
moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
. The anti-entrapment function
does not operate when the moonroof is being tilted down. Be sure
to confirm that it is safe to do so
before tilting the moonroof down.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Keys and doors 2-39
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
2-40 Keys and doors
& Moonroof switches
! Tilting moonroof
1) Raise
2) Lower
The raising function will only operate when
the moonroof is fully closed. The lowering
function will only operate when the moonroof is raised.
Press the rear side of the “UP/DOWN”
switch to raise the moonroof.
Press the front side of the “UP/DOWN”
switch to lower the moonroof.
Release the switch after the moonroof has
been raised or has been lowered completely. Pressing the switch continuously
may cause damage to the moonroof.
NOTE
One-touch operation does not take
place when the moonroof is lowered.
Press the switch continuously to lower
the moonroof.
! Sliding moonroof
1) Open
2) Close
Press the rear side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”
switch to open the moonroof. The sun
shade will also be opened together with
the moonroof. For Outback, the moonroof
will stop at a position approximately 0.8 in
(2 cm) away from the fully opened position. Press the switch again to open the
moonroof completely.
Press the front side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”
switch to close the moonroof.
To stop the moonroof at a selected midway position while opening or closing it,
momentarily press the front side or rear
side of the switch.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recommended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
! Anti-entrapment function
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to the fully open
position and stops there. The anti-entrapment function may also be activated by a
strong shock on the moonroof even when
there is nothing trapped.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
Information Provided by:
& Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or
backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
Keys and doors 2-41
Information Provided by:
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Information Provided by:
Ignition switch (models without pushbutton start system)......................................... 3-3
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3
Acc..................................................................... 3-4
ON...................................................................... 3-4
START ................................................................ 3-4
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-4
Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-4
Push-button ignition switch (models with
push-button start system) ............................... 3-5
Safety precautions .............................................. 3-5
Operating range for push-button start system ...... 3-5
Switching power ................................................. 3-5
When access key does not operate properly ........ 3-6
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-7
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-7
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-7
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle
movement upon turning on the ignition
switch............................................................... 3-7
Speedometer....................................................... 3-8
Odometer............................................................ 3-8
Double trip meter ................................................ 3-9
Tachometer ........................................................ 3-10
Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-10
Temperature gauge (models with type A
combination meter) .......................................... 3-11
ECO gauge ........................................................ 3-11
Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-12
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-13
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-15
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators ........................................................ 3-15
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator light .................................................. 3-16
Coolant temperature low indicator light (if
equipped)/Coolant temperature high warning
light (if equipped)............................................. 3-16
Charge warning light.......................................... 3-17
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-17
Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 3-18
AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT and CVT
models) ........................................................... 3-18
Low tire pressure warning light (U.S. spec.
models) ........................................................... 3-18
ABS warning light.............................................. 3-20
Brake system warning light................................ 3-21
Hill Holder indicator light ................................... 3-23
Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-23
Door open warning light (models with type A
combination meter) .......................................... 3-23
Door open indicator light ................................... 3-23
Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-23
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT and CVT
models) ........................................................... 3-24
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-24
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-25
Warning chimes and warning light of the keyless
access with push-button start system (if
equipped) ........................................................ 3-25
Security indicator light....................................... 3-30
Select lever/gear position indicator..................... 3-30
Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-31
Instruments and controls
3
Information Provided by:
Instruments and controls
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-31
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 3-32
Cruise control set indicator light......................... 3-32
Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-32
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-32
Clock ................................................................... 3-32
Multi function display ........................................ 3-33
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-34
Average fuel consumption .................................. 3-34
Current fuel consumption ................................... 3-35
Driving range on remaining fuel.......................... 3-35
Multi information display (models with type
A combination meter) ..................................... 3-36
Basic operation.................................................. 3-37
Welcome screen................................................. 3-37
Starting screen................................................... 3-37
Good-bye screen................................................ 3-38
Warning screen .................................................. 3-38
Basic screens .................................................... 3-38
Menu screens .................................................... 3-39
Light control switch........................................... 3-41
Headlights ......................................................... 3-41
High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-42
Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-43
Daytime running light system............................. 3-43
Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-43
Illumination brightness control......................... 3-44
Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-44
Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-45
Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-46
Rear window wiper and washer switch
(Outback) ........................................................ 3-48
Defogger and deicer .......................................... 3-49
Mirrors ................................................................ 3-50
Type A inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-50
Type B inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-51
Auto-dimming mirror (if equipped)...................... 3-57
Auto-dimming mirror with HomeLink®
(if equipped) .................................................... 3-58
Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-63
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-64
Horn.................................................................... 3-65
Information Provided by:
Ignition switch (models without push-button start system)
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
“LOCK” while the vehicle is
being driven or towed because
that will lock the steering wheel,
preventing steering control. And
when the engine is turned off, it
takes a much greater effort than
usual to steer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moonroof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it banged
against your knees or hands while
you are driving, it could turn the
ignition switch from the “ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby stopping the engine.
Also, if the key is attached to a
keyholder or to a large bunch of
other keys, centrifugal force may act
on it as the vehicle moves, resulting
in unwanted turning of the ignition
switch.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
long time with the ignition switch in the
“ON” or “Acc” position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed
in this position. The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you remove the
key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the right and left
as you turn the key.
The key can be turned from “Acc” to
“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in
Instruments and controls 3-3
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-4 Instruments and controls
while turning it (all models) and the select
lever is in the “P” position (AT models and
CVT models).
& Acc
In this position the electrical accessories
(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
The engine is started in this position. The
starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the “ON” position.
If the engine does not start with your
registered key, pull out the key once (at
this time, the security indicator light will
blink), reinsert the key in the ignition
switch and then try to start the engine
again.
NOTE
The engine may not start in the following cases:
. The key grip is touching another key
or a metallic key holder.
. The key is near another key that
contains an immobilizer transponder.
. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.
& Key reminder chime
The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door opens and the key is in the
“LOCK” or “Acc” positions. The chime
stops when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position or the key is removed
from the ignition switch.
& Ignition switch light
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illuminates when driver’s door is opened or
when the driver’s door is unlocked using
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The light remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and gradually turns off
under the following conditions.
. When the driver’s door is closed
. When the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
The light gradually turns off under the
following conditions.
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position
. When the doors are locked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
Information Provided by:
Push-button ignition switch
(models with push-button
start system)
& Safety precautions
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-11.
& Operating range for pushbutton start system
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key is not detected
within the operating range of the antennas inside the vehicle, the pushbutton ignition switch and the engine
start cannot be operated.
. Even when the access key is outside
the vehicle, if it is placed too close to
the glass, it may be possible to switch
the power or to start the engine.
. Do not leave the access key in the
following places. It may become impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– At the corner of the cargo area
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key battery is discharged,
perform the procedure described in
“Access key – if access key does not
operate properly” F9-20. In such a
case, replace the battery immediately.
Refer to “Replacing battery of access
key” F11-54.
& Switching power
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
The power is switched every time the
push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the brake pedal. Every
time the button is pressed, the power is
switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “Acc”,
“ON” and “OFF”. When the engine is
stopped and the push-button ignition
switch is in “Acc” or “ON”, the operation
indicator on the push-button ignition
switch illuminates in orange.
Instruments and controls 3-5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-6 Instruments and controls
Power
status Indicator color Operation
OFF Turned off Power is turnedoff.
Acc Orange
The following
systems can be
used:
audio and accessory power
outlet.
ON
Orange
(while engine is
stopped) All electrical
systems can be
used.Turned off
(while engine is
running)
CAUTION
. When the push-button ignition
switch is left in “ON” or “Acc”
for a long time, it may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
. Do not spill drinks or other
liquids on the push-button ignition switch. It may cause a malfunction.
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch with a hand soiled
with oil or other contaminants. It
may cause a malfunction.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not operate smoothly, stop
the opera t ion . Contac t a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not illuminate even when
the instrument panel illumination
is turned on, have the vehicle
inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
. If the vehicle was left in the hot
sun for a long time, the surface of
the push-button ignition switch
may get hot. Be careful not to
burn yourself.
NOTE
. The push-button ignition switch cannot be switched to “OFF” when the
select lever is in a position other than
“P”.
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch, firmly press it all the
way.
. If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on or off.
. If the indicator light on the pushbutton ignition switch flashes in green
when the push-button ignition switch is
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition
switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
! Battery drainage prevention function
When the push-button ignition switch is
left in the “Acc” or “ON” position for
approximately 1 hour, the push-button
ignition switch will be automatically
switched to “OFF” to prevent the battery
from going dead. This function is activated
when the select lever is in the “P” position.
& When access key does not
operate properly
Refer to “Access key – if access key does
not operate properly” F9-20.
Information Provided by:
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher is used to
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works with the
ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
press the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,
press the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Meters and gauges
NOTE
Liquid crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges in the
combination meter. You will find their
indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Combination meter illumination
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the various parts of the
combination meter are illuminated in the
following sequence.
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
needles, gauge needles, odometer and
trip meter back light illuminate.
2. Meter needles and gauge needles
each show MAX position.
3. Meter needles and gauge needles
each show MIN position.
4. Dials and indicators in meters and
gauges light up.
5. Regular illumination (for driving) begins.
NOTE
The above sequence of operations may
not take place if you quickly turn the
ignition switch to start the engine. This
is not a malfunction.
& Canceling the function for
meter/gauge needle movement upon turning on the
ignition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the
movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that takes place when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
! Type A combination meter
Perform the procedures described in
“Gauge Initial Movement” F3-40.
Instruments and controls 3-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-8 Instruments and controls
! Type B combination meter
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “Acc” position.
2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or
“ ” on the trip meter display.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following illustration by pressing the
trip knob.
*1: “ ” or “ ” and “ ” or “ ” cannot
be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
*2: MT models only
3. To change the current setting, press
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
NOTE
. Your vehicle’s initial movement
setting of the meter/gauge needles
has been set for activation “ ” at
the time of shipment from the factory.
. It is not possible to change the initial
movement setting of the meter/gauge
needles when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position. Change the setting
when the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “Acc” position.
& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
& Odometer
Type A
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
Type B
This meter displays the odometer when
Information Provided by:
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “Acc”
position, the odometer/trip meter will light
up. If you do not press the trip knob within
10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter
will turn off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
& Double trip meter
Type A
Type B
1) Trip knob
This meter displays the two trip meters
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “Acc”
position, the odometer/trip meter will light
up. It is possible to switch between the A
trip meter and B trip meter indications
while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If
you do not press the trip knob within 10
seconds of illumination of the odometer/
trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn
off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following illustration by pressing the
trip knob.
*1: Models with type B combination meter
only: These indications cannot be
displayed when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
*2: MT models only
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob
and keep the knob pressed for more than
2 seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
Instruments and controls 3-9
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-10 Instruments and controls
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combination meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
NOTE
To protect the engine while the select
lever is in the “P” or “N” position (for
AT and CVT models) or the shift lever is
in the neutral position (for MT models),
the engine is controlled so that the
engine speed may not become too high
even if the accelerator pedal is pressed
hard.
& Fuel gauge
Type A
Type B
1) Low fuel warning light
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge
shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains
fuel.
The gauge may move slightly during
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
level movement in the tank.
If you press the trip knob while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “Acc”
position, the fuel gauge’s dial will light up
and the needle will indicate the amount of
fuel remaining in the tank.
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating
the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,
Information Provided by:
you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10
seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s
door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the
“E” position and the dial and needle will
turn off.
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge.
This indicates that the fuel filler door
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
& Temperature gauge (models
with type A combination meter)
1) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with the
engine coolant at this temperature range
and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to “Engine overheating” F913.
& ECO gauge
Type A
Instruments and controls 3-11
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-12 Instruments and controls
Type B
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
The ECO gauge shows the difference
between the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last
reset and the current rate of fuel consumption.
The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel
efficiency as shown in the following chart.
Displayed unit
Needle position
“+” side “-” side
MPG Better Poorer
l/100km Poorer Better
NOTE
. The ECO gauge shows only an
approximate indication.
. After resetting the trip meter, the
average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).
Until that time, the ECO gauge does not
operate.
Warning and indicator lights
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate momentarily and then go out
when the ignition switch is initially turned
to the “ON” position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and turn off after several seconds or after the engine has started:
: Seatbelt warning light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the driver fastens the
seatbelt.)
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the front seat passenger
fastens the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light
Information Provided by:
: Coolant temperature high warning light
(models with type B combination meter)
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
: Engine low oil level warning light
: Windshield washer fluid warning light
(models with type B combination
meter)
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
(AT and CVT models)
/ : ABS warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
/ : Brake system warning light
: Hill Holder indicator light
: All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT and
CVT models)
: Low tire pressure warning light
(U.S. spec. models)
: Low fuel warning light
: Door open warning light (models with
type A combination meter)
: Door open indicator light (models with
type B combination meter)
: Cruise control indicator light (models
with type B combination meter)
: Cruise control set indicator light
(models with type B combination
meter)
: Select lever/gear position indicator
(models with type B combination
meter)
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat, as required by current
safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by the warning lights in the locations
indicated in the following illustration and a
chime.
Driver’s warning light (type A)
Driver’s warning light (type B)
Instruments and controls 3-13
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-14 Instruments and controls
Front passenger’s warning light
! Operation
If the driver and/or front passenger have/
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passenger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
– At speeds lower than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
steady illumination and flashing at
15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
– At speeds higher than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s)
is/are flashing.
. It is possible to cancel the warning
operation that follows the 6-second
warning after turning ON the ignition
switch. When the ignition switch is
turned ON next time, however, the
complete sequence of the warning
operation resumes. For further details
about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
occupant detection system monitors
whether or not there is a passenger on
the front passenger’s seat.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the device from
functioning correctly or cause the device
to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
pull the seatback.
. Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
“Manual seat” F1-3 (models equipped
with manual seats only).
If the seatbelt warning device for the front
passenger’s seat does not function correctly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passenger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system
and its child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger’s
Information Provided by:
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
passenger’s seat does not function correctly after taking relevant corrective actions described above, immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
& SRS airbag system
warning light
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which may increase the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warning light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
& Front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indicators
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located next to the
clock in the center portion of the dashboard.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Following the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indicators remain illuminated or off simultaneously even after the system check
period, the system is malfunctioning.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.
Instruments and controls 3-15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-16 Instruments and controls
& CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illuminates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle operation without having the emission
control system checked and repaired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that there is a problem or potential
problem somewhere in the emission control system.
! If the light illuminates constantly
If the light illuminates constantly while
driving or does not turn off after the engine
starts, an emission control system malfunction has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light coming on
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator light
turn off immediately. It may take several
driving trips. If the light does not turn off,
take your vehicle to your authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
! If the light is blinking
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you should conform
to the following instructions.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as
possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may stop blinking
and illuminate steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle
checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Coolant temperature
low indicator light (if
equipped)/Coolant temperature high warning
light (if equipped)
CAUTION
. After turning the ignition switch
to the “ON” position, if this
indicator light/warning light behaves under any of the following
conditions, the electrical system
may be malfunctioning. Contact
your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.
– It remains blinking in RED.
– It remains illuminated in RED
for more than 2 seconds.
– It remains blinking in RED and
BLUE alternately.
. While driving, if this indicator
light/warning light behaves under
any of the following conditions,
Information Provided by:
take the specified appropriate
measure listed below.
– Blinking in RED:
Decelerate the vehicle. After
the blinking RED light turns
off, you can drive the vehicle
normally.
– Illuminated in RED:
Safely stop the vehicle as
soon as possible, and refer
to the emergency steps for the
case of engine overheating.
After that, have the system
checked by your nearest
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-13.
– Blinking in RED and BLUE
alternately:
The electrical system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
This coolant temperature low indicator
light/coolant temperature high warning
light has the following three functions.
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insufficient warming up of the engine
. Blinking in RED indicates that the
engine is close to overheating
. Illumination in RED indicates overheating condition of the engine
For the system check, this indicator light/
warning light illuminates in RED for
approximately 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
After that, this indicator light/warning light
changes to BLUE and maintains illumination in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light
turns off when the engine is warmed up
sufficiently.
If the engine coolant temperature increases over the specified range, the
indicator light/warning light blinks in
RED. At this time, decelerate the vehicle.
After the blinking RED light turns off, you
can drive the vehicle normally. However, if
the indicator light/warning light often blinks
in RED, the electrical system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
If the engine coolant temperature increases further, the indicator light/warning
light illuminates in RED continuously. At
this time, the engine may be overheating.
Safely stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, and refer to the emergency
steps for the case of engine overheating.
Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-13.
After that, have the system checked by
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the engine is restarted after a certain
driving condition, this indicator light/
warning light may illuminate in RED.
However, this is not a malfunction if the
indicator light/warning light turns off
after a short time.
& Charge warning light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains illuminated,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
& Oil pressure warning
light
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning light on. This
may cause serious engine damage.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
Instruments and controls 3-17
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-18 Instruments and controls
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
at the proper level but the light remains
i l luminated, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Engine low oil level
warning light
This light illuminates when the engine oil
level decreases to the lower limit. The
illuminating conditions and remaining oil
level are shown in the following items.
2.5 L models:
. when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position but the engine is not running:
approximately 2.2 US qt (2.1 liters, 1.8
Imp qt)
. while the engine is running: approximately 3.8 US qt (3.6 liters, 3.2 Imp qt)
3.6 L models:
. when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position but the engine is not running:
approximately 4.0 US qt (3.8 liters, 3.3
Imp qt)
. while the engine is running: approximately 5.6 US qt (5.3 liters, 4.7 Imp qt)
If the engine low oil level warning light
illuminates while driving, park the vehicle
at a safe and level location, and then
check the engine oil level. When the
engine oil level is not within the normal
range, refill with engine oil if necessary.
Refer to “Engine oil” F11-11.
If the warning light does not turn off after
refilling with engine oil or the warning light
illuminates even though the engine oil
level is within the normal range, have the
system checked by a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. After replacing or adding the engine
oil, if the engine oil level is within the
normal range when restarting the engine on a level surface, the warning
light will turn off.
. The warning light may illuminate
temporarily in the following conditions
because a low oil level may be detected
as a result of significant oil movement
in the engine.
– when the vehicle is considerably
inclined on an uphill or steep slope
– when the vehicle has continuously accelerated and decelerated
– when the vehicle is continuously
turned
– when the vehicle is driven on a
road that alternates continuously
between uphill and downhill
& AT OIL TEMP warning
light (AT and CVT models)
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
! Transmission control system warning
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
after the engine has started, it may
indicate that the transmission control
system is not working properly. Contact
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service
immediately.
& Low tire pressure
warning light (U.S. spec.
models)
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
Information Provided by:
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
are properly inflated, the light will go out.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Should the warning light illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one
minute, have the system inspected by
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the Low tire pressure warning light will illuminate
Instruments and controls 3-19
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-20 Instruments and controls
steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a
tire gauge. After any change to tire
pressure(s), the tire pressure monitoring system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehicle
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
km/h). After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to
at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
TPMS re-checking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low
pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later. Therefore, be
sure to install the specified size for
the front and rear tires.
& ABS warning light
CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS system repaired at
the first available opportunity by
your SUBARU dealer.
– The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position,
but it does not turn off even
when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 12 km/h
(8 mph).
– The warning light illuminates
during driving.
– The warning light flashes.
. When the warning light is on (and
brake system warning light is
off), the ABS function shuts
down; however, the conventional
brake system continues to operate normally.
. When the warning light is flashing, the ABS system may be
malfunctioning. However, the
conventional brake system continues to operate normally.
The ABS warning light illuminates together with the brake system warning light
if the EBD system malfunctions. For
further details of the EBD system malfunction warning, refer to “Brake system
warning light” F3-21.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following conditions,
the ABS system may be considered
normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illuminated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 8 mph (12
km/h).
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
Information Provided by:
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illuminate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off.
& Brake system
warning light
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains illuminated,
have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the brake system warning light
flashes, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe location, use
tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving
and contact your SUBARU dealer. For details, refer to “Electronic parking brake” F7-36.
NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
electronic parking brake applied, the
brake system warning light remains
illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and then turns off.
. When the electronic parking brake
switch is pressed to apply the electronic parking brake while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the brake system warning light
illuminates, remains illuminated for
approximately 30 seconds and then
turns off.
. Even if the brake system warning
light flashes, if the warning light behavior is as described in the following
examples, the electronic parking brake
system is not malfunctioning.
– The warning light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is applied or released.
– The warning light turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position again.
. The brake system warning light may
flash immediately after the engine is
started. However, it is not malfunctioning if the warning light turns off after
the electronic parking brake is released.
. The brake system warning light may
flash after the electronic parking brake
is frequently applied and released.
However, the electronic parking brake
system is not malfunctioning if the light
turns off for a short period of time.
This light has the following functions:
! Parking brake warning
The light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
parking brake is released.
! Brake fluid level warning
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake released.
If the light should illuminate while driving
(with the parking brake released and with
the ignition switch positioned in “ON”), it
could be an indication of leaking of brake
fluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs,
immediately stop the vehicle at the nearInstruments and controls 3-21
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-22 Instruments and controls
est safe place and check the brake fluid
level. If the fluid level is below the “MIN”
mark in the reservoir, do not drive the
vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. For
details, refer to “Towing” F9-14.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
The brake system warning light also
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
together with the ABS warning light.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”
F11-23.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. For
details, refer to “Towing” F9-14.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
The brake system warning light flashes
when the electronic parking brake system
is malfunctioning. If the warning light
flashes, promptly park in a safe location
as soon as possible and contact your
SUBARU dealer.
The brake system warning light remains
illuminated when the parking brake cannot
be released even if the parking brake
switch is pulled. For details, refer to
“Electronic parking brake” F7-36.
! Parking brake apply inhibit warning
The brake system warning light flashes for
10 seconds and a chirp sound will be
heard if the parking brake switch is
operated when the parking brake cannot
be applied.
! Frequent operation warning
The brake system warning light flashes for
20 seconds and a chirp sound will be
heard if the parking brake switch is
operated too frequently. In this case, the
operation of the parking brake switch is
restricted to protect the electronic parking
brake system.
NOTE
Wait until the warning light turns off.
! Emergency released warning
The brake system warning light flashes
when the parking brake is automatically
released in case of an emergency.
Information Provided by:
& Hill Holder indicator
light
WARNING
If the Hill Holder indicator light does
not illuminate even when the Hill
Holder switch is pressed to activate
the Hill Holder function, the electronic parking brake system may be
malfunctioning. Immediately stop
the vehicle in a safe location and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
The light illuminates when the Hill Holder
switch is pressed to activate the Hill
Holder function. For details about the Hill
Holder function, “Hill Holder function” F737.
& Low fuel warning
light
The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp
gal). It only operates when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
NOTE
This light does not turn off unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US
gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
& Door open warning
light (models with type A
combination meter)
The warning light illuminates if any door,
the rear gate (Outback) or trunk lid
(Legacy) is not fully closed. This function
is effective even if the ignition switch is in
the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “Acc” position (all
models), or the key is removed from the
ignition switch (models without “keyless
access with push-button start system”).
Always make sure this light is not illuminated before you start to drive.
& Door open indicator
light
When any of the doors, the rear gate
(Outback) or the trunk lid (Legacy) is not
fully closed, the door open indicator light
illuminates. This function is effective even
if the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “Acc” position (all models) or the
key is removed from the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
The open door is indicated by the corresponding part of the door open warning
light.
Always make sure this light is not illuminated before you start to drive.
& Windshield washer
fluid warning light
This light illuminates when the fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid tank decreases to the lower limit (approximately
0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).
Instruments and controls 3-23
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-24 Instruments and controls
& All-Wheel Drive
warning light (AT and
CVT models)
WARNING
Continued driving with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage. If the AWD
warning light flashes, promptly park
in a safe place then check whether
all four tires are the same diameter
and whether any of the tires has a
puncture or has lost air pressure for
some other reason.
NOTE
If the temporary spare tire is used, the
AWD warning light may flash. Use of
the temporary spare tire should therefore be restricted to the minimum time
necessary. Replace the temporary
spare tire with a conventional tire as
soon as possible.
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
with tires of different diameters fitted on its
wheels or with the air pressure excessively low in any of its tires.
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
light
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS
is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
becomes inoperative, causing the
warning light to illuminate. Although
both the Vehicle Dynamics Control
and ABS systems are inoperative in
this case, the ordinary functions of
the brake system are still available.
You will be safe while driving in this
condition, but drive carefully and
have your vehicle checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself malfunctions, the warning light only illuminates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) remains fully operational.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately and remains off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
Information Provided by:
while the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but turns off immediately and
remains off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
The indicator light flashes during activation of the skid suppression function and
during activation of the traction control
function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
existence of a problem. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the following condition. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
started.
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator
light
The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to the
“ON” position.
& Warning chimes and warning
light of the keyless access
with push-button start system (if equipped)
Access key warning light
The keyless access with push-button start
system sounds a warning chime and
flashes the access key warning light on
the combination meter in order to minimize
improper operations and help protect your
vehicle from theft.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning light flashes, take the appropriate action.
Instruments and controls 3-25
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-26 Instruments and controls
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if the indicator on the push-button ignition
switch is flashing in green when
starting the engine. This indicates
the status that the steering wheel is
not released and could result in an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
. When starting the engine again
after the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in green, if the operation
indicator is still flashing in green,
there could be a steering lock
malfunct ion. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in orange, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
. Even when the access key is within
the operating ranges inside the vehicle,
the access key warning for engine start
may be provided depending on the
status of the access key and the
environmental conditions.
. When the access key is taken out of
the vehicle through an open window,
the access key takeout warning or
passenger access key takeout warning
will not be provided.
! List of warnings
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warning light does not illuminate, take
the appropriate action.
Information Provided by:
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indicator
on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Ding,
ding ...
(intermittent)
— —
The driver’s door was opened while the
push-button ignition switch is “Acc” and the
select lever is in the “P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
*When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch
the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch was
switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door is
open.
Close the driver’s door.
— Short beep(2 seconds) —
Lockout warning:
An attempt was made to lock all doors while
the access key is left inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key from the vehicle,
and lock the doors.
*The doors cannot be locked while the
access key is inside the vehicle.
*A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors
will be unlocked.
Access key lock-in warning:
The door lock button was pressed while the
push-button ignition switch is “OFF” and the
access key is inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key from the vehicle,
and lock the doors.
*If the access key is inside the vehicle, the
doors cannot be locked.

Beep, beep,
beep, beep,
beep
(5 times)

Door ajar warning:
The door lock button is pushed while the
ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and
one of the doors including the rear gate is
opened.
Close the doors securely and lock them.
*If one of the doors including the rear gate is
opened, the doors cannot be locked.
— Long beep (60seconds max.) —
Power warning:
The door lock button was pressed while
carrying the access key, the push-button
ignition switch is in a position other than
“OFF” and the select lever is in the “P”
position.
Return the access key inside the vehicle, or
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”.
*If the push-button ignition switch is not
switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
locked.
Ding,
ding ...
(7 seconds)
— —
Access key warning:
The vehicle was driven while the access key
is not inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key, and drive the vehicle.
Instruments and controls 3-27
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-28 Instruments and controls
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indicator
on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Ding — —
Access key warning for engine start:
The push-button ignition switch was pressed
while the access key is not inside the
vehicle.
Carry the access key, and press the pushbutton ignition switch.
Ding Beep, beep,beep (3 times) —
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with the access
key and closed the driver’s door while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in
the “P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
Ding Beep, beep,beep (3 times) —
Passenger access key takeout warning:
A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with
the access key and closed a door other than
the driver’s door while the push-button
ignition switch is in a position other than
“OFF”.
Return the access key to inside the vehicle,
or switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”.
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous) —
The driver exited the vehicle with the access
key and closed the driver’s door while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Long beep
(continuous) — —
Select lever position warning:
The driver’s door was opened while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Ding — — The battery of the access key is low. Replace the battery of the access key.
Ding — Flashes in green(15 seconds max.)
Steering lock warning:
The engine start procedure was performed,
but the steering is still locked.
While turning the steering wheel right and left
lightly, depress the brake pedal and press
the push-button ignition switch.
Information Provided by:
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indicator
on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Ding — Flashes in orange
System malfunction warning:
A malfunction was detected in the power
system or steering lock.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and
have the vehicle inspected.
Instruments and controls 3-29
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-30 Instruments and controls
& Security indicator light
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation
of the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm system” F225.
! Immobilizer system
The light deters potential thieves by
indicating that the vehicle is equipped with
an immobilizer system. It begins flashing
under the following conditions.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Immediately after the push-button ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
. Immediately after any door is opened
when the push-button ignition switch is in
the “Acc” or “ON” position.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
. Approximately 60 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned from the “ON”
position to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position.
. Immediately after the key is pulled out.
If the indicator light does not flash, it may
indicate that immobilizer system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used, the security indicator light illuminates.
NOTE
Even if the security indicator light
flashes irregularly or its fuse blows
(the light does not flash if its fuse is
blown), the immobilizer system will
function normally.
& Select lever/gear position indicator
Type A
1) Upshift/downshift indicator
Information Provided by:
Type B
1) Upshift/downshift indicator (AT and CVT
models)
This indicator shows the position of the
shift lever (MT models) or select lever (AT
and CVT models).
! Upshift/downshift indicator (AT and
CVT models)
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator (which shows the
current gear selection) and the upshift/
downshift indicator light up. Refer to
“Selection of manual mode” F7-25.
! Gear position indicator setting (MT
models)
The gear position indicator light can be
activated or deactivated by performing the
following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or
“ ” on the trip meter display.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following illustration by pressing the
trip knob.
*1: “ ” or “ ” and “ ” or “ ” cannot
be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
*2: MT models only
3. To change the current setting, press
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
NOTE
. The initial setting for your vehicle of
the gear position indicator has been set
for activation “ ” at the time of
shipment from the factory.
. It is not possible to change the
setting of the gear position indicator
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position. Change the setting when the
ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”
or “Acc” position.
& Turn signal indicator
lights
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-43.
& High beam indicator
light
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
the headlight flasher is operated.
Instruments and controls 3-31
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-32 Instruments and controls
& Cruise control indicator light
This light illuminates when the cruise
control main button is pressed to activate
the cruise control function. For details,
refer to “To set cruise control” F7-40.
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illuminates, the cruise control indicator
light flashes at the same time. At
this time, avoid driving at high
speed and have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
& Cruise control set indicator light
This light illuminates when vehicle speed
has been set to use the cruise control
function.
& Headlight indicator
light
This indicator light illuminates under the
following conditions.
. when the light switch is turned to the
“ ” or “ ” position
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically
& Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates while the
front fog lights are illuminated.
Clock
NOTE
Your SUBARU dealer can change the
settings of activating/deactivating the
automatic adjustment of the clock by
the GPS (Global Positioning System)
(for models with the genuine SUBARU
navigation system). Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
The clock shows the time while the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
To adjust the time shown by the clock,
press the “+” button or the “−” button. If
you press the “+” button, the indicated
time will change in one-minute increments. If you press the “−” button, the
Information Provided by:
indicated time will change in one-minute
decrements. If you keep the button
pressed, the rate at which the indicated
time changes will speed up.
Multi function display
Type A combination meter
1) Multi function display switching knob
Type B combination meter
1) Multi function display switching knob
With the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, each successive press of the
multi function display switching knob
toggles the display in the following sequence.
The outside temperature is always indicated on the display with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position.
Instruments and controls 3-33
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-34 Instruments and controls
& Outside temperature indicator
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
The outside temperature indicator shows
the outside temperature in a range from
−22 to 1228F (−30 to 508C).
The indicator can give a false reading
under any of the following conditions:
. When there is too much sun.
. During idling; while running at low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shutdown.
. When the actual outside temperature
falls outside the specified indicator range.
! Road surface freeze warning indication
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
When the outside temperature drops to
378F (38C) or lower, the temperature
indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
If the outside temperature drops to 378F
(38C) or lower while the display is giving
an indication other than the outside
temperature, the display switches to the
outside temperature indication and flashes
for 5 seconds before returning to its
original indication.
If the display is already indicating an
outside temperature of 378F (38C) or lower
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the indication does not
flash.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
& Average fuel consumption
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
This indication shows the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
Information Provided by:
Pressing the trip knob toggles the indication between the average fuel consumption corresponding to the A trip meter
indication and the average fuel consumption corresponding to the B trip meter
indication.
When either of the trip meter indications is
reset, the corresponding average fuel
consumption value is also reset.
NOTE
. The indicated values vary in accordance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the
actual values and should thus be
treated only as a guide.
. When either trip meter indication is
reset, the average fuel consumption
corresponding to that trip meter indication is not shown until the vehicle has
subsequently covered a distance of 1
mile (or 1 km).
& Current fuel consumption
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
This indication shows the rate of fuel
consumption at the present moment.
& Driving range on remaining
fuel
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
The driving range indicates the distance
that can be driven taking into account the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
the average rate of fuel consumption.
When the low fuel warning light illuminates, the driving range indication flashes
for 5 seconds. (The display first switches
to the driving range indication if it was
originally giving some other indication.)
Instruments and controls 3-35
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-36 Instruments and controls
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
If the driving range is shown as “ ”,
there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the
tank. You must refuel the vehicle immediately.
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
Multi information display
(models with type A combination meter)
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
multi information display while the
vehicle is in motion. When operation
of the multi information display
interferes with your ability to concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle
before performing operations on the
screen. Also, do not concentrate on
the display while driving. Doing so
may cause you to look away from
the road and could result in an
accident.
Various information will be shown on the
multi information display. Also, a warning
message will appear on the display if a
malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition,
several settings for the displayed content
can be performed.
Multi information display
1) ECO gauge (refer to “ECO gauge” F311.)
2) Warning screen (refer to “Warning
screen” F3-38.)/Basic screen (refer to
“Basic screens” F3-38.)
3) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer
to “Select lever/gear position indicator”
Information Provided by:
F3-30.)
4) Cruise control information display
5) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” F3-8.)/
double trip meter (refer to “Double trip
meter” F3-9.)
Control switch
1) Up (select)
2) Set (enter)
3) Down (select)
& Basic operation
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
switch, the screens and selection items
can be switched. When the “ /SET”
switch is pulled toward you, the item can
be selected and set.
If there are some useful messages, such
as vehicle information, warning information, etc., they will interrupt the current
screen, and appear on the display accompanied by a beep. If such a screen is
displayed, take proper action according to
the message shown on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds. While
the “ ” information reminder is shown on
the display, it may be possible to display
the warning screen again. To recall the
message marked with “ ” on the display,
pull the “ /SET” switch on the steering
wheel toward you.
& Welcome screen
When the door is unlocked and the
driver’s door is opened, the welcome
screen will appear for approximately 20
seconds.
NOTE
. The welcome screen will disappear
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position while the welcome
screen is displayed.
. If any of the doors (including the
rear gate) is opened while the welcome
screen is displayed, the door ajar
warning will appear.
. The welcome screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to “Welcome
Good-bye Screen” F3-40.
& Starting screen
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the starting screen will
appear for approximately 2 seconds.
Instruments and controls 3-37
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-38 Instruments and controls
& Good-bye screen
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the “Good-bye”
screen will appear for approximately 3
seconds.
& Warning screen
Example of warning
If there is a warning message or a
maintenance notification, it will appear for
approximately 3 seconds. Take the appropriate actions based on the messages
indicated.
& Basic screens
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can change the
screen that is always displayed.
Default screen:
Journey time screen:
This screen displays the journey time (the
time that has elapsed since the ignition switch
was turned to the “ON” position).
Information Provided by:
Menu screen entering screen:
While this screen is selected, pull the “ /
SET” switch to enter the menu screen.
& Menu screens
Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the menu
screens when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
. The vehicle has been completely
stopped.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. The menu screen entering screen is
selected.
. The “ ” information reminder is off.
The menu list is as follows.
First menu Second menu
Screen Settings Welcome Good-bye Screen
Gauge Initial Movement
Languages
Return
EyeSight (models with EyeSight system) Warning Volume
Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function
Return
Auto Light Sensor ―
Default Settings ―
Instruments and controls 3-39
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-40 Instruments and controls
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can select the menu.
Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the
selected menu.
NOTE
If you enter the “Return” menu, the
system will return to the previous
screen.
! Screen Settings
After entering the “Screen Settings” menu,
select one of the following menus.
! Welcome Good-bye Screen
The welcome screen/good-bye screens
can be activated or deactivated. Select
“On” to activate the screens. Select “Off”
to deactivate the screens.
! Gauge Initial Movement
The movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that occurs when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position can be activated or deactivated.
Select “On” to activate. Select “Off” to
deactivate.
! Languages
Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel to display the preferred
language. Then pull the “ /SET” switch to
select the displayed language.
! EyeSight (models with EyeSight
system)
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
After entering the “EyeSight” menu, select
one of the following menus.
! Warning Volume
The volume of the warning buzzer that
sounds when the EyeSight system is in
use can be set in 3 stages (“Max”, “Mid”
and “Min”).
! Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound
When adaptive cruise control is used, the
buzzer that sounds if a vehicle is detected
in front or if detection is not possible can
be activated or deactivated. Select “On” to
activate the buzzer. Select “Off” to deactivate the buzzer.
! Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function
When adaptive cruise control is used, the
buzzer that sounds if a vehicle in front has
started can be activated or deactivated.
Select “On” to activate the buzzer. Select
“Off” to deactivate the buzzer.
! Auto Light Sensor
The operational sensitivity of the auto on/
off headlights can be set. You can select
“Min”, “Low”, “Mid” or “Max”.
! Default Settings
Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to
restore customized settings to the factory
default settings. Select “No” to return to
the previous screen without restoring to
the factory default settings.
Information Provided by:
Light control switch
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the off position. If the
vehicle is left unattended for a
long time with the light control
switch set to a position other
than the off position, the battery
may be discharged.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The light control switch operates when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “Acc”
or “ON” position.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The light control switch operates when the
key is inserted in the ignition switch.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
NOTE
The light control switch can be operated (except auto on/off headlights),
even under the following conditions.
. when the key is not inserted into the
ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start
system”)
. when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off (models with “keyless access with push-button start
system”)
If the driver’s door is opened while the
headlights are illuminated under such
conditions, a chirp sound will inform
the driver that the lights are illuminated.
& Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the turn signal lever.
“ ” position
Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
parking lights, front side marker lights, rear
side marker lights, tail lights and license
plate lights are on.
“ ” position
Instrument panel illumination, parking
lights, front side marker lights, rear side
marker lights, tail lights and license plate
lights are on.
“ ” position: auto on/off headlights
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side marInstruments and controls 3-41
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-42 Instruments and controls
ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are automatically
on or off depending on the level of the
ambient light.
“ ” position
The headlights are all off.
NOTE
The sensitivity of the auto on/off headlights can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, for models with
type A combination meter, the sensitivity can be changed using the display.
For details, refer to “Auto Light Sensor” F3-40.
! Sensor for the auto on/off headlights
The sensor is on the instrument panel as
shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect
the level of the ambient light correctly and the auto on/off headlights
may not operate properly.
& High/low beam change
(dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high
beam indicator light “ ” on the combination meter is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
back to the center position.
Information Provided by:
& Headlight flasher
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the lighting switch is in the
off position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
& Daytime running light system
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.
The high beam headlights will automatically illuminate at reduced brightness
when the engine has started, under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light switch is in the off or “ ”
position.
. The light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights do not turn
on automatically.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position (AT and CVT models).
NOTE
When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the front side marker lights,
tail lights and license plate lights are
illuminated.
Turn signal lever
To activate the right turn signal, push the
turn signal lever up. To activate the left
turn signal, push the turn signal lever
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does
not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The turn signal
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
Instruments and controls 3-43
Information Provided by:
3-44 Instruments and controls
Illumination brightness control
The illumination brightness of the clock
display, audio, air conditioner, multi function display and meter/gauge dims under
the following conditions.
. when the light switch is in the “ ” or
“ ” position
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the automatic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not canceled even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
Front fog light switch
(if equipped)
1) Headlight switch
2) Fog light switch
The front fog lights will turn on when the
fog light switch is placed in the “ ”
position while the headlights are in the
following condition.
. while the headlight switch is in the “ ”
position
. while the headlight switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights turn
on automatically
To turn off the front fog lights, turn the
switch back down to the “ ” position.
Information Provided by:
Indicator light (type A)
Indicator light (type B)
The indicator light located on the combination meter will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
Wiper and washer
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the windshield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 10 seconds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades and
cause the wiper motor to burn
out. Before operating the wiper
on a dry windshield or rear
window, always use the windshield washer.
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the wiper blades are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blades frozen to the
window glass could cause not
only the wiper blades to be
damaged but also the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper
blades are frozen to the window
glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear window
defogger before turning on the
wiper.
. If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, the
wiper motor could burn out even
if the wiper switch is turned off. If
this occurs, promptly stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and clean the
window glass to allow proper
wiper operation.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Instruments and controls 3-45
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-46 Instruments and controls
Refer to “Windshield washer
fluid” F11-35.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type wiper blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The windshield wiper motor is protected against overloads by a circuit
breaker. If the motor operates continuously under an unusually heavy load,
the circuit breaker may trip to stop the
motor temporarily. If this happens, park
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
wiper switch, and wait for approximately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and window glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Operate the windshield
washer for at least 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the wiper
blades results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades with new
ones. For replacement instructions,
refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
F11-37.
& Windshield wiper and washer
switches
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
! Windshield wipers
: Mist (for a single wipe)
: Off
: Intermittent
: Low speed
: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “ ” position.
Information Provided by:
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
! Wiper intermittent time control
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in several steps
from the shortest interval to the longest.
! Windshield washer
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever.
Windshield washer fluid warning light
(type A)
Windshield washer fluid warning light
(type B)
Instruments and controls 3-47
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-48 Instruments and controls
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning
light illuminates when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light illuminates, refill the tank with fluid. For the
tank refilling method, refer to “Windshield washer fluid” F11-35.
& Rear window wiper and
washer switch (Outback)
: Washer (accompanied by wiper op-eration)
: Continuous
: Intermittent
: Off
: Washer (accompanied by wiper op-eration)
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob
switch upward.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob
switch to the “ ” position.
With the switch turned to the “ ” position, the rear wiper will operate intermittently at intervals corresponding to the
vehicle speed. In this position, when you
move the select lever to the “R” position
(AT and CVT models) or the shift lever to
the reverse position (MT models), the rear
wiper will switch to continuous operation.
When you move the select lever/shift lever
from the “R” (reverse) position to another
position, the rear wiper will return to
intermittent operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob switch
upward to the “ ” position. The washer
fluid sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch
downward to the “ ” position. The washer
fluid sprays and the wiper operates until
you release the knob.
Information Provided by:
Defogger and deicer
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The defogger and deicer system is activated only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
Control switch (type A)
Control switch (type B)
To activate the defogger and deicer
system, press the control switch. The rear
window defogger, outside mirror defogger
and windshield wiper deicer are activated
simultaneously. The indicator light on the
control switch illuminates while the defogger and deicer system is activated.
To turn them off, press the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “Acc” or “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and outside
mirrors have been cleared and the windshield wiper blades have been deiced
completely before that time, press the
control switch to turn them off. If defrosting, defogging or deicing is not complete,
you have to press the control switch to
turn them on again.
For models with the automatic climate
control system, it is possible for a
SUBARU dealer to set the defogger and
deicer system for the continuous operation mode. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for details.
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system continuously for any longer than
Instruments and controls 3-49
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-50 Instruments and controls
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface
of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed
on the window.
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with
snow, remove the snow so that the
windshield wiper deicer works effectively.
. While the defogger and deicer system is in the continuous operation
mode, if the vehicle speed remains at
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15
minutes, the windshield wiper deicer
automatically stops operating, though
the rear window defogger and outside
mirror defogger maintain continuous
operation in this condition.
. While the defogger and deicer system is in the continuous operation
mode, if the battery voltage drops
below the permissible level, continuous operation of the defogger and
deicer system is canceled and the
system stops operating. Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Type A inside mirror (if
equipped)
The mirror has a day and night position.
Pull the tab at the bottom of the mirror
toward you for the night position. Push it
away for the day position. The night
position reduces glare from headlights.
Information Provided by:
& Type B inside mirror (if
equipped)
1) Rear view image display
2) HomeLink® button 1
3) HomeLink® button 2
4) Function indicator
5) HomeLink® button 3
6) Photosensor
7) Power on button
8) Power off button
The mirror has the following features.
. Auto-dimming function for anti-glare
capability
. Rear view image display
. HomeLink® Wireless Control System
Using the power on button, you can
display the various functions of the rear
view image display based on how long
you press the buttons.
Gear
position
Period of
time button
is pressed
Function
displayed
Except
R (reverse)
Briefly Auto-dimming
function ON/OFF*
R (reverse) Briefly Rear view image
display: ON/OFF*
mode
6 to 12
seconds
Enter the language selection
mode
12 to 15
seconds
Rear view image
display: operational/non-operational mode
*: The setting returns to “ON” as a default
setting every time the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position.
! Auto-dimming function
The auto-dimming function is an anti-glare
capability which automatically reduces
glare coming from headlights of vehicles
behind you.
By pressing the power on button, the autodimming function is turned on. By pressing
the power off button, the auto-dimming
function is turned off. When the autodimming function is on, the function
indicator will illuminate in green.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the shift
lever/select lever is shifted into the “R”
(reverse) position. This is to ensure good
rearward visibility during reversing.
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. During
nighttime driving, these sensors detect
distracting glare from vehicle headlights
behind you and automatically dim the
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
your vision. For this reason, use care not
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
similar items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
cloth or an applicator.
NOTE
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar item dampened with
Instruments and controls 3-51
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-52 Instruments and controls
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror surface.
By doing so, the sprayed glass cleaner
could enter the inside of the mirror
housing. That may cause a malfunction
in the mirror.
! Rear view image display
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position and the shift lever/select lever is
in the “R” (reverse) position, the rear view
camera automatically displays the rear
view image behind the vehicle on the
inside mirror.
Also, the following help lines are indicated
as a guide to help you realize the actual
distance from the display.
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
By pressing the power on button while the
shift lever/select lever is in the “R”
(reverse) position, the rear view image
display turns to the on mode. By pressing
the power off button while the shift lever/
select lever is in the “R” (reverse) position,
the rear view image display turns to the off
mode.
Once the rear view image display is set to
the off mode, the display stays in the off
mode, with the function indicator in orange, every time the shift lever/select
lever is shifted into the “R” (reverse)
position.
If the ignition switch is turned to the
”LOCK”/OFF” position, the display setting
returns to the on mode as a default setting
the next time the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position.
! Language mode change
The language mode of the captions on the
rear view image display is selectable in
English or French in the following ways.
1. Press and hold the power on button for
6 to 12 seconds while the shift lever/select
lever is in the “R” (reverse) position, and
then release it. The display will enter the
language selection mode.
2. Briefly press the power on button to
toggle the captions on the display in
English or French.
3. By releasing the power on button for 5
seconds, the display blinks one time to
show that the language mode is selected.
! Non-operational mode
The rear view image display can be set as
non-operational. After setting the display
to the non-operational mode, the display
does not show the rear view image even if
Information Provided by:
the ignition switch is reset (turning the
ignition switch to the “ON” position after
turning it to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position).
To set the display to the non-operational
mode, press and hold the power on button
for 12 to 15 seconds while the shift lever/
select lever is in the “R” (reverse) position,
and then release it. The display is now in
the non-operational mode. After the display has been set to the non-operational
mode, the function indicator will illuminate
in orange while the shift lever/select lever
is in the “R” (reverse) position.
To return the display to the operational
mode, press and hold the power on button
for 12 to 15 seconds again.
For precautions about the rear view
camera and the rear view image, refer to
“Rear view camera” F6-18.
! HomeLink® Wireless Control System
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control
devices such as gate operators, garage
door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
There are three HomeLink® buttons on the
mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this system, consult the
HomeLink® website at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.
Note the following information about this
system.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it
complies with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission Rules in
the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry
Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes and modifications to this system
by anyone other than an authorized
service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are
registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
WARNING
. Whe n p r o g r amm i n g t h e
HomeLink® Wireless Control System, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way
of the garage door or other
device to prevent potential harm
or damage.
. Do not use the HomeLink® Wireless Control System with a garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink®
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the device’s motor
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout.
Instruments and controls 3-53
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-54 Instruments and controls
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink®
Wireless Control System for the desired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in the event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmitter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
! Garage door opener programming in
the U.S.A.
NOTE
When programming the HomeLink®
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
1) HomeLink® button 1
2) HomeLink® button 2
3) HomeLink® button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the indicator light begins to flash
(after approximately 20 seconds). Then
release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door
opener’s hand-held transmitter between
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
the HomeLink® button you wish to program.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace
this programming step 4 with procedures in “Programming for entrance
gates and garage door openers in
Canada” F3-55.
5. Hold down both buttons until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed button and check the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the indicator light stays on continuously, your garage door should activate and the programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be protected by a rolling code feature. In this
case you need to perform the additional
steps that are described in “Programming
rolling-code-protected garage door openers in the U.S.A.” F3-55.
Information Provided by:
! Programming rolling-code-protected
garage door openers in the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink®
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A.” F3-54. Then
continue with the following steps.
NOTE
The assistance of a second person
may make the programming quicker
and easier.
1. Locate the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
refer to your garage door opener’s instruction manual.
1) Training button
2. Press the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit
(which activates the “training light” on the
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
2 seconds and release the HomeLink®
button that was programmed in the previous section. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.
NOTE
Some garage door openers may require you to do the above press-holdrelease sequence a third time to complete the programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink® Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates and
garage door openers in Canada
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
Instruments and controls 3-55
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-56 Instruments and controls
1) HomeLink® button 1
2) HomeLink® button 2
3) HomeLink® button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the HomeLink® indicator light
begins to flash (after approximately 20
seconds). Then release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmitter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the handheld transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds,
release both buttons.
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink® button.
! Operating the HomeLink® Wireless
Control System
Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wireless Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate button. The indicator light illuminates, indicating that the signal is being transmitted.
! Programming other devices
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button
1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
the button until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the HomeLink® indicator light
begins to flash slowly (after approximately
20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pressing the HomeLink®
button.
! Erasing HomeLink® button memory
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed HomeLink® buttons be
erased for security purposes.
Information Provided by:
1) HomeLink® button 1
2) HomeLink® button 2
3) HomeLink® button 3
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
light begins to flash (after approximately
20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
! In case a problem occurs
If you cannot activate a device using the
corresponding HomeLink® button after
programming, contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515 for assistance.
& Auto-dimming mirror (if
equipped)
1) LED
2) Switch
3) Sensor
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you.
By pressing and holding the switch for
less than 3 seconds, the automatic dimming function is toggled on or off. When
the automatic dimming function is on, the
LED indicator will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the shift
lever/select lever is shifted into the “R”
(reverse) position. This is to ensure good
reward visibility during reversing.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing and damage the mirror.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
the front and back sides. During nighttime
driving, these sensors detect distracting
glare from vehicle headlights behind you
and automatically dim the mirror to eliminate glare and preserve your vision. For
this reason, use care not to cover the
sensors with stickers, or other similar
items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean
using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an
Instruments and controls 3-57
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-58 Instruments and controls
applicator.
& Auto-dimming mirror with
HomeLink® (if equipped)
1) HomeLink® button 1
2) HomeLink® button 2
3) LED
4) HomeLink® button 3
5) Sensor
6) Automatic dimming on button
7) Automatic dimming off button
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a HomeLink® wireless
control system.
By pressing the automatic dimming on/off
button, the automatic dimming function is
turned on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the LED indicator
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the shift lever/select lever is
shifted into the “R” (reverse) position. This
is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing and damage the mirror.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. During
nighttime driving, these sensors detect
distracting glare from vehicle headlights
behind you and automatically dim the
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
your vision. For this reason, use care not
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
similar items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
cloth or an applicator.
! HomeLink® Wireless Control System
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control
devices such as gate operators, garage
door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
There are three HomeLink® buttons on the
mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this system, consult the
HomeLink® website at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.
Note the following information about this
system.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it
complies with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission Rules in
the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry
Information Provided by:
Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes and modifications to this system
by anyone other than an authorized
service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are
registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
WARNING
. Whe n p r o g r amm i n g t h e
HomeLink® Wireless Control System, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way
of the garage door or other
device to prevent potential harm
or damage.
. Do not use the HomeLink® Wireless Control System with a garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink®
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the device’s motor
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout.
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink®
Wireless Control System for the desired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in the event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmitter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
! Garage door opener programming in
the U.S.A.
NOTE
When programming the HomeLink®
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
Instruments and controls 3-59
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-60 Instruments and controls
1) HomeLink® button 1
2) HomeLink® button 2
3) HomeLink® button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the indicator light begins to flash
(after approximately 20 seconds). Then
release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door
opener’s hand-held transmitter between
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
the HomeLink® button you wish to program.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace
this programming step 4 with procedures in “Programming for entrance
gates and garage door openers in
Canada” F3-61.
5. Hold down both buttons until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed button and check the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the indicator light stays on continuously, your garage door should activate and the programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be protected by a rolling code feature. In this
case you need to perform the additional
steps that are described in “Programming
rolling-code-protected garage door openers in the U.S.A.” F3-60.
! Programming rolling-code-protected
garage door openers in the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink®
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A.” F3-59. Then
continue with the following steps.
NOTE
The assistance of a second person
may make the programming quicker
and easier.
1. Locate the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
refer to your garage door opener’s instrucInformation Provided by:
tion manual.
1) Training button
2. Press the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit
(which activates the “training light” on the
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
2 seconds and release the HomeLink®
button that was programmed in the previous section. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.
NOTE
Some garage door openers may require you to do the above press-holdrelease sequence a third time to complete the programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink® Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates and
garage door openers in Canada
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
1) HomeLink® button 1
2) HomeLink® button 2
3) HomeLink® button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the HomeLink® indicator light
begins to flash (after approximately 20
seconds). Then release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmitter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the handheld transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
Instruments and controls 3-61
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-62 Instruments and controls
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds,
release both buttons.
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink® button.
! Operating the HomeLink® Wireless
Control System
Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wireless Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate button. The indicator light illuminates, indicating that the signal is being transmitted.
! Programming other devices
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button
1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
the button until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the HomeLink® indicator light
begins to flash slowly (after approximately
20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pressing the HomeLink®
button.
! Erasing HomeLink® button memory
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed HomeLink® buttons be
erased for security purposes.
1) HomeLink® button 1
2) HomeLink® button 2
3) HomeLink® button 3
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
light begins to flash (after approximately
20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
! In case a problem occurs
If you cannot activate a device using the
corresponding HomeLink® button after
programming, contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515 for assistance.
Information Provided by:
& Outside mirrors
! Convex mirror (passenger side)
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
the convex mirror to judge the
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in
convex mirror.
! Remote control mirror switch
The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“Acc” position.
1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjust
the left-hand mirror or to the “R” side to
adjust the right-hand mirror.
2. Move the knob in the direction you
want to move the mirror.
3. Return the knob to the neutral position
to prevent unintentional operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
! Power folding mirror switch (if
equipped)
The power folding mirror switch operates
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or “Acc” position.
To fold the outside mirrors, push the power
folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors,
push the switch again.
NOTE
. When the temperature is low, the
outside mirrors may stop during operation. Push the switch again. When the
outside mirrors do not work by operating the switch, move the outside mirrors several times manually. This
makes it possible to operate them by
switch operation.
. When you operate the power folding
Instruments and controls 3-63
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
3-64 Instruments and controls
mirror switch continuously, it may not
work. This is not a malfunction. Operate after waiting for a short period of
time.
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by operating the switch. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by operating the switch again.
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in
personal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to
the fixed position, adjust the
steering wheel again. It is dangerous to drive without locking
the steering wheel. This may
cause loss of vehicle control
and result in personal injury.
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to
“Front seats” F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
Information Provided by:
Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Instruments and controls 3-65
Information Provided by:
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Information Provided by:
Ventilator control................................................. 4-2
Center ventilators................................................ 4-2
Side ventilators ................................................... 4-2
Rear ventilators (if equipped)............................... 4-2
Climate control panel.......................................... 4-3
Type A ................................................................ 4-3
Type B ................................................................ 4-4
Automatic climate control system (type B)....... 4-5
Temperature sensors........................................... 4-5
Manual climate control ....................................... 4-6
Airflow mode selection ........................................ 4-6
Temperature control ............................................ 4-7
Fan speed control ............................................... 4-8
Air conditioner control ........................................ 4-8
Air inlet selection ................................................ 4-8
Defrosting ............................................................ 4-8
Operating tips for heater and air
conditioner ........................................................ 4-9
Cleaning ventilator grille ...................................... 4-9
Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ............................................................. 4-9
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit................................................................ 4-9
Checking air conditioning system before summer
season .............................................................. 4-9
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
low temperature weather condition..................... 4-9
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
is heavily loaded................................................ 4-9
Refrigerant for your climate control system .......... 4-9
Air filtration system........................................... 4-10
Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-10
Climate control
4
Information Provided by:
4-2 Climate control
Ventilator control
& Center ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the center grille
open/close wheel to the “ ” position.
To close it, turn the wheel to the “ ”
position.
& Side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the side grille
open/close wheel upward to the “ ”
position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
“ ” position.
& Rear ventilators (if equipped)
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the rear grille
open/close wheel upward to the “ ”
position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
“ ” position.
Information Provided by:
Climate control panel
& Type A
1) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-8.)
2) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Temperature control” F4-7.)
3) Airflow control buttons (Refer to “Airflow
mode selection” F4-6.)
4) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-8.)
5) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-8.)
6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-49.)
Climate control 4-3
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
4-4 Climate control
& Type B 1) Temperature control button (driver’s side)
(Refer to “Temperature control” F4-7.)
2) Dual mode button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control system (type B)” F4-5
and “Temperature control” F4-7.)
3) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-6.)
4) Fan speed control button (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-8.)
5) Temperature control button (front passenger’s side) (Refer to “Temperature
control” F4-7.)
6) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic climate control system (type B)” F4-5.)
7) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control system (type B)” F4-5.)
8) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-8.)
9) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-6 and “Defrosting” F4-8.)
10) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-49.)
11) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-8.)
Information Provided by:
Automatic climate control
system (type B)
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate control system when the engine is running.
. The blower fan rotates at a low
speed when the engine coolant temperature is low.
. For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold weather, press the “A/C”
button.
When the automatic climate control mode
is selected, the following items are automatically controlled.
. Outlet air temperature
. Fan speed
. Airflow distribution
. Air inlet control
. Air conditioner compressor operation
To activate this mode, perform the following procedure.
1. Set the preferred temperature using
the temperature control button.
2. Press the “AUTO” button. The FULL
AUTO mode is selected and the “FULL
AUTO” indicator light on the display
illuminates.
NOTE
. When the “DUAL” button is pressed,
separate temperature settings for the
driver’s side and passenger’s side can
be enabled (DUAL mode). To cancel the
DUAL mode, press the “DUAL” button
again. The temperature setting for the
passenger’s side becomes the same as
the setting for the driver’s side.
. If you operate any of the buttons on
the control panel other than the “OFF”
button, rear window defogger button
and temperature control buttons during
FULL AUTO mode operation, the
“FULL” indicator light on the control
panel will turn off and the “AUTO”
indicator light will remain illuminated.
You can then manually control the
system as desired. To change the
system back to the FULL AUTO mode,
press the “AUTO” button.
3. To turn off the climate control system,
press the “OFF” button. The air inlet
selection is then automatically switched
to the outside air mode.
& Temperature sensors
1) Solar sensor
2) Interior air temperature sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
Climate control 4-5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
4-6 Climate control
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior temperature correctly. To avoid damaging the
sensors, observe the following precautions:
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows:
– Solar sensor: beside the speaker grille
on the dashboard
– Interior air temperature sensor: on the
side of the driver-side part of the center
panel
– Outside temperature sensor: behind
front grille.
Manual climate control
& Airflow mode selection
Select the preferred airflow mode by
performing the following procedure.
. Press the preferred airflow control
button (type A)
. Press the airflow mode selection button
or defroster button (type B)
Airflow modes are as follows.
A) Models with rear ventilators
(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
A) Models with rear ventilators
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and the
foot outlets
A) Models with rear ventilators
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of
Information Provided by:
the instrument panel and some through
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and
both side windows to prevent fogging.)
A) Models with rear ventilators
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets,
foot outlets and both side outlets of the
instrument panel
A) Models with rear ventilators
(Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets and
both side outlets of the instrument panel
NOTE
. When the “ ” mode or “ ” mode
is selected, the air conditioner compressor automatically operates to more
quickly defog the windshield. At the
same time, the air inlet selection is
automatically set to the outside air
mode.
In this state:
– The air conditioner indicator light
does not illuminate.
– You cannot stop the air conditioner compressor by pressing the
air conditioner button.
– You cannot select the “recirculation” mode by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
& Temperature control
! Type A
Turn the temperature control dial over a
range from the blue side (cool) to red side
(warm) to regulate the temperature of
airflow from the air outlets.
! Type B
To increase the temperature setting, press
the “ ” side of the temperature control
button. To decrease the temperature
setting, press the “ ” side of the temperature control button.
Each temperature setting is shown on the
display. When “LO” is shown, the system
provides maximum cooling performance.
When “HI” is shown, the system provides
maximum heating performance.
NOTE
When the “DUAL” button is pressed,
separate temperature settings for the
driver’s side and passenger’s side can
be enabled (DUAL mode). To cancel the
DUAL mode, press the “DUAL” button
again. The temperature setting for the
passenger’s side becomes the same as
the setting for the driver’s side.
Climate control 4-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
4-8 Climate control
& Fan speed control
The fan operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. Select the
preferred fan speed by turning the fan
speed control dial (type A), or by pressing
the fan speed control buttons (type B).
& Air conditioner control
The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is
on, the indicator light on the air conditioner
button (type A)/“A/C” indicator light (type
B) illuminates.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again. The indicator light will turn
off.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold weather, turn on the air
conditioner. However, if the ambient
temperature decreases to approximately 328F (08C), the air conditioner
and dehumidification system may not
work properly.
& Air inlet selection
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
when driving on a dusty road. When the
ON position is selected, the indicator light
on the air inlet selection button illuminates.
OFF position (outside air): Outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment.
Press the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty. The indicator light will
turn off.
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON position may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
Defrosting
Select the desired “ ”mode or “ ” mode
to defrost or dehumidify the windshield
and front door windows by performing the
following procedures.
For type A: Press the airflow control button
and select the “ ” mode or “ ” mode.
For type B: Press the airflow mode
selection button to select the “ ” mode
or press the defroster button to select the
“ ” mode.
NOTE
. When the “ ” mode or “ ” mode
is selected, the air conditioner compressor automatically operates to more
quickly defog the windshield. (The air
conditioner indicator light does not
illuminate in this case.) At the same
time, the air inlet selection is automatically set to the outside air mode. For
details, refer to “Airflow mode selection” F4-6.
. For type B, if the defroster button is
pressed while the “ ” mode is selected, it will return to the previous
mode before selecting the “ ” mode.
Information Provided by:
Operating tips for heater and
air conditioner
& Cleaning ventilator grille
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient cooling after parking
in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of
the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in
the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking air conditioning
system before summer season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air conditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in
high humidity and low temperature weather condition
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning
system.
& Air conditioner compressor
shut-off when engine is
heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving on a steep
upgrade.
& Refrigerant for your climate
control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the method of adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant is different from the method for
CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
result of using the wrong refrigerant are
not covered under warranty.
Climate control 4-9
Information Provided by:
4-10 Climate control
Air filtration system
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
equipped with an air filtration system.
Replace the air filter element according
to the replacement schedule shown in the
following table. This schedule should be
followed to maintain the filter’s dust
collection ability. Under extremely dusty
conditions, the filter should be replaced
more frequently. Have your filter checked
or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For
replacement, use only a genuine
SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule:
Every 15 months or 15,000 miles (24,000
km) whichever comes first
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter.
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster performance if not properly maintained.
& Replacing an air filter
1. Remove the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the
glove box.
(3) Pull out the glove box.
2. Remove the cover of the air filter.
Information Provided by:
3. Remove the air filter.
4. Replace the air filter element with a
new one.
5. Reinstall the cover of the air filter.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
6. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
the damper shaft.
7. Close the glove box.
8. LABEL installation
(1) Fill out the information on the
service label (small).
1) Service label
(2) Attach the service label to the
driver’s side door pillar.
Climate control 4-11
Information Provided by:
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Information Provided by:
Antenna system .................................................. 5-3
Printed antenna................................................... 5-3
FM reception....................................................... 5-3
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-3
Audio set ............................................................. 5-4
Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5
Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6
Power and audio controls .................................. 5-7
Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-7
Sound controls and audio settings ...................... 5-7
Adjustable level of each mode ............................. 5-9
FM/AM radio operation ...................................... 5-10
FM selection (type A audio) ................................ 5-10
AM selection (type A audio)................................ 5-10
FM/AM selection (type B audio) .......................... 5-10
Tuning ............................................................... 5-10
HD RadioTM Technology (Digital AM and FM
Radio) (type B audio)........................................ 5-12
RBDS text display .............................................. 5-14
Station preset .................................................... 5-15
Satellite radio operation (if equipped) .............. 5-16
Sirius XMTM Satellite Radio Activation (for
U.S.A. only)...................................................... 5-16
Satellite radio reception...................................... 5-16
Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ................... 5-17
Band selection ................................................... 5-17
Channel and category selection.......................... 5-18
Channel preset................................................... 5-18
When the following messages are displayed
(type B audio) .................................................. 5-19
CD player operation .......................................... 5-19
Play file ............................................................. 5-20
How to insert a CD ............................................ 5-20
How to play back a CD ...................................... 5-20
To select a track from the beginning .................. 5-21
Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-21
Repeating .......................................................... 5-22
Random playback .............................................. 5-22
Scan ................................................................. 5-23
Display selection (type A audio) ......................... 5-24
Folder selection................................................. 5-24
How to eject a CD from the player...................... 5-24
When the following messages are displayed....... 5-25
Auxiliary input jack............................................ 5-25
Precautions to observe when handling a
compact disc................................................... 5-26
USB storage device / iPod® operations ........... 5-28
Play file ............................................................. 5-28
Connectable USB storage device ....................... 5-28
Connectable iPod® models................................. 5-29
Connecting USB storage device / iPod® ............. 5-29
How to play back............................................... 5-30
To select a track from the beginning .................. 5-31
To select a chapter from the beginning when
connecting iPod® ............................................. 5-31
Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-31
Repeating .......................................................... 5-31
Random playback .............................................. 5-32
SCAN (only when connecting USB storage
device) ............................................................ 5-32
Audio
5
Information Provided by:
Audio
Selecting category (only when connecting
iPod®) .............................................................. 5-33
Display selection (type A audio).......................... 5-34
Folder selection (only when connecting USB
storage device) ................................................ 5-34
Selection from list (only when connecting USB
storage device) (type B audio) .......................... 5-35
Setting the playing speed (only when the
audiobook is playing) (type B audio)................. 5-35
When the following messages are displayed ....... 5-35
Audio control buttons........................................ 5-37
MODE button ..................................................... 5-37
“ ” and “ ” switch........................................... 5-38
Volume control switch ........................................ 5-39
MUTE button (if equipped) ................................. 5-39
Bluetooth® audio ............................................... 5-39
Media format ..................................................... 5-40
Setting Bluetooth® audio (type A audio) ............. 5-40
Setting Bluetooth® audio (type B audio) ............. 5-41
Bluetooth® audio operation ................................ 5-44
Hands-free system............................................. 5-45
Tips for the Hands-free system .......................... 5-45
Certification for the Hands-free system............... 5-46
Safety precautions............................................. 5-47
Using the Hands-free system ............................. 5-48
Bluetooth® setting ............................................. 5-62
Information Provided by:
Antenna system
& Printed antenna
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of
the window on which the antenna is
printed. Doing so may damage the
antenna printed on the window.
The antenna is printed on the inner
surface of the rear window glass.
NOTE
Antenna performance will deteriorate
significantly if you apply tinting film or
any other material over the antenna
portion of the rear window glass.
& FM reception
Although FM is normally static free,
reception can be affected by the surrounding area, atmospheric conditions, station
strength and transmitter distance. Buildings or other obstructions may cause
momentary static, flutter or station interference. If reception continues to be
unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing a citizen band radio or
other transmitting device in your vehicle.
Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not
suited for the vehicle.
Audio 5-3
Information Provided by:
5-4 Audio
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one
of the following audio sets. See the pages
indicated in this section for operating
details.
NOTE
If a cell phone is placed near the audio
set, it may cause the audio set to emit
noise when a phone call is received.
This noise does not indicate an audio
set malfunction. Note that a cell phone
should be placed as far as possible
from the audio set.
Information Provided by:
& Type A audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-16
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-19
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-25
. USB storage device/iPod® operation:
refer to page 5-28
. Bluetooth® audio: refer to page 5-39
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-45
Audio 5-5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-6 Audio
& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-16
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-19
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-25
. USB storage device/iPod® operation:
refer to page 5-28
. Bluetooth® audio: refer to page 5-39
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-45
NOTE
HD Radio Technology should be included as a feature in the type B audio.
Information Provided by:
Power and audio controls
& Power switch and volume
control
Type A audio
Type B audio
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF)
and volume control. The radio is turned
ON and OFF by pushing the dial, and the
volume is controlled by turning the dial.
& Sound controls and audio
settings
NOTE
. SPEED VOLUME CONTROL (SVC) is
a function that automatically adjusts
the volume according to the vehicle
speed. As the vehicle speed increases,
the audio volume automatically increases to match the vehicle speed, in
order to create a pleasant listening
environment even as the driving noise
increases.
. For type A audio, SRS TruBass and
FOCUS are equipped.
. SRS Sound features:
(1) Sound originating from door
mount speakers can be heard at
ear level (built in SRS FOCUS effect)
(type A audio).
(2) Ultra rich bass sound can be
obtained from standard door mount
speakers (built in SRS TruBass
effect) (type A audio).
. TruBass, FOCUS, SRS and “ ”
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs,
Inc.
. TruBass and FOCUS technologies
are incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.
! Tone and balance control (type A
audio)
“TUNE” dial
Each brief press of the “TUNE” dial
changes the control modes in the following sequence.
Choose the preferred level for each mode
by turning the “TUNE” dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approximately 5 seconds.
! Other settings (type A audio)
“MENU” button
Each brief press of the “MENU” button
changes the control modes in the following sequence.
Audio 5-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-8 Audio
Choose the preferred settings for each
mode by turning the “TUNE” dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approximately 5 seconds.
! Audio settings (type B audio)
“SETTING” dial
1. Press the “SETTING” dial to display
the “Setting” menu.
2. Turn the “SETTING” dial clockwise or
counterclockwise to select the preferred
menu. The menu list is as follows.
Page Menu
1 Screen OFF
Bass
Middle
Treble
Fader
2 Balance
SVC
AUX Vol.
Brightness
Contrast
3 HD
3. Press the “SETTING” dial to enter the
selected menu.
4. Choose the preferred settings for the
selected menu by turning the “SETTING”
dial.
5. Press the “SETTING” dial.
NOTE
. Press the button to return to
the last mode.
. The screen will turn off if you enter
the “Screen OFF” menu.
. The screen will be displayed if you
perform either of the following procedures after turning the screen off in the
“Screen OFF” menu.
– Shifting the shift lever/select lever into the “R” position
– Pressing the “SETTING” dial
– Pressing the “FM/AM” button
– Pressing the “CD/AUX” button
– Pressing the “SAT” button
– Pressing the talk switch
– Pressing the OFF hook switch
. If a phone call is received on a cell
phone that is connected to the Handsfree system, the audio screen will be
displayed.
Information Provided by:
& Adjustable level of each mode
Mode Range of levels
(displayed)
Initial setting Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
Volume Volume control 0 to 40 15 (type A
audio)/16 (type
B audio)
For less volume For more volume
AUX volume control (type A
audio)
0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
AUX volume control (type B
audio) LOW, MID, HIGH MID
From HIGH to MID, MID to
LOW, LOW to HIGH
From LOW to MID, MID to
HIGH, HIGH to LOW
Tone and balance Bass control −8 to +8 0 For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control −8 to +8 0 For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control −8 to +8 0 For less treble sound For more treble sound
Fader R9 to F9 0 Front attenuated Rear attenuated
Balance L9 to R9 0 Right channel attenuated Left channel attenuated
Other settings SPEED VOLUME OFF to 2 OFF For less auto volume change For more auto volume change
SRS Sound (type A audio) OFF to ON OFF OFF ON
Beep (type A audio) OFF to ON ON OFF ON
Brightness (type B audio) −8 to +8 0 For less brightness For more brightness
Contrast (type B audio) −8 to +8 0 For less contrast For more contrast
HD Radio (type B audio) OFF to ON ON OFF ON
Audio 5-9
Information Provided by:
5-10 Audio
FM/AM radio operation
Press the “FM” or “AM” button (type A
audio)/“FM/AM” button (type B audio)
when the radio is off to turn on the radio.
& FM selection (type A audio)
“FM” button
Press the “FM” button when the radio is on
to select the preferred reception mode.
Each brief press of the “FM” button
changes the radio in the following sequence starting from the last FM radio
band that you selected.
& AM selection (type A audio)
“AM” button
Each time the “AM” button is briefly
pressed the radio changes in the following
sequence starting from the last radio band
that you selected.
& FM/AM selection (type B
audio)
“FM/AM” button
Press the “FM/AM” button when the radio
is on to select the preferred reception
mode.
Each brief press of the “FM/AM” button
changes the radio in the following sequence starting from the last radio band
with you selected.
& Tuning
! Manual tuning
“TUNE” dial:
Type A audio
Type B audio
Turn the “TUNE” dial clockwise to increase the tuning frequency and turn the
“TUNE” dial counterclockwise to decrease
it.
Each time the dial is turned, the frequency
interval can be changed between 10 kHz
in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM
mode.
! Stereo indicator (type A audio)
The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminate
when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
! Seek tuning (SEEK)
Type A audio:
Seek up
Seek down
Type B audio:
Seek up
Seek down
If you press the indicated button briefly,
the radio will automatically search for a
receivable station and stop at the first one
it finds. This function may not be available
Information Provided by:
when radio signals are weak. When this
happens, perform manual tuning to select
the preferred station.
! Scan tuning (SCAN)
“SCAN” button:
Type A audio
Type B audio
If you press the “SCAN” button, the radio
will switch to the scan mode. In this mode,
the radio scans through the radio band
until a station is found. The radio will
briefly stop at the station while displaying
the frequency, after which scanning will
continue until the entire band has been
scanned.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
the SCAN mode. If you press the “SCAN”
button while the radio is stopped at a
station, the radio stays stopped at that
station. If you press the button while the
radio is scanning, the radio stops as
follows.
. At a frequency when the “SCAN”
button is pressed (type A audio)
. At the next receivable station (type B
audio)
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to
tall buildings and hills.
! PTY (Program type) group tuning
(only FM reception) (type A audio)
“PTY/CAT” button
Press the “PTY/CAT” button to change to
the PTY selection mode. At this time, the
PTY group that you are currently listening
to will be displayed for 10 seconds. In PTY
selection mode, “PTY SEL” is displayed
on the screen.
! PTY (Program type) group selection
In the PTY selection mode, press the
following button to change the PTY group
by one step at a time.
PTY group up by
one step
PTY group down by
one step
This operation only changes the display. It
does not change the station that is
currently being received.
! Seek in PTY (Program type) group
Seek up
Seek down
In the PTY selection mode, when the
preferred PTY group has been selected,
pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ”
seeks within that PTY group. In this case,
“PTY SEEK” is displayed on the screen.
The control function returns to the normal
mode after approximately 10 seconds.
Audio 5-11
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-12 Audio
& HD RadioTM Technology (Digital AM and FM Radio) (type
B audio)
! HD Radio Technology Information
! What is HD RadioTM Technology and
how does it work?
HD RadioTM Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver which
allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts it already receives. Digital
broadcasts have better sound quality than
analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio with no
static or distortion. For more information,
and a guide to available radio stations and
programming, please visit www.hdradio.
com.
! Using HD RadioTM Technology
As a consumer works through the analog
radio stations, (where applicable) the radio
receiver will automatically tune from an
analog signal to a digital signal within five
seconds. An orange logo indicator will
be seen on the screen when in digital.
NOTE
The logo will first appear in a gray
color indicating the station is indeed
(an analog and) a digital station. Once
the digital signal is acquired, the logo
will be a bright orange color.
! Benefits of HD RadioTM Technology
1. Information: The song title, artist name
and music genre will appear on the screen
when available by the radio station.
2. Multicast: On the FM radio frequency
most digital stations have “multiple” or
supplemental programs on one FM station. When the consumer pushes the
multicast button, they will move between
the multiple unique program content.
3. Clear Reception: Unlike analog radio
signals, digital signals do not pass along
static, hiss or pops.
! HD RadioTM Technology Troubleshooting
1. Station blending: When acquiring a
radio station, as usual, the radio will play
content in analog. If the radio verifies the
broadcast is an HD Radio Technology
station, it will then shift or blend smoothly
to a digital signal within five seconds.
Depending on the station quality, the
consumer may hear a slight sound change
when the station switches from the analog
to digital signal.
2. Reception area: Topography of the
earth can affect radio signals. For example, when a vehicle is behind a hill or large
building from the radio tower location
analog reception will be poor and it is
highly likely that HD Radio reception will
not occur. When a consumer is on the
multicast or supplemental programming
(HD2/HD3/HD4) and the reception is
weak or lost, this will result in a “mute”
condition. On the main or HD1 program, a
weak or lost digital signal will result in the
playing of an analog signal until a digital
signal is available.
3. Station issues: In order to provide the
best experience, a contact form has been
developed to report any radio station
issues found while listening to a broadcast. Every radio station is independently
owned and operated. These stations are
Information Provided by:
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate. The form can
be found at www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences.
Experience Cause Action
Mismatch of time alignmentCustomer may hear a short
period of programming replayed or an echo, stutter or
skip.
The radio stations analog and
digital volume is not properly
aligned or the station is in
ballgame mode.
None, radio broadcast issue.
Consumer can contact the
radio station.
Sound fades, blending in and
out.
Radio is shifting between analog and digital audio.
Reception issue, may clear-up
as you continue to drive. HD
Radio off button can force radio
in an analog audio.
Audio mute condition when on
an HD2/HD3 multicast channel, had been playing.
The radio does not have access to digital signals at the
moment.
This is normal behavior, wait
until the digital signal has returned. If out of coverage area,
seek a new station.
Audio mute delay when selecting HD2/HD3 multicast
channel preset.
The digital multicast content is
not available until HD Radio
broadcast can be decoded and
make the audio available. This
takes up to seven seconds.
This is normal behavior, wait for
the audio availability.
Text information does not
match the present song audio.
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form: www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.
No text information shown for
the present selected frequency.
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form: www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.
Audio 5-13
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-14 Audio
! Other information
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD
RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of
iBiquity Digital Corp.
! HD Radio selection
Press the button while receiving FM
radio (except analog broadcast). The next
channel of the station that is being
received will play.
! Mode selection
Turn the “SETTING” dial and select the
HD Radio ON mode (hybrid mode) or OFF
mode (analog mode). For details, refer to
“Audio settings (type B audio)” F5-8.
NOTE
Depending on the broadcasting area,
the digital signal may not be received in
an area where the analog signal can be
properly received, or the system frequently switches the channels between
the digital and analog signals. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. If this frequent switching between
digital and analog causes annoyance,
set the radio to the analog mode (HD
Radio off mode) that provides the same
radio broadcasting quality as a conventional radio.
! HD Radio indicator
The indicator illuminates while the
digital broadcast is received during the
HD Radio ON mode.
& RBDS text display
Type A audio
Type B audio
! Type A audio
If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or
RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing
the “TEXT” button changes the display
among PS, RT and frequency. The initial
setting is “PS”.
NOTE
. The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for PS is 8.
. The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for RT is 64.
. If RT is 16 characters or longer,
press and hold the “TEXT” button in
order to change the page.
! Type B audio
Press and hold the “HD/TEXT” button to
show the next page when the text is not
fully displayed while the PSD (Program
Service Data) or RT (Radio Text) service
is received.
NOTE
. When the HD Radio function is
turned on, PSD provides additional
information about the broadcast. Text
data such as “Title” and “Artist” is
displayed on the screen. To display text
data other than that which is currently
being displayed, turn the “SETTING”
dial.
. When the HD Radio function is
turned off (HD Radio off mode), the
radio text is displayed on the screen
while receiving the broadcasting station with RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data
System).
. The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed is 128.
Information Provided by:
& Station preset
! How to preset stations
1. Select the preferred reception mode.
2. Select the preferred station.
3. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons (from to ) to store the
frequency. If the button is pressed briefly,
the preceding selection will remain in the
memory.
NOTE
. Up to six stations for each reception
mode may be preset.
. If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this
occurs, it is necessary to reset the
preset buttons.
. For type B audio, if you press and
hold a preset button while receiving a
broadcasting station with SPS (Supplemental Program Service), the station
will be stored in the memory for that
preset button.
! Selecting preset stations
1. Select the preferred reception mode.
2. Press the preferred preset button
(from to ) briefly.
NOTE
For type B audio, if the preset button
which stores a broadcasting station
with SPS (Supplemental Program Service) while the HD Radio OFF mode is
selected, “No digital data available” will
be displayed and the volume will be
reduced to zero.
! Auto-store
Auto-store button:
Type A audio
Type B audio
Using the Auto-store function, you can
automatically store 6 stations on the
current waveband by pressing and holding
the Auto-store button. Use Auto-store to
quickly find the strongest stations, for
example when traveling through different
reception areas.
NOTE
. When you use Auto-store, the new
stations replace any stations previously stored.
. Interrupting Auto-store: If you accidentally press the Auto-store button,
you can cancel the Auto-store function
before it has been completed as follows.
– Switch to the other source mode.
– Switch to the other band.
– Press the Auto-store button.
– Press the “SCAN” button (type A
audio).
– Press the “SEEK” button.
– Press any of the preset buttons.
– Turn the “TUNE” dial.
– Turn off the audio system.
– Turn off the ignition switch.
. When you use the Auto-store function while selecting the FM mode, even
if you have selected the FM1 or FM2
station, the new stations are stored in
the FM-AS (type A audio)/FM3 (type B
audio) station memory.
. For type A audio, when you use the
Auto-store function while selecting the
AM mode, even if you have selected the
“AM” station, the new stations are
stored in the AM-AS station memory.
. If it is only possible to receive less
than 6 stations, the available stations
are stored from preset 1 in order by
Audio 5-15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-16 Audio
frequency and the unused preset buttons are not registered to a station.
. For type B audio, the previously
registered station memories of the
unused preset buttons are cleared.
. For type A audio, the previously
registered station memories of the
unused preset buttons are not cleared.
. If no stations can be received, the
previously stored stations are not replaced.
. After pressing the Auto-store button, if more than 1 station is stored, the
radio receives the station stored in
preset 1.
. After pressing the Auto-store button, if no stations are stored, the radio
receives the band and station that the
radio received before pressing the
button.
Satellite radio operation (if
equipped)
To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to
install the SUBARU genuine satellite
receiver for some models, and to enter
into a contract with a satellite radio
network service such as “Sirius XMTM
satellite radio” (for U.S.A. only). For details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Sirius XMTM Satellite Radio
Activation (for U.S.A. only)
Models with Sirius XMTM are eligible for a
3-month complimentary subscription to
the Sirius XMTM Satellite Radio service.
! Activation process
If you would like to activate your Satellite
Radio online, please visit http://www.siriusxm.com/activationhelp and follow the
step-by-step instructions for easy activation.
& Satellite radio reception
Satellite radio signals are best received in
areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
areas where there are tall buildings, trees,
tunnels or other structures that may
obstruct the signal of the satellites, there
may be signal interruptions. Other circumstances that may result in signal loss
include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill
or driving on the lower level of a multitiered road or inside of a parking garage.
To help reduce this condition, satellite
radio providers have installed groundbased repeaters in heavily populated
areas. However, you may still experience
reception problems in some areas.
! Sirius XMTM satellite radio reception
tips (for U.S.A. only — if equipped)
The Sirius XMTM satellite radio receiver
that is fitted to your vehicle receives the
necessary signals from two specially
designated satellites that are in a geostationary orbit over the equator. One satellite
covers the east coast and the other covers
the west coast. Both of them direct their
signals north. These signals are then
relayed throughout the radio reception
area by a network of ground repeater
stations. The satellite radio signals are
transmitted as “line of sight” signals. The
line of sight signals can be blocked by
objects such as buildings, but the network
of repeater stations allows signal coverage within urban areas such as cities.
You may experience problems in receiving
Sirius XMTM satellite radio signals in the
following situations.
Information Provided by:
. If you are driving northward in a coastal
area
Because the satellite radio antenna is
located on the windshield, the signal
comes from the south and may not be
able to reach the antenna in some
circumstances when you are driving north.
. If you are driving in a tunnel or a
covered parking area
. If you are driving beneath the top level
of a multi-level freeway
. If you drive under a bridge
. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the
signal
. If you are driving in a valley where the
surrounding hills or peaks block the signal
from the south
. If you are driving on a mountain road
where the southern direction is blocked by
mountains
. If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (10 m or more),
for example on a road that goes through a
dense forest
. The signal can become weak in some
areas that are not covered by the repeater
station network.
Please note that these may be other
unforeseen circumstances when there
are problems with the reception of Sirius
XMTM satellite radio signals.
& Displaying satellite radio ID
of tuner
When you activate satellite radio, you
should have your satellite radio tuner ID
ready because each tuner is identified by
its unique satellite radio tuner ID.
The satellite radio ID will be needed when
you activate satellite radio and receive
satellite radio customer support.
For details, contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Band selection
Type A audio
Type B audio
Press the “SAT” button when the radio is
off to turn on the radio.
Press the “SAT” button when the radio is
on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 reception.
Audio 5-17
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-18 Audio
& Channel and category selection
! Channel selection by operating the
dial
“TUNE” dial:
Type A audio
Type B audio
Turn the “TUNE” dial clockwise to select
the next channel and turn the “TUNE” dial
counterclockwise to select the previous
channel.
! Skip channel selection (type A
audio)
When in the SAT mode, press and hold
the following buttons to change to the
channel selection mode.
Change the channel
up by 10 channels
Change the channel
down by 10 channels
! Category selection (type B audio)
Change the category up by one step
Change the category down by one
step
To activate the category search mode,
press the “ ” or “ ” button. When in the
category search mode, press the “ ” or
“ ” button to change the category up or
down.
When a category is selected, turning the
“TUNE” dial selects channels only within
the selected category.
The control function returns to the normal
mode after approximately 6 seconds.
! Channel scan (type B audio)
“SCAN/A.S” button
Press the “SCAN/A.S” button to change
the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode,
under the selected category, the radio
scans through the channel until a station
is found. The radio will stop at the station
for 5 seconds while displaying the channel
number, after which scanning will continue
until the entire channel has been scanned.
Press the “SCAN/A.S” button again to
cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed channel.
& Channel preset
! How to preset channels
1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1,
SAT2 and SAT3 reception.
2. Select the preferred channel.
3. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons (from to ) to store the
channel. If the button is pressed briefly,
the preceding selection will remain in the
memory.
NOTE
. Up to six SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3
channels each may be preset.
. If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
removal, all channels stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this
occurs, it is necessary to reset the
preset channels.
Information Provided by:
! Selecting preset channels
1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1,
SAT2 or SAT3 reception.
2. Press the preferred preset button
(from to ) briefly.
& When the following messages are displayed (type B
audio)
If one of the following messages is
displayed when receiving XM signals,
determine the cause based on the following information. If you cannot clear these
messages, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Message Status
CHECK ANTENNA
The antenna cannot be
detected because it
has become disconnected, etc.
NO SIGNAL
There is no reception
because the system
cannot obtain signals
that are strong enough.
LOADING
The system temporarily
cannot be used because it is currently
receiving signals or is
decoding.
CHANNEL OFF AIR
The channel that has
been selected is currently off air.
CHAN UNAVAIL-
ABLE
The service cannot
currently be used.
CH UNAUTHOR-
IZED
A channel for which
you do not have a
subscription has been
selected.
CD player operation
CAUTION
This is a class I laser product. Use of
controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result
in hazardous radiation exposure. Do
not open covers and do not attempt
to repair this unit by yourself. Refer
servicing to qualified personnel.
NOTE
. Make sure to always insert a disc
with the label side up. If a disc is
inserted with the label side down, the
player displays “CHECK DISC”.
Refer to “When the following messages
are displayed” F5-25.
. If a disc is inserted during a radio
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the
broadcast.
. After the last track finishes, the disc
will automatically return to track 1 (the
first track on the disc) and will automatically play back.
. The player is designed to be able to
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
but it may not be able to play certain
ones.
Audio 5-19
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-20 Audio
. Mini CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are
not supported, and if inserted, they will
be immediately ejected.
. Audio data recorded in the MP3/
WMA/AAC formats may not be played
depending on the data recording condition.
. CDs that can be played back are
accompanied by the following restrictions.
– Maximum number of folders: 255
– Maximum number of files in a
folder: 255
– Maximum number of files on a
CD: 510 (type A audio)/512 (type B
audio)
– Maximum number of layers: 8
(including the root folder)
& Play file
NOTE
. Copyright protected MP3/WMA/AAC
files will not be played by the system.
The player will automatically skip to the
next file (track).
. WMA9 Lossless, WMA9 Professional and WMA9 voice cannot be
played.
MP3:
. Based on MPEG 1, 2 and 2.5 Layer 3
(type A audio)
. Based on MPEG 1, 2 and 2.5 Layer 2
and 3 (type B audio)
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
. Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320 (type A audio)
. Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 320 (type B audio)
. Supports variable bit rates
WMA (type A audio):
. Based on Windows Media Audio 9
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32
. Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192
WMA (type B audio):
. Based on Windows Media Audio 7, 8
and 9
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32
. Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192
AAC (type A audio):
. Based on MPEG4 AAC
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
. Bit rate (kbps): 24 to 320
. Number of channels: 1 to 2ch
AAC (type B audio):
. Based on MPEG2 AAC and MPEG4
AAC
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
. Bit rate (kbps): 24 to 320
. Number of channels: 1 to 2ch
& How to insert a CD
While the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or
“ON” position, hold a disc with a finger in
the center hole while gripping the edge of
the disc, then insert it in to the slot (with
the label side up) and the player will
automatically pull the disc into position.
NOTE
DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE
DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME.
& How to play back a CD
! When there is no CD inserted
Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a
CD” F5-20.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start
playback of the CD, beginning with the
first track.
Information Provided by:
! When CD is in the player
Type A audio
Type B audio
Each brief press of the “CD/AUX” button
changes the modes in the following
sequence.
*: For type A audio, “BT-A” is displayed.
When the CD mode is selected, the player
will start playback.
& To select a track from the
beginning
NOTE
With an MP3, WMA or AAC:
. Skipping past the last track will take
you back to the first track in the folder.
. Skipping past the first track will take
you to the last track in the folder.
! By using the dial (type A audio)
“TRACK” dial
Turn the “TRACK” dial clockwise to skip to
the beginning of the next track. Each time
the dial is turned, the indicated track
number will increase.
Turn the “TRACK” dial counterclockwise
to skip to the beginning of the current
track. Each time the dial is turned, the
indicated track number will decrease.
! By using the button
Type A audio:
Forward direction
Backward direction
Type B audio:
Forward direction
Backward direction
Press the “ ” button briefly to skip to the
beginning of the next track. Each time the
button is briefly pressed, the indicated
track number will increase.
Press the “ ” button briefly to skip to the
beginning of the current track. Each time
the button is briefly pressed, the indicated
track number will decrease.
& Fast-forwarding and rewinding
Type A audio:
Fast-forwarding
Rewinding
Type B audio:
Fast-forwarding
Rewinding
Press and hold the “ ” button to fastforward the track. Release the button to
stop fast-forwarding.
Press and hold the “ ” button to rewind
the track. Release the button to stop
Audio 5-21
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-22 Audio
rewinding.
NOTE
. If you fast-forward to the end of the
last track, fast-forwarding will stop and
the player will start playback beginning
with the first track. For an MP3, WMA or
AAC folder, the player will start playback beginning with the first track of
the next folder.
. If you rewind to the beginning of the
first track, rewinding will stop and the
player will start playback. For an MP3,
WMA or AAC folder, the player will start
playback beginning with the first track
of the current folder.
& Repeating
Repeat button:
Type A audio
Type B audio
To repeat a track, briefly press the repeat
button while the track is playing.
Each time you briefly press the repeat
button, the mode changes in the following
sequences.
Type A audio:
Type B audio:
NOTE
. The “TRACK RPT” (type A audio)/
“ONE” (type B audio) indication refers
to the repeat playback of a single track.
It repeats the track that is playing.
. The “FOLDER RPT” (type A audio)/
“FOLDER” (type B audio) indication
refers to the repeat playback of a folder.
It repeats the all of the tracks in the
folder. It is possible to select the
function when the MP3/WMA/AAC format track is playing.
To cancel the track repeat-play mode,
briefly press the repeat button and select
CANCEL. The “RPT” indication will turn
off, and the normal playback mode will be
resumed.
NOTE
The repeat-play mode will be cancelled
if you perform any of the following
steps:
. Press the “ ” button.
. Press the “SCAN” button.
. Turn the “TUNE” dial during repeat
playback of a single track (type B
audio).
& Random playback
Random button:
Type A audio*1
Type B audio*2
*1: Press and hold the button.
*2: Press the button briefly.
To play back tracks at random, press the
random button.
Each time you press the button, the mode
changes in the following sequences.
Information Provided by:
Type A audio:
Type B audio:
NOTE
. The “RDM” indication refers to the
random playback of the tracks. It
randomly repeats the tracks on the
CD. It is possible to select the function
when formats other than the MP3/WMA/
AAC format CD is playing.
. The “FOLDER RDM” (type A audio)/
“FOLDER” (type B audio) indication
refers to the random playback in the
folder. It randomly repeats the tracks in
the folder. It is possible to select the
function when an MP3/WMA/AAC format track is playing.
. The “ALL RDM” (type A audio)/
“ALL” (type B audio) indication refers
to the random playback of a disc. It
randomly repeats the tracks on the CD.
It is possible to select the function
when an MP3/WMA/AAC format track is
playing.
To cancel the random playback mode,
press the random button and select
CANCEL.
The “RDM” indication will turn off, and the
normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
Random playback will be cancelled if
you perform any of the following steps:
. Press the “ ” button.
. Press the “SCAN” button.
. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
“FOLDER” button when an MP3/WMA/
AAC format track is playing (type A
audio).
. Turn the “TUNE” dial during random
playback of the disc (type B audio).
& Scan
Type A audio
Type B audio
The scan mode lets you listen to the first
10 seconds of each track in succession.
Press the “SCAN” button to start scanning
upward beginning with the track following
the currently selected one.
After all tracks in the disk/folder have been
scanned, normal playback will be resumed. To cancel the scan mode, press
the “SCAN” button again.
NOTE
The scan mode will be cancelled if you
perform any of the following steps.
. Press the “RPT/RDM” button (type A
audio).
. Press the “RPT” button (type B
audio).
. Press the “RDM” button (type B
audio).
. Turn the “TUNE” dial.
. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
“FOLDER” button (type A audio).
. Press the “ ” button.
. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK” button.
. Select the radio or AUX mode.
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
. Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position.
Audio 5-23
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-24 Audio
& Display selection (type A
audio)
“TEXT” button
If you press the “TEXT” button during
playback, the indication will change to the
next one in the following sequence.
For CD-DA:
For MP3/WMA/AAC:
! Page (track/folder title) scroll
If you press and hold the “TEXT” button
while displaying the title (name), the title
will be scrolled so you can see all of it.
NOTE
The display is designed to show titles
for up to 30 characters.
& Folder selection
NOTE
. Selecting folders in this way is
possible only within a single disc.
. Only MP3/WMA/AAC folders are recognized when an attempt to select the
next or previous folder is made. If no
appropriate folder exists on the disc,
performing the following procedures
starts playback beginning with the first
track.
– Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
“FOLDER” button (type A audio).
– Turn the “TUNE” dial (type B
audio).
! Type A audio
Press the following buttons briefly.
To select the next
folder
To go back to the
previous folder
! Type B audio
“TUNE” dial
Turn the “TUNE” dial clockwise to select
the next folder. Turn the dial counterclockwise to go back to the previous
folder.
& How to eject a CD from the
player
When a disc is being played back or when
a disc is in the player, press the eject
button . The disc will be ejected.
NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out. The CD may fall out due to
vibration.
. If you do not remove the ejected
disc within approximately 15 seconds
(type A audio)/20 seconds (type B
audio), a disc protection function will
operate, automatically reloading the
disc. In this case, the disc is not played.
Information Provided by:
& When the following messages are displayed
If one of the following messages is
displayed while operating the CD player,
determine the cause based on the following information. If you cannot clear those
messages, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.
! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed
Press the button to eject the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation, and also check that the correct disc is
inserted. Do not try to eject the disc
forcibly. Mini CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
are not supported, and if inserted, they will
be immediately ejected. If the disc cannot
be ejected or this message remains
displayed, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.
! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed
Press the button to eject the discs.
Check that the disc is not damaged or
scratched, and also check that the disc is
inserted correctly. This message may
appear when using some CD-RW discs.
Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch
CDs are not supported) and data format
are correct. This player can only play CDDA, MP3, WMA and AAC data formats. If
the disc cannot be ejected or this message remains displayed, please contact
your SUBARU dealer.
! When “No audio file” is displayed
(type B audio)
Press the button to eject the disc.
This message appears when a CD has
been loaded that does not contain any
playable files. Insert a CD that contains
playable files.
Auxiliary input jack
1) Models without Hands-free system
2) Models with Hands-free system
You can connect an external audio device
to the vehicle’s audio system and play
back audio via the vehicle’s speakers.
An auxiliary (AUX) input jack is equipped
in the center console. A stereo mini pin
plug (3.5ø) can be inserted in this jack.
The connection cable is available at
electrical appliance or similar stores.
To use the AUX input jack:
1. Connect a portable audio player to the
AUX input jack.
Audio 5-25
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-26 Audio
Type A audio
Type B audio
2. Press the AUX input selection button
“CD/AUX” on the audio control panel to
select the AUX mode. Refer to “When CD
is in the player” F5-21.
3. Play back the portable audio player.
Refer to the instruction manual of the
portable audio player.
NOTE
. The output sound of the portable
audio player is not loud, and the sound
via the vehicle’s speakers that are
connected to the vehicle audio set is
very low. If you turn up the volume of
the audio set, the volume becomes
louder. However, when you change
the player to the other portable audio
player, the sound may become a lot
louder. Turn down the volume when
you change between them.
. In some cases, when the sound
volume of the portable audio player is
low, the sound quality may become
impaired when you turn up the volume
of the vehicle audio system. In this
case, adjust the sound volume of the
portable audio player.
. In some cases, noise occurs because of a bad connection between the
portable player and the audio system.
Try cleaning the stereo jack and audio
plug.
. If noise is not reduced, check for
disconnection of the cord or a malfunction of the portable player.
Precautions to observe when
handling a compact disc
Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and
CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the
following illustration. Also, some compact
discs cannot be played.
Information Provided by:
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD
player. If you insert a DualDisc into the
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
normal operation. If this happens, eject
the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If
there are deposits, wipe the disc surface
from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a rough cloth,
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it either in places exposed to direct
sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles
parked in the sun or on hot days.
Audio 5-27
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-28 Audio
USB storage device / iPod®
operations
NOTE
For models with the genuine SUBARU
navigation system, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the navigation
system.
& Play file
Refer to “Play file” F5-20.
& Connectable USB storage
device
Mass storage class USB memory can be
connected. USB storage devices that can
be played back are accompanied by the
following restrictions.
. Maximum directory layers: 8 layers
(including the ROOT)
. Maximum number of files in a folder:
255
. Maximum number of folders: 512 (type
A audio)/255 (type B audio) (including the
ROOT)
. Maximum number of files on the
device: 130,560 (type A audio)/2,500
(type B audio)
NOTE
. HUB class USB memory cannot be
played.
. ATAPI subclass USB cannot be
played.
. High Speed USB 2.0 cannot be
played.
. A USB memory that is powered by a
source other than the USB power
supply (for example, an AC power
adapter, etc.) cannot be operated.
. A USB memory that is connected to
the memory card reader or multi card
reader cannot be operated.
. If the USB memory consists of two
drives or more, the system will recognize only one of the drives after connecting the USB memory.
. The contents stored on the USB
memory may not be played in the same
order as they appear on a personal
computer.
. A personal computer cannot be
used even if it is connected to the
system using a USB cable.
. If the USB memory has a security
function, the contents stored on the
USB memory cannot be played by the
system.
. A USB memory and an iPod® cannot
be connected to the system at the
same time.
Information Provided by:
& Connectable iPod® models
Type A audio:
Model Firmware version
iPod®
5G 1.3
5.5G 1.3
classic 1G 2.0.4
classic 2G
nano 2G 1.1.3
nano 3G 1.1.3
nano 4G 1.0.4
nano 5G 1.0.2
touch 1G 3.1.2
touch 2G 3.1.2
iPhone®
1G 3.1.2
3G 3.1.2
3G S 3.1.2
Type B audio:
Model Firmware version
iPod®
5G 1.2.1~1.3
classic 1.0.0~1.1.2
nano 1.3.1
nano 2G 1.1.3
nano 3G 1.0.0~1.1.3
nano 4G 1.0.0~1.0.3
touch 1.1~2.2.1
iPhone®
1G 3.1.3
3G 4.2.1
3G S 4.2.1
4 4.2.1
CAUTION
Do not connect an iPod® other than
the previously stated models. Doing
so may result in a malfunction or,
depending on conditions, cause a
fire.
NOTE
. iPod® is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
. You are only permitted to personally
copy and play copyright-free material
or material that is legally permitted to
be copied and played by using an
iPod® and iTunes. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.
. To check the firmware version of an
iPod®, connect it to a computer and
check the device manager. For further
information, see the User’s Guide for
the iPod®.
. To update the firmware version of an
iPod®, visit the Apple Inc. website.
. Depending on the model and firmware version of an iPod®, it may not
work properly or not operate at all.
& Connecting USB storage device / iPod®
WARNING
Do not operate an iPod® while
driving. Doing so may distract your
attention from driving and could
lead to an accident.
CAUTION
. If the data stored on an iPod® is
deleted while it is connected to
the in-vehicle system, the data
cannot be recovered.
Audio 5-29
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-30 Audio
. Do not store an iPod® in the
vehicle. If an iPod® is left in the
vehicle for a long period of time,
it may be deformed, discolored
or damaged by high temperature.
NOTE
. Even if a USB storage device or
iPod® is connected, it cannot be played
unless the USB/iPod® mode is selected.
. Movies stored on a USB storage
device or an iPod® cannot be played
while the storage device or iPod® is
connected to the system.
. While an iPod® is connected, the
iPod® cannot be operated using the
click wheel on the iPod® (except some
models).
. When using an iPod® by connecting
it to in-vehicle equipment, the order of
the list items displayed on the invehicle equipment may be different
from that on the iPod®. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
. An iPod® battery that is connected
to in-vehicle equipment will be charged
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or “Acc” position. However, activation
of the iPod® may be delayed if the
battery charge of the iPod® is low.
. If an iPod® does not activate after
operation, disconnect the connection
cable from the iPod® and reset it. For
the resetting procedure, see the User’s
Guide for the iPod®.
. If an iPod® and the connection cable
are connected improperly, the iPod®
cannot be powered on or will not be
recognized by in-vehicle equipment. In
this case, disconnect the connection
cable from the iPod®, and then connect
it again.
The USB connector is located in the
center console. Use the connector to
connect a USB storage device/iPod®.
& How to play back
NOTE
. Depending on the number of files
stored on the iPod® and the firmware
version, the iPod® may not activate
smoothly after operation or not work
properly.
. Do not disconnect the connector
from the iPod® during iPod® operation.
! Type A audio
1. Connect a USB storage device/iPod®.
2. Press the button. Each time you
briefly press the button, the mode
changes as follows.
When the USB/iPod® mode is selected,
the player will start playback of the USB
storage device/iPod®.
! Type B audio
! When a USB storage device/iPod® is
not connected
Connect a USB storage device/iPod®.
Then the player will start playback of the
USB storage device/iPod®.
Information Provided by:
! When a USB storage device/iPod® is
already connected
Press the button. Each time you
briefly press the button, the mode
changes as follows.
When the USB/iPod® mode is selected,
the player will start playback of the USB
storage device/iPod®.
& To select a track from the
beginning
Select a track in the same way as for a
CD. For details, refer to “To select a track
from the beginning” F5-21.
& To select a chapter from the
beginning when connecting
iPod®
When playing podcasts or audiobooks,
select a chapter in the same way as for a
CD. For details, refer to “To select a track
from the beginning” F5-21.
& Fast-forwarding and rewinding
Fast-forwarding and rewinding are operated in the same way as for a CD. For
details, refer to “Fast-forwarding and
rewinding” F5-21.
NOTE
When connecting iPod®:
. When the end of a track is reached
while fast-forwarding, fast-forwarding
ends and play begins from the beginning of the next track.
. When the beginning of a track is
reached while rewinding, rewinding
ends and play begins from the beginning of the track.
& Repeating
! When connecting USB storage device
Repeating is operated in the same way as
for a CD. For details, refer to “Repeating”
F5-22.
! When connecting iPod®
Repeat button:
Type A audio
Type B audio
Each time you briefly press the repeat
button, the mode changes in the following
sequence.
Type A audio:
Type B audio:
NOTE
. The “ALL RPT” (type A audio)/“ALL”
(type B audio) indication refers to the
repeat playback of all tracks in the
entire iPod® (type A audio)/playing list
(type B audio).
. The “SONG RPT” (type A audio)/
“ONE” (type B audio) indication refers
to the repeat playback of a single track.
It repeats the track that is playing.
. When an audiobook is playing, the
mode does not change even if you
press the repeat button. For type B
audio, refer to “Setting the playing
speed (only when the audiobook is
playing) (type B audio)” F5-35.
Audio 5-31
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-32 Audio
& Random playback
Random button:
Type A audio*1
Type B audio*2
*1: Press and hold the button.
*2: Press the button briefly.
To playback a track at random, press the
random button while the track is playing.
Each time you press the button, the mode
changes in the following sequences.
When connecting USB storage device
(type A audio):
When connecting USB storage device
(type B audio):
When connecting iPod® (type A audio):
When connecting iPod® (type B audio):
NOTE
. The “FOLDER RDM” (type A audio)/
“Folder” (type B audio) indication refers to the random playback in the
folders. It randomly repeats all of the
tracks in the folder.
. The “ALL RDM” (type A audio)/“All”
(type B audio) indication refers to the
random playback on the entire USB
storage device. It randomly repeats all
of the tracks on the USB storage
device.
. The “ALBUM RDM” (type A audio)/
“Album” (type B audio) indication refers to the shuffle playback of the
album. It sequentially plays back all of
the tracks on the album.
. The “SONG RDM” (type A audio)/
“Track” (type B audio) indication refers
to the shuffle playback on the entire
iPod®. It randomly repeats all of the
tracks on the iPod®.
. When an iPod® is connected, the
files are played back at random by the
shuffle function of the iPod®. Therefore, iPod® operation may be different
depending on the model of the connected iPod®. Visit the Apple Inc.
website for details.
. When an audiobook or a podcast is
playing, the mode does not change
even if you press the random button.
To cancel the random playback mode,
press the random button and select
CANCEL. The “RDM” indication will turn
off, and the normal playback mode will
resume.
& SCAN (only when connecting
USB storage device)
Scan is operated in the same way as for a
CD. For details, refer to “Scan” F5-23.
NOTE
When an iPod® is connected, you
cannot select the SCAN mode.
Information Provided by:
& Selecting category (only
when connecting iPod®)
! Type A audio
“LIST” button
“TUNE” dial
When the “LIST” button is pressed briefly,
the iPod® menu is displayed.
Each time you turn the “TUNE” dial clockwise, the displayed category changes in
the following sequence. Each time you
turn the dial counterclockwise, the displayed category changes in the opposite
sequence.
To select the category, press the dial. To
close the iPod® menu, press and hold the
“LIST” button. To return to the previous
screen, briefly press the “LIST” button.
! Type B audio
“LIST” button
“BACK” button
“TUNE” dial
When the “LIST” button or “BACK” button
is pressed briefly, the iPod® menu is
displayed as follows.
Audio 5-33
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-34 Audio
1st layer 2nd layer 3rd layer 4th layer 5th layer
Now playing — — — —
Playlists Playlists List Songs List — —
Artists Artists List Albums List Songs List —
Albums Albums List Songs List — —
Songs Songs List — — —
Podcasts Podcasts List Songs List — —
Genres Genres List Artists List Albums List Songs List
Composers Composers List Albums List Songs List —
Audiobooks Audiobooks List — — —
Shuffle Songs — — — —
Turn and press the “TUNE” dial to select the category. To return to the upper layer, press
the “BACK” button. To return to the 1st layer, press the “LIST” button.
& Display selection (type A
audio)
If you press the button during
playback, the indication will change to
the next one in the following sequence.
For USB storage device:
For iPod®:
! Page scroll
Refer to “Page (track/folder title) scroll”
F5-24.
& Folder selection (only when
connecting USB storage device)
Refer to “Folder selection” F5-24.
NOTE
When an iPod® is connected, you
cannot select a folder.
Information Provided by:
& Selection from list (only
when connecting USB storage device) (type B audio)
“TUNE” dial
“BACK” button
You can select folder/track/file(s) from the
list. Turn and press the “TUNE” dial to
select the folder/track/file. To return to the
upper layer, press the “BACK” button.
& Setting the playing speed
(only when the audiobook is
playing) (type B audio)
Each time you briefly press the “RPT”
button while the audiobook is playing, the
playing speed changes in the following
sequence.
& When the following messages are displayed
If one of the following messages is
displayed while connecting the USB storage device/iPod®, determine the cause
based on the following information. If you
cannot clear those messages, please
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Audio 5-35
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-36 Audio
Message Cause Action
“CHECK DEVICE” . When there is a short in the USB bus
. When an incompatible device (for example a USB mouse) is
connected
. When an incompatible iPod® is connected
. When a connected iPod® is frozen
. When a transmission malfunction occurs
. When an iPod® confirmation malfunction occurs
. When a HUB class USB storage device is connected
Disconnect the USB storage device/iPod® and
check it.
“NO DEVICE” (type A audio)
“No USB” (type B audio)
“No iPod” (type B audio)
. No USB storage devices/iPod® are connected.
. An incompatible USB storage device/iPod® is connected.
Connect a supported USB storage device/iPod®.
“NO FILE” (type A audio)
“No song” (type B audio)
There are no playable audio files on the connected USB storage
device.
Connect a USB storage device that has playable
audio files stored on it.
“NO MUSIC” (type A audio)
“No Songs” (type B audio) There are no playable audio files on the connected iPod
®.
Connect an iPod® that has playable audio files
stored on it.
Information Provided by:
Audio control buttons
NOTE
For models with the genuine SUBARU
navigation system, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the navigation
system.
Models without Hands-free system
Models with Hands-free system
These buttons are located on the spokes
of the steering wheel. They allow the
driver to control audio functions without
taking his/her hands off the steering
wheel.
& MODE button
This button is used to select the desired
audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the
mode changes to the next one in the
following sequence.
Type A audio:
*1: The frequency last received in the selected
waveband will be displayed.
*2: Only when a CD is in the player.
*3: Only when the device is connected.
Audio 5-37
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-38 Audio
Type B audio:
*1: The frequency last received in the selected
waveband will be displayed.
*2: Only when a CD is in the player.
*3: Only when the device is connected.
! Type A audio
Press and hold this button if you wish to
immediately cut the volume to zero.
The audio display will show “MUTE”.
If you press and hold the button again, the
original sound volume will return and
“MUTE” turns off.
& “ ” and “ ” switch
! With radio mode selected
Press the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side
briefly to skip to a preset channel. Press
and hold the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side
to seek the next receivable station and
stop at it.
That station’s frequency will be indicated
on the audio display.
! With CD/USB/Bluetooth® audio
mode selected
Press the switch to the “ ” side briefly to
skip forward in the track order. Press the
switch to the “ ” side briefly to skip
backward in the track order.
The track number will be shown on the
audio display.
When a MP3/WMA/AAC format track is
playing, press and hold the switch to the
“ ” side to select the next folder. Press
and hold the switch to the “ ” side to go
back to the previous folder.
! With iPod® mode selected
Press the switch to the “ ” side to skip
forward in the track order. Press the switch
to the “ ” side to skip backward in the
track order. The track number will be
shown on the audio display.
! With SAT mode selected
Press the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side
briefly. The radio will seek the next preset
channel and stop at it.
Press and hold the switch to the “ ” or
“ ” side. The radio will seek the next
receivable channel and stop at it.
The channel will be shown on the audio
display.
Information Provided by:
& Volume control switch
Press the switch to the “+” side to increase
the volume. Press the switch to the “−”
side to reduce the volume.
A number indicating the volume will be
shown on the audio display.
& MUTE button (if equipped)
Press this button if you wish to immediately cut the volume to zero.
The audio display will show “MUTE”.
If you press the button again, the original
sound volume will return and “MUTE”
turns off.
Bluetooth® audio
NOTE
For models with the genuine SUBARU
navigation system, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the navigation
system.
NOTE
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
registered trademarks of Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
This function enables you to play back
audio sources from Bluetooth® audio
devices. You need to register the Bluetooth® audio device in the system before
using it.
Audio 5-39
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-40 Audio
NOTE
. The Bluetooth® audio function may
not operate properly under the following conditions.
– The device is turned off.
– The battery of the device has run
down.
– The device is not connected to
the system.
– The device is behind the seat or
in the glove box.
– A metal material is covering or
touching the device.
. Depending on the type of device that
is used, operation and sound volume
may be different from normal use of
those devices.
. The sound quality may degrade due
to the influence of the device that is
connected to the system or the circumstances of the Bluetooth network.
. When another Bluetooth® device is
simultaneously connected, noise may
be heard.
& Media format
Bluetooth® audio devices cannot be
connected if they are not compatible with
the following Bluetooth® profiles.
. A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile)
. AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Profile)
& Setting Bluetooth® audio
(type A audio)
1. Select “BT-A SETUP” by pressing the
“MENU” button.
2. Perform the following procedure by
operating the “TUNE” dial while “BT-A” is
displayed.
NOTE
You cannot set Bluetooth® audio while
driving.
! Registering (pairing) device
NOTE
Only one device can be registered.
1. Select the “PAIR AUDIO” menu.
– If a device is already registered,
“MEMORY FULL” is displayed and the
mode changes to the Bluetooth®
audio setting mode.
2. After the passkey is shown on the
display, input the passkey into the device.
– If the registering procedure is finished, “PAIRED” and the name of the
device are displayed.
– If the registering procedure was not
successful, “FAILED” is displayed.
After the name of the device or “FAILED”
is displayed, the mode changes to the
Bluetooth® audio setting mode.
NOTE
After the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the registered
device is not automatically connected
to the system even if the ignition switch
is turned to the “Acc” or “ON” position.
! Selecting device
1. Select the “SELECT AUDIO” menu.
– If no devices are registered,
“EMPTY” is displayed and the mode
changes to the Bluetooth® audio
setting mode.
2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– Then the name of the selected
device is displayed.
– If the device is connected, “SELECTED” is displayed and the mode
changes to the Bluetooth® audio
setting mode.
– If the device cannot be connected,
“FAILED” is displayed and the selecting procedure was not successful.
! Setting passkey
1. Select the “SET PASSKEY” menu.
– After the currently set passkey is
displayed, a new passkey can be
Information Provided by:
entered.
2. Input the new passkey (a 4 - 8 digit
number) by operating the “TUNE” dial.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– The new passkey is displayed, the
passkey is changed and the mode
changes to the Bluetooth® audio
setting mode.
! Deleting device
1. Select the “DELETE AUDIO” menu.
– If no devices are registered,
“EMPTY” is displayed and the mode
changes to the Bluetooth® audio
setting mode.
2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– “DELETED” is displayed and the
mode changes to the Bluetooth®
audio setting mode.
& Setting Bluetooth® audio
(type B audio)
1. Press the button to select the
“BT Audio” mode.
Talk switch
2. Press the talk switch .
NOTE
If a device and a cell phone are already
registered, “BT” menu will be displayed. Then perform the following
procedure.
(1) Press the talk switch and
say “Setup”.
(2) Press the talk switch again
and say “Bluetooth audio setup”.
The “BT Audio Setup” will then be
displayed.
3. After the “BT Audio Setup” menu is
displayed, select the following menus by
using the voice command system or by
operating the “TUNE” dial.
NOTE
. You cannot set Bluetooth® audio
while driving.
. After the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the registered device/cell phone may be automatically connected to the system if
the ignition switch is turned to the
“Acc” or “ON” position.
. When a cell phone is already connected, the system will disconnect the
phone to setup a new device. You may
need to reconnect the phone after
setup is complete.
. Up to 2 devices (excluding cell
phones for Hands-free system) can be
registered.
. Up to 6 devices (including cell
phones for Hands-free system) can be
registered.
! By using voice command system
NOTE
If no devices are registered, you can
only select from the following menu.
. “Pair audio player” (refer to “Registering (pairing) device” F5-42)
. “Set passkey” (refer to “Selecting
device” F5-42)
Audio 5-41
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-42 Audio
! Registering (pairing) device
1. Press the talk switch and say “Pair
audio player”.
2. Press the talk switch and say the
name of the device to be registered.
3. Press the talk switch .
4. Say “Confirm” to register the device, or
say “Go back” to go back.
5. After saying “Confirm”, the passkey
will be shown on the display. Then input
the passkey into the device.
– If the registering procedure is finished, “Audio Players Paired.” will be
displayed.
– If the registering procedure was not
successful, “Unable to pair audio
players.” will be displayed.
! Selecting device
1. Press the talk switch and say
“Select audio player”.
2. Press the talk switch .
3. Say the name of the registered device,
or “List audio players” and select the
registered device (for details, refer to “List
audio player function” F5-42).
4. Press the talk switch and say
“Confirm”.
5. Press the talk switch and say
“From car” or “From audio”.
6. Press the talk switch .
7. Say “Confirm” to select the device, or
say “Go back” to go back.
– If the device is connected, “Selected” will be displayed.
– If the device cannot be connected,
“Failed” will be displayed.
! Changing the registered name
1. Press the talk switch and say
“Change name”.
2. Press the talk switch .
3. Say the name of the registered device,
or “List audio players” and select the
registered device (for details, refer to “List
audio player function” F5-42).
4. Press the talk switch .
5. Say “Confirm” to select the device, or
say “Go back” to go back.
6. After saying “Confirm”, press the talk
switch .
7. Say a new name to be registered.
8. Press the talk switch .
9. Say “Confirm” to change the name, or
say “Go back” to go back.
– If the name is changed, “Name
changed.” will be displayed.
! List audio player function
The names of the registered devices are
spoken by using the list audio player
function. To use the list audio player
function, perform the following procedure.
1. Press the talk switch and say “List
audio player”.
– The names will then be spoken.
2. Press the talk switch while the
name is being spoken to select the device.
– After the talk switch is pressed,
“Audio player selected.” will be displayed.
3. Press the talk switch and say the
following words.
. “Select audio player” (refer to “Selecting device” F5-42)
. “Change name” (refer to “Changing
the registered name” F5-42)
. “Delete audio player” (refer to “Deleting device” F5-43)
! Setting passkey
1. Press the talk switch and say “Set
passkey”.
2. Press the talk switch and say the
new passkey (a 4 - 8 digit number).
3. Press the talk switch .
4. Say “Confirm” to set the passkey, or
say “Go back” to go back.
– If the passkey is set, the new
passkey will be displayed.
Information Provided by:
! Deleting device
1. Press the talk switch and say
“Delete audio player”.
2. Press the talk switch .
3. Say the name of the device, or “List
audio player” and select the device (for
details, refer to “List audio player function”
F5-42).
4. Press the talk switch .
5. Say “Confirm” to delete the device, or
say “Go back” to go back.
– If the device is deleted, “Deleted.”
will be displayed.
! By operating the dial
Select the menu by turning and pressing
the “TUNE” dial.
NOTE
. Select the “Go Back” menu to go
back to the previous menu.
. If no devices are registered, you can
only select from the following menu.
– “Pair Audio Players” to register
the device (refer to “Registering
(pairing) device” F5-43)
– “Set Passkey” to set a new
passkey (refer to “Setting passkey”
F5-44)
! Registering (pairing) device
1. Select the “Pair Audio Players” menu.
2. Select the “Record Name” menu.
3. Say the name of the device to be
registered.
4. Select the “Confirm pair audio?” menu.
– The passkey will then be shown on
the display.
5. Input the passkey into the device.
– If the registering procedure is finished, “Audio Players Paired.” will be
displayed.
– If the registering procedure was not
successful, “Unable to pair audio
players.” will be displayed.
! Selecting device
1. Select the “Select Audio Player”menu.
2. Select the preferred device.
3. Select the “Confirm select audio
player?” menu.
4. Select the “From Car” menu or “From
Audio Player” menu.
5. Select the “Confirm select audio
player?” menu.
– If the device is connected, “Selected” will be displayed.
– If the device cannot be connected,
“Failed” will be displayed.
! Changing the registered name
1. Select the “Change Name” menu.
2. Select the preferred device.
3. Select the “Record Name” menu.
4. Say the new name.
5. Select the “Confirm name change?”
menu.
– If the name is changed, “Device
name has been changed.” will be
displayed.
! List audio player function
For details about the list audio player
function, refer to “List audio player function” F5-42.
1. Select the “List Audio Players” menu.
– The names will then be spoken.
2. Press the talk switch while the
name is being spoken to select the device.
– After the talk switch is pressed,
“Audio player selected.” will be displayed.
3. Select from the following menu.
. “Select Audio Player” (refer to “Selecting device” F5-43)
. “Change name” (refer to “Changing
the registered name” F5-43)
. “Delete Audio Player” (refer to “Deleting device” F5-44)
Audio 5-43
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-44 Audio
! Setting passkey
1. Select the “Set Passkey” menu.
2. Press the “TUNE” dial.
3. Input the new passkey (a 4 - 8 digit
number) by turning and pressing the
“TUNE” dial.
4. After inputting the new passkey, press
the “TUNE” dial again.
– If the passkey is set, the new
passkey will be displayed.
! Deleting device
1. Select the “Delete Audio Player”
menu.
2. Select the preferred device.
3. Select the “Confirm delete audio
Player?” menu.
– If the device is deleted, “Audio
player has been deleted.” will be
displayed.
& Bluetooth® audio operation
NOTE
Depending on the connected device, it
may not activate as per the following
items or not work smoothly. Refer to
the instruction manual of the connected device.
! How to play back
Type A audio
Type B audio
Press the “CD/AUX” button and select the
“BT-A” (type A audio)/“BT Audio” (type B
audio) mode.
! To select a track from the beginning
Select a track in the same way as for a
CD. Refer to “To select a track from the
beginning” F5-21.
! Repeating (type A audio)
Repeating is operated in the same way as
for a CD. Refer to “Repeating” F5-22.
Each time you briefly press the
button, the mode changes in the following
sequence.
! Random playback (type A audio)
Random playback is operated in the same
way as for a CD. Refer to “Random
playback” F5-22. Each time you press
and hold the button, the mode
changes in the following sequence.
! Display selection (type A audio)
Select an indication in the same way as
for a CD. Refer to “Display selection (type
A audio)” F5-24. Each time you briefly
press the button, the indication
changes in the following sequence.
! Fast-forwarding and rewinding
(type B audio)
Fast-forwarding and rewinding are operated in the same way as for a CD. Refer to
“Fast-forwarding and rewinding” F5-21.
! Folder selection
Select a folder in the same way as for a
CD. Refer to “Folder selection” F5-24.
Information Provided by:
Hands-free system
NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system, refer to
the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
navigation system.
. When selling your vehicle, make
sure that you initialize the Hands-free
system to prevent personal data from
being improperly accessed.
The Hands-free system operates while the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
& Tips for the Hands-free system
! Bluetooth®
It is possible to connect a cell phone to the
in-vehicle equipment through the Bluetooth® format (wireless) to make a phone
call from the in-vehicle equipment or take
an incoming phone call.
Since the Bluetooth® format is wireless, a
connection between the in-vehicle equipment and the cell phone can be made
without placing them in close vicinity of
each other. The cell phone can be used
with it left in the breast pocket or bag.
NOTE
. The Hands-free system may not
operate properly under the following
conditions.
– The cell phone is turned off.
– The cell phone is not in the
phone call area.
– The battery of the cell phone has
run down.
– The cell phone is not connected
to the Hands-free system.
– The cell phone is behind the seat
or in the glove box.
– A metal material covers or
touches the cell phone.
. Depending on the type of cell phone
that is used, the screen on the cell
phone may remain illuminated while
the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position. If this occurs, turn the illumination off by adjusting the cell phone
settings.
. Depending on the setting of the cell
phone, the dial lock function may be
activated after making a call. Deactivate the automatic dial lock function of
the cell phone before using the Handsfree system.
. Depending on the type of cell phone
that is used, operation and the sound
volume may be different from those of
cell phones currently used.
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position during a
call, the call may be disconnected or
continued on the cell phone depending
on the type of cell phone that is used.
Note that operation of the cell phone
may be necessary if the call is continued on the cell phone.
. Do not speak at the same time as the
other party during a call. If you and the
party speak at the same time, it may be
difficult for the other party to hear your
voice and vice versa. This is normal.
. The receiver sound volume should
be set as low as possible. Otherwise,
the party you are calling may notice an
undesirable echo sound.
. Speak clearly and loudly.
. Your voice may be difficult to be
heard by the party under the following
conditions.
– Driving on a rough road.
– Driving at a high speed.
– Driving with a window open.
– When air from the ventilator
blows directly towards the microphone.
– When the sound coming from the
ventilator is loud.
– When the cell phone is too close
to the microphone.
Audio 5-45
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-46 Audio
. The sound quality may degrade due
to the influence of the cell phone that is
connected to the system or the circumstances of the Bluetooth network.
. When another Bluetooth® device is
simultaneously connected, noise may
be heard in the voice coming from the
hands-free phone.
! Corresponding profiles for the cell
phone
. HFP (Hands Free Profile): Ver. 1.0
. OPP (Object Push Profile): Ver. 1.1
& Certification for the Handsfree system
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035
IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035
Made in Japan
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of this device.
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
may cause harmful interference to
radio communications, if it is not
installed and used in accordance with
the instructions. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures.
. Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
. This equipment complies with FCC/
IC radiation exposure limits set forth
for an uncontrolled equipment and
meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C
to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable
that it should be installed and operated
keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or
more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
and ankles).
Information Provided by:
. This transmitter must not be colocated or operated in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
! Mexico models
& Safety precautions
WARNING
. For safety reasons, avoid operating the cell phone while driving.
. Do not make a phone call while
driving. When you have an incoming call, stop the vehicle in a
safe location before taking the
incoming phone call. When you
have to absolutely take a phone
call, tell the caller “I’ll call you
back”. And then call the caller
back after stopping the vehicle in
a safe location.
. Part 15 FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes of
modifications to this equipment
would void the user’s authority to
operate this device.
CAUTION
. Do not leave the cell phone in the
vehicle. The temperature in the
vehicle may become extremely
high and cause a malfunction of
the cell phone.
. When using the cell phone, be
careful not to get it close to the
in-vehicle equipment. Getting it
too close to the in-vehicle equipment may result in deterioration
in tone quality or a poor connecting condition.
. In the frequency band used by
this equipment, along with industrial, scientific and medical
equipment such as a microwave
oven, radio stations (a license is
required) to be used by the
production line in the factory to
identify movable bodies, specific
small power radio stations (a
license is not required) and amateur radio stations (a license is
required) are being operated.
(These three types of radio stations are hereinafter referred to
as “other radio stations”.) Before
using this equipment, be sure to
check to see if “other radio
stations” are being operated in
the vicinity. If there is detrimental
radio interference from this
equipment to “other radio stations”, move the equipment to
another location as soon as
possible to avoid radio interference. The frequency band used
Audio 5-47
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-48 Audio
by this equipment is in the 2.4
GHz zone. The FH-SS modulation
is employed as a modulation
method. The expected inflicting
interference distance is less than
33 ft (10 m). This equipment uses
a full band and can avoid a band
used by a movable body identification device.
& Using the Hands-free system
! Turning on/off the Hands-free mode
1) OFF hook switch
2) ON hook switch
3) Talk switch
To turn on the Hands-free mode, press the
OFF hook switch . To turn off the
Hands-free mode, press the ON hook
switch .
! Preparation for using the Handsfree system
Before using the Hands-free system, it is
necessary to register a cell phone in the
system. Perform the following procedure
to register a cell phone.
NOTE
. Up to 5 cell phones can be registered (for type A audio).
. Up to 6 cell phones (including Bluetooth® audio devices) can be registered
(for type B audio).
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “Acc” or “ON” position, the registered cell phone may be automatically
connected to the system.
! Registering by operating dial
“TUNE” dial:
Type A audio
Type B audio
Select the menus by operating the “TUNE”
dial.
Type A audio:
1. Press the OFF hook switch .
2. Select “ENGLISH”/“FRANÇAIS” by
operating the “TUNE” dial.
– “WELCOME!” will then be displayed.
3. Press the “TUNE” dial or the talk
switch .
4. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu, or
press the talk switch .
5. Say the name to be registered.
6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– After “CAR M_MEDIA” is displayed,
a pass key will be displayed.
7. Input the displayed pass key into the
cell phone while “PKY: ****” is displayed.
Type B audio:
1. Press the OFF hook switch .
– If no cell phone is registered,
“Welcome!!” is shown on the screen.
In this case, perform the procedure
after step 4.
2. Select the “Setup” menu.
3. Select the “Phone Setup” menu.
4. Select the “Pair Phone” menu.
5. Select the “Record Name” menu.
6. Say the name to be registered.
Information Provided by:
7. Select the “Confirm pair phone?”
menu.
8. Select the “Phone Only” menu to
register only a cell phone, or select “Int.
Audio” menu to register internal audio in
addition to the cell phone.
9. After “Car Multi-Media” is displayed, a
pass key will be displayed.
10. Input the displayed pass key into the
cell phone while “Passkey: ****” is displayed.
! Registering by using voice command system (type B audio)
NOTE
If no cell phone is registered, when the
OFF hook switch is pressed, “Welcome!!” is shown on the screen. In this
case, perform the procedure after step
4.
1. Select a mode other than “BT Audio”
mode.
2. Press the talk switch and say
“Setup”.
3. Press the talk switch and say
“Phone Setup”.
4. Press the talk switch and say “Pair
Phone”.
5. Press the talk switch and say the
name to be registered.
6. Press the talk switch and say
“Confirm”.
7. Press the talk switch .
8. Say “Phone Only” to register only a
cell phone, or say “Internal Audio” to
register internal audio in addition to the
cell phone.
9. Press the talk switch and say
“Confirm pair phone?”.
– After “Car Multi-Media” is displayed,
a pass key will be displayed.
10. Input the displayed pass key into the
cell phone while “Passkey: ****” is displayed.
! Menu list of the Hands-free system
Turn the “TUNE” dial to select a menu,
and then press the dial to enter the
selected menu.
Audio 5-49
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-50 Audio
Type A audio:
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page
PHONE BOOK* ADD ENTRY BY VOICE Adding a new number by voice 5-57
BY PHONE Adding a new number by cell phone 5-57
MANUAL INPUT Adding a new number by inputting manually 5-58
CALL HISTORY Adding a new number from the call history 5-58
GO BACK
LIST NAMES — Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook 5-59
CHANGE NAME — Changing a name registered in the phonebook 5-59
SET SPD DIAL — Registering a speed dial 5-60
DELETE ENTRY — Deleting phonebook data 5-60
DEL SPD DIAL — Deleting a registered speed dial 5-60
GO BACK —
REDIAL DIAL — Dialing a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-61
STORE — Adding a new number stored in the outgoing call historymemory 5-58
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-60
GO BACK —
CALLBACK DIAL — Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-61
STORE — Adding a new number stored in the incoming call historymemory 5-59
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-61
GO BACK —
*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
Information Provided by:
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page
SETUP SECURITY SET PIN Setting a PIN code 5-62
PHBK LOCK*1 Locking the phonebook 5-62
PHBK UNLOCK*1 Unlocking the phonebook 5-63
GO BACK
PHONE SETUP PAIR PHONE Registering a new cell phone*2 5-48
SELECT PHONE Selecting a cell phone to be used 5-63
CHANGE NAME Changing the registered name of the cell phone 5-63
LIST PHONES Showing the list of the registered cell phones 5-64
SET PASSKEY Changing the pass key 5-64
DELETE Deleting the registered cell phone 5-64
GO BACK
SYSTEM SETUP GUIDANCE VOL Setting the volume of the voice guidance 5-65
INITIALIZE Initialization 5-65
SEL LANGUAGE Selecting the language (using the Hands-free system) 5-65
GO BACK
GO BACK —
*1: If a PIN code is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not available.
*2: Up to 5 cell phones can be registered.
Audio 5-51
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-52 Audio
Type B audio:
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page
Phonebook* Add Entry By Voice Adding a new number by voice 5-57
By Phone Adding a new number by cell phone 5-57
Manual Input Adding a new number by inputting manually 5-58
Call History Adding a new number from the call history 5-58
Go Back
Change Name — Changing a name registered in the phonebook 5-59
List Names — Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook 5-59
Speed Dial — Registering a speed dial 5-60
Delete Entry — Deleting phonebook data 5-60
Delete Speed Dial — Deleting a registered speed dial 5-60
Go Back —
Redial* Dial — Redialing 5-61
Store — Adding a new number stored in the outgoing call historymemory 5-58
Delete — Deleting a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-60
Go Back —
CallBack* Dial — Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-61
Store — Adding a new number stored in the incoming call historymemory 5-59
Delete — Deleting a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-61
Go Back —
*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
Information Provided by:
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page
Setup Security*1 Set PIN Setting a PIN code 5-62
Phonebook Lock Locking the phonebook 5-62
Phonebook Unlock Unlocking the phonebook 5-63
Go Back
Phone setup Pair Phone Registering a new cell phone*3 5-48
Select Phone*1 Selecting a cell phone to be used 5-63
Change Phone
Name*1 Changing the registered name of the cell phone 5-63
List Phones*1 Showing the list of the registered cell phones 5-64
Set Passkey Changing the pass key 5-64
Delete Phone*1 Deleting the registered cell phone 5-64
Handsfree Power*1 Turning the Hands-free power ON/OFF 5-64
Go Back
BT Audio Setup*1 Pair Audio Players Registering an audio player (device)*3 5-43
Select Audio Player*2 Selecting the registered audio player (device) 5-43
Change Name*2 Changing the name of the registered audio player (device) 5-43
List Audio Players*2 Speaking the names of the registered audio players (devices) 5-43
Set Passkey Setting a new passkey for the registered audio player (device) 5-44
Delete Audio Player*2 Deleting the registered audio player (device) 5-44
Go Back
*1: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
*2: If a device is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
*3: Up to 6 cell phones and Bluetooth® audio devices can be registered.
Audio 5-53
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-54 Audio
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page
Setup System setup* Guidance Volume Setting the volume of the voice guidance 5-65
Device Name Showing the device name and BD address of the audio 5-65
Reset Settings Initialization 5-65
Go Back
Go Back —
*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
Information Provided by:
! Voice command system
NOTE
Press the talk switch and say
“Help” to listen to the help guidance.
1) OFF hook switch
2) ON hook switch
3) Talk switch
To turn on the voice command system,
press the talk switch briefly. To turn off
the voice command system, wait for 5
seconds without using the voice command
system.
The commands available for the voice
command system are listed in the following charts.
Type A audio:
Command
English Français
1 0 (zero, oh) 0 (zéro)
2 1 (one) 1 (un)
3 2 (two) 2 (deux)
4 3 (three) 3 (trois)
5 4 (four) 4 (quatre)
6 5 (five) 5 (cinq)
7 6 (six) 6 (six)
8 7 (seven) 7 (sept)
9 8 (eight) 8 (huit)
10 9 (nine) 9 (neuf)
11 * (star) * (étoile)
12 # (pound) # (carré, dièse)
13 + (plus) + (plus)
14 callback rappel
15 redial recomposer
16 dial by number composer par nu-méro
17 dial by name composer par nom
18 phonebook registre
19 setup réglages
20 phone book addentry
ajouter l’entrée
dans le registre
21 phone bookchange name
modifier le nom
dans le registre
22 phone book deleteentry
supprimer l’entrée
du registre
23 phone book listnames
lister les noms du
registre
24 phone book setspeed dial
configurer composition abrégée pour
le registre
25 phone book deletespeed dial
supprimer composition abrégée pour
le registre
26 phone book unlock déverrouiller le re-gistre
27 cancel annuler
28 help aide
29 repeat répéter
30 go back retourner
31 dial composer
32 previous précédent
33 delete supprimer
34 store enregistrer
35 confirm confirmer
36 phone setup réglages du télé-phone
Audio 5-55
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-56 Audio
37 security sécurité
38 pair phone jumeler le télé-phone
39 change name modifier le nom
40 select phone sélectionner le tél-éphone
41 list phones lister les télé-phones
42 set pass key configurer lepasse-partout
43 add entry ajouter l’entrée
44 delete entry supprimer l’entrée
45 delete speed dial supprimer compo-sition abrégée
46 by voice vocalement
47 by phone par téléphone
48 call history historique d’appels
49 set speed dial configurer compo-sition abrégée
50 incoming entrant
51 outgoing sortant
52 list names lister les noms
53 set PIN configurer NIP
54 phone book lock verrouiller le regis-tre
Type B audio:
Command
English Français
1 0 (zero, oh) 0 (zéro)
2 1 (one) 1 (un)
3 2 (two) 2 (deux)
4 3 (three) 3 (trois)
5 4 (four) 4 (quatre)
6 5 (five) 5 (cinq)
7 6 (six) 6 (six)
8 7 (seven) 7 (sept)
9 8 (eight) 8 (huit)
10 9 (nine) 9 (neuf)
11 * (star) * (étoile)
12 # (pound) # (dièse)
13 + (plus) + (plus)
14 add entry ajouter entrée
15 Bluetooth Audiosetup
configuration
Audio Bluetooth
16 BT-A setup configurationAudio Bluetooth
17 BT-Audio setup configurationAudio Bluetooth
18 by phone par téléphone
19 by voice par la voix
20 call history historique des ap-pels
21 call transfer transfert d’appel
22 callback rappel automatique
23 cancel annuler
24 change name changer nom
25 confirm valider
26 delete supprimer
27 delete audio supprimer audio
28 delete audio player supprimer lecteuraudio
29 delete entry supprimer entrée
30 delete phone supprimer télé-phone
31 delete speed dial supprimer compo-sition rapide
32 dial composer
33 dial by name composer par nom
34 dial by number composer par nu-méro
35 from audio depuis audio
36 from car depuis voiture
37 go back retour
38 hands free power alimentation mainslibres
39 help aide
40 incoming appel d’arrivée
Information Provided by:
41 internal audio audio interne
42 list audio players lister lecteursaudio
43 list names lister noms
44 list phones lister téléphones
45 mute sourdine
46 next suivant
47 outgoing appel de départ
48 pair audio player jumeler lecteuraudio
49 pair phone jumeler téléphone
50 phone book addentry
annuaire ajouter
entrée
51 phone bookchange name
annuaire changer
nom
52 phone book deleteentry
annuaire supprimer entrée
53 phone book listnames
annuaire lister
noms
54 phone book lock annuaire bloquer
55 phone book setspeed dial
annuaire définir
composition rapide
56 phone book unlock annuaire déblo-quer
57 phone only téléphone unique-ment
58 phone setup configuration télé-phone
59 phonebook annuaire
60 phonebook deletespeed dial
annuaire supprimer composition
rapide
61 previous précédent
62 redial recomposer
63 repeat répéter
64 security sécurité
65 select audio player sélectionner lec-teur audio
66 select phone sélectionner télé-phone
67 send envoyer
68 set pass key définir mot depasse
69 set PIN définir NIP
70 set speed dial définir compositionrapide
71 setup configurer
72 store enregistrer
73 turn on activer
74 turn off désactiver
! Updating phonebook data
NOTE
. The maximum number of phonebook entries that can be registered in
the phonebook is 50 (type A audio)/20
(type B audio).
. After registering phonebook data,
you can add a phone number to the
speed dial memory. For details, refer to
“Registering speed dial” F5-59.
! Registering by voice
1. Select the “BY VOICE” menu.
2. Press the talk switch .
3. Say the phone number to be registered.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
5. Perform either of the following procedures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch .
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– The phone number is then registered and “STORED” (type A audio)/
“Phone number stored.” (type B audio)
is displayed.
! Registering by phone
1. Select the “BY PHONE” menu.
2. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm Transfer phonebook entry?”
(type B audio) menu.
Audio 5-57
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-58 Audio
3. Transfer the data from the cell phone.
For details about transferring the data,
refer to the instruction manual of the cell
phone.
NOTE
For type B audio, you can select the
data to be registered by performing
either of the following procedures until
the preferred data is displayed.
. Press the talk switch and saying
“Previous” or “Next”.
. Operate the “TUNE” dial.
4. Select the phone number to be registered by operating the “TUNE” dial.
5. Perform either of the following procedures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch .
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– The phone number is then registered and “STORED” (type A audio)/
“Phone number stored.” (type B audio)
is displayed.
! Registering by inputting manually
1. Select the “MANUAL INPUT” menu by
operating the “TUNE” dial.
2. Input the phone number to be registered.
3. Perform either of the following procedures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch .
4. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– The phone number is then registered and “STORED” (type A audio)/
“Phone number stored.” (type B audio)
is displayed.
NOTE
While inputting the phone numbers, if
“GO BACK” is chosen using the
“TUNE” dial, the character that was
input last is deleted.
! Registering from call history
1. Select the “CALL HISTORY” menu.
2. Select one of the following menus.
– “INCOMING” or “OUTGOING” (type
A audio)
– “Incoming Call History” or “Outgoing
Call History” (type B audio)
3. Select the phone number by operating
the “TUNE” dial.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu (type A
audio).
5. Perform either of the following procedures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch .
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– The phone number is then registered and “STORED” (type A audio)/
“Phone number stored.” (type B audio)
is displayed.
! Registering from redial
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu.
2. Select the phone number by operating
the “TUNE” dial.
3. Select the “STORE” menu.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm store number?” (type B audio)
menu.
5. Perform either of the following procedures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch .
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
Information Provided by:
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– The phone number is then registered and “STORED” (type A audio)/
“Phone number stored.” (type B audio)
is displayed.
! Registering from call back
1. Select the “CALLBACK” menu.
2. Select the phone number by operating
the “TUNE” dial.
3. Select the “STORE” menu.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm store number?” (type B audio)
menu.
5. Perform either of the following procedures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch .
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– The phone number is then registered and “STORED” (type A audio)/
“Phone number stored.” (type B audio)
is displayed.
! Registering speed dial
1. After registering phonebook data, perform either of the following procedures.
– Select the “SPEED DIAL” menu by
operating the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
“SET SPEED DIAL”.
2. Press the preset button (from to
) to which you want to register the
phone number.
NOTE
If the number to be used is already
registered in speed dial, “OVERWRITE?” will be displayed. Select the
“CONFIRM” menu to overwrite, or
select the “GO BACK” menu to cancel.
! List names function
The voice tags registered in the phonebook are spoken by using the list names
function. To use the list names function,
perform the following procedure.
1. Select the “LIST NAMES” menu.
2. Choose the registered data by performing either of the following procedures.
– Press the talk switch .
– Operate the “TUNE” dial (type A
audio only).
After “SELECTED” is displayed, you can
choose the following menus.
. “DIAL” to make a phone call
. “CHANGE NAME” to change the name
(voice tag)
. “SET SPD DIAL”/“SET SPEED DIAL”/
“Speed Dial” to set the speed dial
. “DELETE ENTRY” to delete the name
(voice tag) from the phonebook
. “GO BACK” to go back to the menu
mode
. “HELP” to listen to the help guidance
(only when using the voice command
system)
NOTE
. After “LIST NAMES” is selected, if
the OFF hook switch is pushed, the
selected number is called.
. After “LIST NAMES” is selected, if
no operation is performed, the memories are displayed and voice tags are
spoken. After all memories/voice tags
are displayed/spoken, “END OF LIST”
is displayed and the mode changes to
the “PHONE BOOK” menu mode.
! Changing voice tag
1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu.
2. Select the “CHANGE NAME” menu.
3. Select the phone number by performing one of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
the voice tag.
– Press the talk switch , say “List
Audio 5-59
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-60 Audio
Names” and use the list names function.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm name change?” (type B audio)
menu (only after saying the voice tag).
– Then the selected phone number/
name is displayed.
5. Perform either of the following procedures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch .
6. Say the new voice tag.
7. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm name change?” (type B audio)
menu.
– Then “CHANGED” (type A audio)/
“Name successfully changed.” (type B
audio) is displayed.
! Set speed dial
1. Perform either of the following procedures.
– Select the “SET SPD DIAL” menu
(type A audio) /“Speed Dial” menu
(type B audio) by operating the
“TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
“SET SPEED DIAL”.
2. Select the phone number by performing one of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
the voice tag.
– Press the talk switch , say “List
Names” and use the list names function (type B audio).
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm Name?” (type B audio) menu
(only after saying the voice tag).
4. Press the preset button (from to
) to which you want to register the
phone number.
NOTE
If the number to be used is already
registered in speed dial, “OVERWRITE?” will be displayed. Select the
“CONFIRM” (type A audio)/“Confirm
Overwrite speed dial?” (type B audio)
menu to overwrite, or select the “GO
BACK” menu to cancel.
! Deleting the phonebook data
1. Select the “DELETE ENTRY” menu.
2. Select the phone number by performing either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
the voice tag.
– Press the talk switch and use
the list names function (type B audio).
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm delete entry?” (type B audio)
menu.
– Then “DELETED” (type A audio)/
“Phonebook entry deleted.” (type B
audio) is displayed and the selected
phonebook data is deleted.
! Deleting the speed dial
1. Select the “DEL SPD DIAL”/“DELETE
SPEED DIAL” menu.
2. Press the preset button (from to
) to which you want to delete the
speed dial.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm delete speed dial entry?” (type B
audio) menu.
– Then “DELETED” (type A audio)/
“Speed dial entry * deleted.” (type B
audio) is displayed and the selected
speed dial is deleted.
! Deleting the redial data
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu.
2. Select the phone number by operating
the “TUNE” dial.
3. Select the “DELETE” menu.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm delete number?” (type B audio)
menu.
– Then “DELETED” is displayed and
Information Provided by:
the selected redial data is deleted.
! Deleting the callback data
1. Select the “CALLBACK” menu.
2. Select the phone number by operating
the “TUNE” dial.
3. Select the “DELETE” menu.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm delete number?” (type B audio)
menu.
– Then “DELETED” is displayed and
the selected callback data is deleted.
! Making a phone call
! Making a phone call by saying name
1. Press the talk switch .
2. Say “DIAL BY NAME”.
3. Press the talk switch again.
4. Say the preferred name (voice tag) to
be called. For type B audio, you can use
the list names function.
5. Select the “DIAL” menu, or press the
OFF hook switch .
! Making a phone call by saying
number
1. Press the talk switch .
2. Say “DIAL BY NUMBER”.
3. Press the talk switch again.
4. Say the preferred phone number to be
called.
5. Select the “DIAL” menu, or press the
OFF hook switch .
! Making a phone call from speed dial
It is possible to select a phone number
from speed dial registered with the invehicle equipment to make a phone call.
1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
2. Press the preset button (from to
) to which the preferred number is
registered.
3. Press the OFF hook switch .
NOTE
When a preset button for which numbers are not registered is pressed, an
error message is indicated on the audio
screen.
! Redial
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu.
2. Select the preferred number by turning
the “TUNE” dial.
3. Perform either of the following procedures.
– Press the OFF hook switch .
– Select the “DIAL” menu.
! Callback
1. Select the “CALLBACK” menu.
2. Select the preferred number by turning
the “TUNE” dial.
3. Perform either of the following procedures.
– Press the OFF hook switch .
– Select the “DIAL” menu.
! Making a phone call from list name
It is possible to select a phone number
from the list name registered with the invehicle equipment to make a phone call.
For details, refer to “List names function”
F5-59.
! Top redial
1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
2. Press the OFF hook switch and
load the outgoing call history.
3. Select the preferred number by turning
the “TUNE” dial.
4. Perform either of the following procedures.
– Press the OFF hook switch .
– Select the “DIAL” menu.
! Taking a phone call and declining
an incoming call
To take a phone call: Press the OFF
hook switch .
Audio 5-61
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-62 Audio
To put an incoming call on hold (only if
the cell phone has this function): Press the
ON hook switch briefly.
To decline an incoming call (only if the
cell phone has this function): Press and
hold the ON hook switch .
! Ending a call
Press the ON hook switch .
! Volume control
You can adjust the phone call volume, the
voice volume and the voice guidance
volume. Refer to “Volume control switch”
F5-39.
! Adjustable level of each volume
Volume Range Initial setting
Phone call 0 to 14 7
Voice 0 to 14 7
Voice guidance 0 to 6
*1
1 to 7*2
3*1
4*2
*1: type A audio
*2: type B audio
& Bluetooth® setting
! Security setting
After selecting the “SECURITY” menu,
perform the following procedure.
! Setting PIN code
The PIN code is a 4-digit number and is
used when locking the phonebook.
1. Select the “SET PIN” menu.
2. Input the current PIN code by performing one of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
the number.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm PIN?” (type B audio) menu.
4. Input the new PIN code by performing
one of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
the number.
5. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm PIN?” (type B audio) menu.
! Locking the phonebook
1. Select the “PHBK LOCK”/“PHONEBOOK LOCK” menu.
NOTE
If the phonebook is locked, “LOCKED”
(type A audio)/“The phonebook is
locked.” (type B audio) is displayed
and the mode changes to the security
mode.
2. Input the PIN code by performing one
of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
the number.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm PIN?” (type B audio) menu.
– If the inputted PIN code is correct,
“LOCKED” (type A audio)/“The phonebook is locked.” (type B audio) will be
displayed and the phonebook is
locked.
Information Provided by:
NOTE
While the phonebook is locked, if the
operation restricted menu is selected,
“PHBK LOCK” (type A audio)/“Phonebook locked!” (type B audio) is displayed.
! Unlocking the phonebook
1. Select the “PHBK UNLOCK”/“PHONEBOOK UNLOCK” menu.
NOTE
If the phonebook is not locked, “UNLOCK” (type A audio)/“The phonebook
is unlocked.” (type B audio) is displayed and the mode changes to the
security mode.
2. Input the PIN code by performing one
of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
the number.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm PIN?” (type B audio) menu.
– If the inputted PIN code is correct,
“UNLOCKED” (type A audio)/“The
phonebook is unlocked.” (type B
audio) will be displayed and the
phonebook is unlocked.
! Phone setup
After selecting the “PHONE SETUP”
menu, perform the following procedure.
! Pairing phone
Refer to “Preparation for using the Handsfree system” F5-48.
! Selecting phone
To select the registered cell phone for
connecting to the in-vehicle equipment,
perform the following procedure.
1. Select the “SELECT PHONE” menu.
– If no cell phones are registered,
“EMPTY” (type A audio)/“No Phones
have been paired.” (type B audio) is
displayed and the mode changes to
the “PHONE SETUP” mode.
2. Select the cell phone by performing
one of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
the voice tag.
– Press the talk switch and use
the list phones function (refer to “List
phones function” F5-64.)
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm Phone selection?” (type B audio)
menu (only after saying the voice tag).
– “SELECTED” (type A audio)/
“Phone is selected.” (type B audio) is
displayed, the selected cell phone is
connected to the in-vehicle equipment
and the mode changes to the “PHONE
SETUP” mode.
NOTE
For type A audio, if the cell phone
cannot be connected to the in-vehicle
equipment, “FAILED” is displayed and
the mode changes to the “PHONE
SETUP” mode.
! Changing the voice tag of the cell
phone
1. Select the “CHANGE NAME” (type A
audio)/“Change Phone Name” (type B
audio) menu.
– If no cell phones are registered,
“EMPTY” (type A audio)/“No Phones
have been paired.” (type B audio) is
displayed and the mode changes to
the “PHONE SETUP” mode.
2. Select the cell phone by performing
one of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
the voice tag.
– Press the talk switch and use
the list phones function (refer to “List
phones function” F5-64.).
3. Register the voice tag. For details,
Audio 5-63
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
5-64 Audio
refer to “Preparation for using the Handsfree system” F5-48.
! List phones function
The cell phone voice tags saved in the cell
phone list are displayed by using the list
phones function.
1. Select the “LIST PHONES” menu.
– If no cell phones are registered,
“EMPTY” (type A audio)/“No Phones
have been paired.” (type B audio) is
displayed and the mode changes to
the “PHONE SETUP” mode.
2. Registered cell phones are displayed
in the saved order. While displayed, if the
“TUNE” dial is turned, the next registered
cell phone is displayed. Press the ON
hook button to close the Hands-free
menu.
3. Select a cell phone by performing
either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch .
4. After “SELECTED” (type A audio)/
“Phone is selected.” (type B audio) is
displayed, you can select the following
menus.
. “SELECT PHONE” to connect the
selected cell phone
. “CHANGE NAME” (type A audio)/
“Change Phone Name” (type B audio) to
change the voice tag
. “DELETE” (type A audio)/“Delete
Phone” (type B audio) to delete the
selected cell phone from the list
. “GO BACK” to go back to the “PHONE
SETUP” mode
! Setting passkey
1. Select the “SET PASSKEY” menu.
– After the currently set passkey is
displayed, a new passkey can be
entered.
2. Input the new passkey by performing
one of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
the passkey.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm passkey?” (type B audio) menu.
– The new passkey is displayed, the
passkey is changed and the mode
changes to the “PHONE SETUP”
mode.
! Deleting registered cell phone from
the list
1. Select the “DELETE” (type A audio)/
“Delete Phone” (type B audio) menu.
2. Select a cell phone to be deleted by
performing one of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say
the voice tag.
– Press the talk switch and use
the list phones function.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm delete phone?” (type B audio)
menu.
– “DELETED” (type A audio)/“Phone
has been deleted.” (type B audio) is
displayed, the data is deleted and the
mode changes to the “PHONE SETUP” mode.
! Turning the Hands-free power on/off
(type B audio)
You can turn the Hands-free power on or
off. If the Hands-free power is ON, the
registered cell phones are automatically
connected to the system when the ignition
switch is turned to the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
1. Select the “Hands-free Power”/
“Handsfree Power” menu.
2. To turn off the Hands-free power when
the Hands-free power is ON, perform
either of the following procedures.
– Press the talk switch and say
“Turn off”.
– Select “Turn off” by operating the
Information Provided by:
“TUNE” dial.
To turn on the Hands-free power when the
Hands-free power is OFF, perform either
of the following procedures.
– Press the talk switch and say
“Turn on”.
– Select “Turn on” by operating the
“TUNE” dial.
! System setup
After selecting the “SYSTEM SETUP”
menu, perform the following procedure.
You can select the following menus only
by operating the “TUNE” dial.
! Setting guidance volume
To set the guidance volume, perform the
following procedure.
1. Select the “GUIDANCE VOL” (type A
audio)/“Guidance Volume” (type B audio)
menu.
2. Set the guidance volume by operating
the “TUNE” dial.
! Initializing the registered data
To initialize the registered data, perform
the following procedure.
1. Select the “INITIALIZE” (type A audio)/
“Reset Settings” (type B audio) menu.
2. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm reset settings?” (type B audio)
menu.
– “INITIALIZED” (type A audio)/“Settings have been reset.” (type B audio)
is displayed, the registered data is
initialized and the mode changes to
the last mode.
! Selecting language
To select the language, perform the
following procedure.
Type A audio:
1. Select the “SEL LANGUAGE” menu.
2. Select the desired language by operating the “TUNE” dial.
Type B audio:
“HD/TEXT” button
1. Press and hold the “HD/TEXT” button
to select “Select Langu” menu.
2. Select the preferred language by
operating the “TUNE” dial.
! Device name function (type B audio)
Select the “Device Name” menu to show
the device name and BD address of the
audio.
Audio 5-65
Information Provided by:
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Information Provided by:
Interior light ......................................................... 6-2
Dome light .......................................................... 6-2
Map light............................................................. 6-2
Cargo area light (Outback)................................... 6-3
OFF delay timer .................................................. 6-3
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4
Sun visor extension plate .................................... 6-4
Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-5
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5
Glove box ........................................................... 6-6
Center console box ............................................. 6-6
Overhead console (if equipped) ........................... 6-8
Pocket (if equipped) ............................................ 6-8
Cup holder ........................................................... 6-8
Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-9
Rear passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-9
Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-9
Accessory power outlets................................... 6-10
Ashtray (if equipped)......................................... 6-12
Coat hook........................................................... 6-13
Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-13
Legacy .............................................................. 6-13
Outback ............................................................ 6-14
Floor mat ............................................................ 6-14
Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped)....... 6-15
Using the cover ................................................. 6-15
To remove the cover housing............................. 6-15
Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 6-15
To install the cover housing ............................... 6-16
Convenient tie-down hooks (Outback)............. 6-17
Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-17
Rear view camera (if equipped) ........................ 6-18
How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-19
Viewing range on the screen.............................. 6-20
Help line............................................................ 6-21
Interior equipment
6
Information Provided by:
6-2 Interior equipment
Interior light
CAUTION
When leaving your vehicle, make
sure the lights are turned off to
avoid battery discharge.
& Dome light
1) ON
2) DOOR
3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
positions:
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates automatically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate
(Outback) is opened.
. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked using the keyless access function
(if equipped). Refer to “Locking and
unlocking with “keyless access” entry
function” F2-13.
. The doors or the rear gate (Outback)
are unlocked using the remote keyless
entry system. Refer to “Remote keyless
entry system” F2-19.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
& Map light
To turn on the map light, press the switch.
To turn it off, press the switch again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
lights are turned off to avoid battery
discharge.
Information Provided by:
! Door interlock switch
1) Door interlock switch
Although the map light switches are in the
OFF position (manually off), the map lights
can be set to illuminate automatically in
conjunction with a door opening, etc. by
use of the door interlock switch. The door
interlock switch has the following positions.
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate
automatically in conjunction with a door
opening. But, the lights can be turned on
manually by pressing the map light
switches.
DOOR: The map lights illuminate automatically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors (other than the rear
gate or trunk lid) is opened. The map lights
do not illuminate when only the rear gate
is opened.
. The doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function (if equipped).
Refer to “Locking and unlocking with
“keyless access” entry function” F2-13.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-19.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
& Cargo area light (Outback)
1) DOOR
2) OFF
3) ON
The cargo area light switch has the
following positions.
DOOR: The light illuminates only when
the rear gate is opened.
OFF: The light remains off.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
& OFF delay timer
The following lights have an automatic
illumination function.
. dome light
. map light
. cargo area light (Outback)
After being illuminated automatically,
these lights remain on for several seconds
and then gradually turn off under the
following conditions.
. after all doors and the rear gate (Outback) are closed (dome light)
. after all doors are closed (map light)
. after the rear gate is closed (cargo area
light)
While the lights are illuminated, if any of
the following operations are performed,
the lights turn off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position to the “Acc” or
“ON” position.
. All doors and the rear gate (Outback)
are locked using the keyless access
Interior equipment 6-3
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
6-4 Interior equipment
function (if equipped).
. All doors and the rear gate (Outback)
are locked using the remote keyless entry
system.
The setting for the period of time in which
the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
& Sun visor extension plate
Models without EyeSight system
Models with EyeSight system
With the sun visor positioned over the side
window, you can use the sun visor
extension plate to prevent glare through
Information Provided by:
the gap between the sun visor and center
pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it
toward the rear of the vehicle. When you
have finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not pull out the extension plate
with the sun visor positioned over
the windshield. The extension plate
would obstruct your view of the
rearview mirror.
& Vanity mirror with light
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being blinded by glare.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The lights beside the vanity mirror illuminate when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
Storage compartment
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compartment.
Interior equipment 6-5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
6-6 Interior equipment
& Glove box
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the glove
box. For details, refer to “Keyless access
with push-button start system (Outback –
if equipped)” F2-9.
& Center console box
! Center console box (front)
If you remove the divider plate from the
dual cup holders, you can use the center
console box as a storage space.
To use as storage space:
Pull out the divider plate of the dual cup
holder.
Information Provided by:
To use again as cup holders:
Insert the divider plate into the console
box.
! Center console box (rear)
The center console box has a two-layer
structure consisting of an upper compartment and a lower compartment.
! Upper compartment
1) Upper compartment lock release
Pull up the upper compartment lock
release to open the upper compartment.
! Lower compartment
1) Lower compartment lock release
Pull up the lower compartment lock
release to open the lower compartment.
Interior equipment 6-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
6-8 Interior equipment
& Overhead console (if
equipped)
To open the console, push on the lid lightly
and it will automatically open.
CAUTION
When your vehicle is parked in the
sun or on a warm day, the inside of
the overhead console heats up.
Avoid storing plastic or other heatvulnerable or flammable articles
such as a lighter in the overhead
console.
& Pocket (if equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use the pocket as an ashtray
or leave a lighted cigarette in the
pocket. This could cause a fire.
To use the pocket, open the lid.
Cup holder
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an
accident.
. Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might burn you
and/or your passengers. Spilled
beverages may also damage upholstery or carpets.
Information Provided by:
& Front passenger’s cup holder
The dual cup holder is built into the center
console.
& Rear passenger’s cup holder
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.
CAUTION
When a cup containing a beverage
is in the cup holder, do not fold
down or recline any seat. Otherwise,
the beverage could spill while driving and, if the beverage is hot, it
could burn you and/or your passengers.
Bottle holders
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could burn
you and/or your passengers.
The bottle holder equipped on each door
Interior equipment 6-9
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
6-10 Interior equipment
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
Accessory power outlets
Power outlet below the climate control
Power outlet in the center console
Power outlet in the cargo area (Outback)
Accessory power outlets are provided
below the climate control, in the center
console and in the cargo area. Electrical
power (12V DC) from the battery is
available at any of the outlets when the
ignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120W. Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
power consumed by them must not
exceed 120W.
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlet.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the accessory power outlet when it is not
in use.
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
is 120W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two or more outlets
simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not
exceed 120W. Overloading the
accessory power outlet can
cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters or more than
one electrical appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord
on your electrical appliance will
not interfere with your shifting
gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they
do, do not use the electrical
appliance while driving.
Upper compartment
Lower compartment
NOTE
When the lid of the center console is
closed, a gap remains between the
center console and the lid to allow the
Interior equipment 6-11
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
6-12 Interior equipment
power outlet in the center console to be
used. Pass the cord of the electrical
appliance through this gap.
Ashtray (if equipped)
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the
cigarette may spread to another
cigarette butt and start a fire.
. Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray.
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder. For the locations of the
cup holders, refer to “Cup holder” F6-8.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. When removing the ashtray from
a cup holder, pull the ashtray upwards.
Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to
help reduce residual smoke.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ashtray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or another narrow-ended
implement.
Information Provided by:
Coat hook
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deployment of the SRS curtain airbags,
they could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing correct airbag deployment. Before hanging clothing on
the coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pockets.
Hang clothing directly on the coat
hooks without using hangers.
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
The coat hook is attached to each rear
passenger’s hand grip.
Shopping bag hook
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or
more.
& Legacy
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk
lid opening.
Interior equipment 6-13
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
6-14 Interior equipment
& Outback
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area.
To use the hook, push the upper portion
and the shopping bag hook will appear.
Floor mat
CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat designed with
grommets in the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed back in its proper
location and is correctly secured
on its retaining pins.
. Do not use more than one floor
mat.
Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
side floor.
The floor mat should be properly secured
using the built-in grommets, by placing the
grommets over the pins and pushing them
downward.
Information Provided by:
Cargo area cover
(Outback – if equipped)
The cargo area cover is provided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
& Using the cover
To extend the cover, pull the end of the
cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.
WARNING
Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover. Scratches
on the stays could cause leakage
of gas from the stays, which may
result in their inability to hold the
rear gate open.
. When reclining the rear seatback,
move the front cover backward
so that the cover is not damaged.
& To remove the cover housing
1. Rewind the cover.
2. Hold down the button on the righthand rear quarter panel and lift up the
right-hand cover housing.
3. Remove the cover housing.
& Stowage of the cargo area
cover
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.
Interior equipment 6-15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
6-16 Interior equipment
1. To open the lid, pull the handle up.
2. To keep the lid open, hang the hook
(provided on the back of the lid) on the
rear edge of the roof.
3. Remove the left and right parts of the
cargo floor lid.
4. Stow the cover housing in the cargo
area end.
& To install the cover housing
1. Insert both ends of the cover housing
into the retainers.
2. Make sure to fix the front part of the
cargo area cover behind the rear seat.
Information Provided by:
Convenient tie-down hooks
(Outback)
CAUTION
The convenient tie-down hooks are
designed only for securing light
cargo. Never try to secure cargo
that exceeds the capacity of the
hooks. The maximum load capacity
is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.
The cargo area is equipped with four tiedown hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a luggage net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the
storing recesses. Under-floor storage compartment
The subfloor storage compartment is
located under the floor of the trunk or
cargo area and can be used to store small
items. To open the lid, pull the tab or
handle up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the subfloor storage in the trunk or cargo area.
CAUTION
. Always keep the lid of the subfloor storage compartment
closed while driving to reduce
the risk of injury in the event of
sudden stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the subfloor storage
compartment.
Interior equipment 6-17
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
6-18 Interior equipment
Legacy
Outback
Hang the hook provided on the underside
of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to
keep the lid open.
Rear view camera (if
equipped)
Legacy
Outback
A rear view camera is attached to the
trunk lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback).
When the ignition switch is “ON” and the
shift lever (MT models) or select lever (AT
or CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear view
camera automatically displays the rear
view image behind the vehicle on the
audio/navigation monitor or on the inside
mirror depending on the model.
WARNING
. Since the rear view camera uses
a wide-angle lens, the image on
the monitor is different from the
actual view in terms of distance.
. Since the range of the image on
the monitor is limited, you should
always check the rear view and
the surrounding area with your
eyes and mirrors, and move
backward at a slow speed. Moving backward only by checking
the rear view image from the
camera could cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell
a strange odor, stop using the
rear view camera immediately.
Contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection. Continued use
Information Provided by:
may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle is washed with a
high-pressure washer, do not
allow water to contact the camera
directly. Entry of water in the
camera lens may result in condensation, malfunction, fire or
electric shock.
. Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur.
. If mud or snow sticks to or is
frozen on the camera, you must
be very careful removing it.
Otherwise, damage done to the
camera may cause a fire or
electric shock. Pour water or
lukewarm water over the camera
to remove mud and ice, and wipe
it with a soft, dry cloth.
. Do not put a flame close to the
camera or wiring. Otherwise, damage or fire may occur.
. When replacing the fuse, be sure
to use a fuse with the specified
rating. Use of a fuse with a
different rating may result in a
malfunction.
. If the rear view camera is used for
a long time while the engine is
not operated, the battery may
become completely discharged.
NOTE
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
discoloration may occur. To remove
contamination, wipe the camera with a
cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
dry cloth.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful
not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
comes in contact with the camera,
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has hard coating to
help prevent scratches. However, when
washing the vehicle or cleaning the
camera lens, be careful not to scratch
the camera lens. Do not use a washing
brush directly on the camera lens. The
monitor screen may be adversely affected.
. Strong light shined on the camera
lens may develop white light stripes
around the light source. This is not a
malfunction.
. Under fluorescent lighting, the display may flicker. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. The image of the rear view camera
may be slightly different from the
actual color of the objects.
& How to use the rear view
camera
When the shift lever or select lever is set
to “R”, the rear view camera automatically
displays the rear view image from the
vehicle. When the lever is set to other
positions, the image before setting to “R”
is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the shift lever or select lever to “R”.
NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system, the image
of the rear view camera has priority
over other screen displays. To operate
other screens, set the shift lever (MT
models) or select lever (AT and CVT
models) to a position other than “R”.
. The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
side view mirror.
Interior equipment 6-19
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
6-20 Interior equipment
. It may be difficult to see the image of
the rearview camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of the
camera.
– The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
– The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
– An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
to the lens of the camera.
– Strong light shined directly on
the camera lens (occasionally, there
are vertical lines on the screen).
& Viewing range on the screen
Range of view
Range of view
Image from camera
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
Information Provided by:
Range of view
Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projection cannot be seen on the screen.
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
& Help line
The help line (distance marker and vehicle
width line) is a guide to help you realize
the actual distance from the screen.
Help lines displayed on the audio/navigation monitor
Help lines displayed on the inside mirror
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
6) Vehicle centerline
When the shift lever or select lever is set
to position “R”, the monitor screen displays the help lines together with the rear
view image.
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
Interior equipment 6-21
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
6-22 Interior equipment
without relying on the help lines.
. The actual position may be different from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to
number of passengers or loaded
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
when the vehicle is inclined
against the road, the indication
is different from the actual position.
! Difference between screen and actual road
The distance markers show the distance
for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
distance depending on the loading conditions or road conditions.
!When there is an upward slope at the
back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance.
! When there is a downward slope at
the back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance.
NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rear view
distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.
Information Provided by:
! Feature of distance marker
1) 3 feet (1 m) line
2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
close behind, distance cannot be correctly
displayed.
Interior equipment 6-23
Information Provided by:
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Information Provided by:
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3
Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-4
State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-7
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8
Starting and stopping the engine (models
without push-button ignition switch) .............. 7-9
Starting engine.................................................... 7-9
Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-11
Starting and stopping engine (models with
push-button start system) .............................. 7-11
Safety precautions ............................................. 7-11
Operating range for push-button start
system............................................................. 7-11
Starting engine................................................... 7-11
Stopping engine................................................. 7-12
When access key does not operate properly ....... 7-13
Remote engine start system (dealer
option).............................................................. 7-13
Models with “keyless access with push-button
start system” ................................................... 7-14
Models without “keyless access with push-button
start system” ................................................... 7-15
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote
start................................................................. 7-17
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start
shutdown......................................................... 7-17
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the
vehicle ............................................................. 7-17
Service mode (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)........................ 7-17
Remote transmitter program (models without
“keyless access with push-button start
system”).......................................................... 7-18
System maintenance.......................................... 7-18
Manual transmission ......................................... 7-20
Selecting reverse gear ....................................... 7-20
Shifting speeds.................................................. 7-20
Driving tips........................................................ 7-21
Automatic transmission/Continuously
variable transmission ..................................... 7-22
Select lever ....................................................... 7-23
Shift lock function ............................................. 7-24
Selection of manual mode.................................. 7-25
Driving tips........................................................ 7-27
Power steering................................................... 7-27
Braking ............................................................... 7-28
Braking tips....................................................... 7-28
Brake system .................................................... 7-28
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-29
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-29
ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-29
ABS warning light.............................................. 7-29
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system............................................................. 7-30
Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 7-30
Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-32
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 7-33
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped) .................................................... 7-34
Starting and operating
7
Information Provided by:
Starting and operating
Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-35
Electronic parking brake..................................... 7-36
Parking tips ....................................................... 7-39
Cruise control..................................................... 7-40
To set cruise control .......................................... 7-40
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-42
To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-42
To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-42
Cruise control indicator light.............................. 7-44
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-44
Information Provided by:
Fuel
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in quality
or use of an inappropriate fuel
additive may cause engine damage.
& Fuel requirements
The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
! Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane
numbers and is commonly referred to as
the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane
rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine.
Do not be concerned if your vehicle
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive
up a hill or when you accelerate. See your
dealer or a qualified service technician if
you use a fuel with the specified octane
rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or
persistently.
! Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! California fuel
If your vehicle was certified to California
Emission Standards as indicated on the
underhood tune-up label, it is designed to
optimize engine and emission control
system performance with gasoline that
meets the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline specifications. If you live in
any other state than California, your
vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
Federal specifications. Gasoline sold outside California is permitted to have higher
sulfur levels, which may affect the performance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
a different brand of unleaded gasoline
having lower sulfur to determine if the
problem is fuel related before returning
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service. The CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light may also
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition is
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
! MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may turn on. If this
happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
be covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels containing alcohol may cause paint
damage, which is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Your use of gasoline with detergent
additives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
Starting and operating 7-3
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-4 Starting and operating
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
your vehicle, but should contain no more
than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the
proper operation of your SUBARU.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station
operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gasoline before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
& Fuel filler lid and cap
! Refueling
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
release lever up. The lever is on the floor
at the left of the driver’s seat.
2. Open the fuel filler lid.
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to discharge any
static electricity that may be present
on your body. If your body is carrying an electrostatic charge, there is
a possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
1) Open
2) Close
3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always
first stop the engine and close all
vehicle doors and windows.
Make sure that there are no
lighted cigarettes, open flames
or electrical sparks in the adjacent area. Refueling must be
performed outside. Quickly wipe
up any spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the
left. Do not remove the cap
quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel
filler neck, especially in hot
weather. If you hear a hissing
sound while you are removing
the cap, wait for the sound to
stop and then slowly open the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying
out and creating a fire hazard.
4. Hook the cord that is attached to the
fuel filler cap onto the hook inside the fuel
filler lid.
WARNING
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stopping mechanism may not function, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the automatic stop mechanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you continue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
Starting and operating 7-5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-6 Starting and operating
the tank and create a fire hazard.
5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically turns off. Do not add
any more fuel.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
not to catch the tether under the cap while
tightening.
7. Close the fuel filler lid completely. If
you spill any fuel on the painted surface,
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the
painted surface could be damaged.
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
door (lid) is located on the right side of
the vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light” F3-16.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could
occur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit, and
your fuel tank and emission control system may be damaged. It
could also lead to fuel spillage
and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result of an empty tank
could cause damage to the engine.
Information Provided by:
State emission testing (U.S.
only)
WARNING
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model
must NEVER be performed on a
single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do so will result in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and
may cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or
service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission
damage will result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to
inspect your vehicle’s emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certified emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the state emission inspection
process. The OBDII system is designed
to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause the vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
Over 30 states plus the District of Columbia have implemented emission inspection of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/malfunction indicator light (MIL) and an
examination of the OBDII system with an
electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle passes the OBDII system
inspection if proper operation of the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is observed, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
properly operating (light is illuminated or is
not working due to a burned out bulb) or
there is one or more diagnostic trouble
codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
READY” is greater than one. If the
vehicle’s battery has been recently replaced or disconnected, the OBDII system
inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this
condition, the vehicle driver should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
days to reset the readiness monitors and
return for an emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
service.
Some states still use dynamometers in
their emission inspection program. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
testing device that allows your vehicle’s
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
on a dynamometer, tell your emission
inspector not to place your SUBARU
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.
Starting and operating 7-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-8 Starting and operating
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their
testing program. When properly used, this
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected for
state emission testing.
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy)
and rear gate (Outback) are fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the engine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
Information Provided by:
Starting and stopping the
engine (models without
push-button ignition switch)
& Starting engine
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 seconds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the starter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
! General precautions when starting
engine
WARNING
. Never start the engine from outside the vehicle. It may result in
an accident.
. Do not leave the engine running
in locations with poor ventilation,
such as a garage and indoors.
The exhaust gas may enter the
vehicle or indoors, and it may
result in carbon monoxide poisoning.
. Do not start the engine near dry
foliage, paper, or other flammable substances. The exhaust
pipe and exhaust emissions can
create a fire hazard at high
temperatures.
CAUTION
. If the engine is stopped during
driving, the catalyst may overheat and burn.
. When starting the engine, be sure
to sit in the driver’s seat (except
when using the remote engine
start system).
NOTE
. Avoid rapid racing and rapid acceleration immediately after the engine
has started.
. For a short time after the engine has
started, the engine speed is kept high.
When the warm-up is completed, the
engine speed lowers automatically.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult
to start the engine depending on the
fuel and the usage condition (repeated
driving of a distance in which the
engine has not warmed up sufficiently).
In such a case, it is recommended that
you change to a different brand of fuel.
. On rare occasions, transient knocking may be heard from the engine when
the accelerator is operated rapidly
such as a rapid start-up and a rapid
acceleration. This is not a malfunction.
. The engine starts more easily when
the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
. After the engine starts, the engine
speed will be kept high until the engine
has warmed up sufficiently.
! MT models
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting
the engine. The starter motor will only
operate when the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the floor.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-12.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
following procedure.
Starting and operating 7-9
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-10 Starting and operating
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is applied, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this does not start the engine,
turn the ignition switch again to the
“LOCK” position. After waiting for 10
seconds or longer, turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
! AT and CVT models
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the select
lever into the “N” position. Do not
attempt to place the select lever of a
moving vehicle into the “P” position.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
position (preferably “P” position). The
starter will only operate when the select
lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-12.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is applied, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make
sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
“N” position and that the parking brake is
applied.
Information Provided by:
& Stopping the engine
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steering and braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental activation of the “LOCK” position on the
ignition switch, causing the steering
wheel to lock.
The ignition switch should be turned off
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is idling.
Starting and stopping engine
(models with push-button
start system)
& Safety precautions
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-11.
& Operating range for pushbutton start system
Refer to “Operating range for push-button
start system” F3-5.
& Starting engine
WARNING
. There are some general precautions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “General precautions when starting engine” F79.
. If the indicator on the pushbutton ignition switch flashes in
green after the engine has
started, never drive the vehicle.
The steering is still locked, and it
may result in an accident.
CAUTION
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch is
flashing in orange, there may be
a malfunction with the vehicle.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If the indicator on the pushbutton ignition switch is flashing
in green after the engine has
started, it means that the steering
is still locked. While moving the
steering wheel right and left,
depress the brake pedal, and
press the push-button ignition
switch.
. Do not continue pushing the
push-button ignition switch for
more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause a malfunction. If the
engine does not start, stop pushing the push-button ignition
switch and turn off the engine.
Wait 10 seconds, and then push
the push-button ignition switch
to start the engine.
NOTE
. When the push-button ignition
switch is pressed while depressing
Starting and operating 7-11
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-12 Starting and operating
the brake pedal, the engine starter
operates for a maximum of 10 seconds
and after starting the engine, the starter
stops automatically.
. When the push-button ignition
switch is pressed while depressing
the brake pedal, the engine can be
started regardless of the power status.
. If the security indicator light illuminates when you attempt to start the
engine but the engine does not start,
press the push-button ignition switch
to switch the power to “OFF” and then
try to start the engine again.
. If the engine does not start, press
the push-button ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to switch
the power to “OFF”. Then, while depressing the brake pedal more forcefully, press the push-button ignition
switch.
. The engine start procedures may
not function depending on the radio
wave conditions around the vehicle. In
such a case, refer to “Starting engine”
F9-21.
. If the vehicle battery is discharged,
the steering cannot be unlocked.
Charge the battery.
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
When the push-button ignition switch is
pressed while depressing the brake pedal,
the engine will start. The starting procedure for the engine is as follows.
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position. The engine can also start when
the select lever is in the “N” position,
however, for safety reasons, start in the
“P” position.
4. Depress the brake pedal until the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green. When starting
with the select lever in the “N” position, the
indicator does not turn green.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
. In case the engine does not start by
the normal engine start procedure,
move the select lever to the “P” position, and switch the power to “Acc”.
Depress the brake pedal, and press the
push-button ignition switch for at least
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
use this engine start procedure in case
of emergency.
. When the engine is not started, the
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
case, depress the brake pedal more
forcefully than usual. Check that the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green, and press
the push-button ignition switch to start
the engine.
& Stopping engine
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
The engine will stop, and the power will be
switched off.
Information Provided by:
WARNING
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition
switch is operated as follows,
the engine will stop.
– The switch is pressed and held
for 3 seconds or longer.
– The switch is pressed briefly 3
times or more in succession.
When the engine stops, the brake
booster will not function. A greater foot pressure will be required
on the brake pedal.
The power steering system will
not operate either. A greater
force will be required to steer,
and it may result in an accident.
. If the engine stops during driving,
do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the
doors until the vehicle is stopped
in a safe location. It is dangerous
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
CAUTION
. Do not stop the engine while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
. If the engine is stopped while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position, the power
will be in “Acc”. If the vehicle is
left in this condition, the battery
may be discharged.
NOTE
Although you can stop the engine by
operating the push-button ignition
switch, do not stop the engine during
driving except in an emergency.
& When access key does not
operate properly
Refer to “Access key – if access key does
not operate properly” F9-20.
Remote engine start system
(dealer option)
WARNING
. There are some general precautions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “General precautions when starting engine” F79.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in
an enclosed environment (e.g.
closed garage). Prolonged operation of a motor vehicle in an
enclosed environment can cause
a harmful build-up of Carbon
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of Carbon Monoxide can cause headaches, dizziness or in extreme cases unconsciousness and/or death.
. Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the
system from unexpectedly starting the engine.
The remote engine start system allows
Starting and operating 7-13
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-14 Starting and operating
you to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. In addition, the remote engine
start system can activate the heater or air
conditioner, providing you with a comfortable cabin upon entry.
& Models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”
NOTE
For more details, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the remote
engine start system.
Access key
1) Lock button
An access key can be used as the remote
engine start transmitter. Operate the lock
button to start or stop the engine as
follows.
! Before starting the engine
Before using the remote engine start
system to start the engine, confirm the
following conditions.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. All doors including the rear gate are
closed.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The push-button ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position.
! When starting the engine
To start the engine with remote engine
start system, briefly press the lock button
twice within 2 seconds, then press and
hold the lock button for 3 seconds.
1. Press the lock button briefly. The
hazard warning flashers then flash once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock
button briefly again. The hazard warning
flashers then flash once again.
3. After step 2, immediately press and
hold the lock button. The hazard warning
flashers then flash once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,
release the lock button. The engine will
then start successfully.
! When stopping the engine
Press and hold the lock button to stop the
engine with remote engine start system.
! Automatic engine shutdown
The remote engine start system will
automatically shut down or will not start
the engine under the following conditions.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20
minutes.
. Any door or the rear gate is opened.
. The select lever is moved to any
position other than “P”.
. The engine hood is opened.
. The push-button ignition switch is
pressed.
. The brake pedal is depressed.
. The engine speed is 3,000 rpm or
more.
The time until the engine automatically
stops differs according to the setting.
To change the time until the engine
automatical ly stops, contact your
SUBARU dealer. However, local laws
and regulations may prohibit changing
this time.
Information Provided by:
& Models without “keyless access with push-button start
system”
! Starting your vehicle
NOTE
All vehicle doors, the engine hood and
rear gate must be closed prior to
activating the remote engine start system. Any open entry point will prevent
starting or cause the system to shut
down.
The remote engine start function is activated by pressing the “ ” button twice
within 3 seconds on your remote engine
start transmitter. Upon successful activation the remote start confirming transmitter
button will flash once* and the vehicle will
honk the horn and flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights once.
The system will check certain preconditions before starting, and if all safety
parameters are correct, the engine will
start within 5 seconds. Upon successful
engine start, the remote start confirmation
transmitter button will flash twice every 5
seconds* and the vehicle will honk the
horn and flash the side marker lights, tail
lights and the parking lights once, then the
lights will illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the engine is running. While the vehicle is operating via the
remote engine start function, the power
window features will be disabled. Also, the
system has a timer and will shut down
after 15 minutes if you do not operate the
vehicle. Press and hold the “ ” button for
2 seconds to turn the engine off. The
remote start confirmation transmitter button will flash three times* indicating that
the engine has shut down. If the starter
cranks but does not start or starts and
stalls, the remote engine start system will
power off and then attempt to start the
engine an additional three times unless
the remote engine start system determines that a vehicle malfunction is preventing the system from starting. If the
engine does not start after additional
attempts, the remote engine start system
will abort and return to a non-activate
state.
*: Provided that the remote engine start
transmitter is within the operating range of
the system.
! Remote start safety features
For safety and security reasons, the
system will fail to start and honk the horn
twice or shut down the engine during
remote start operation if any of the
following occur:
. Any of the doors or the rear gate are
open / opened (*the vehicle’s horn will
honk six times and the side marker lights,
tail lights and the parking lights will flash
six times indicating that a vehicle door or
rear gate was open when the remote
engine start system was activated).
. The brake pedal is depressed
. The key was already in the ignition
switch
. The engine hood is opened
. The remote start system “Service
mode” is engaged
. The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
reached a level over 3,500 RPM
. The alarm is triggered by opening a
door or the rear gate.
. The select lever is not in the “P”
position (AT and CVT models)
In addition to the items above, if the
Starting and operating 7-15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-16 Starting and operating
vehicle’s engine management system
determines there is a safety risk due to a
vehicle related problem, the vehicle will
shut down and the vehicle’s horn will honk
three times.
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine start activation
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing twice
approximately every 2 seconds), the
alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at
the time of remote engine start activation (the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing once
approximately every 3 seconds), the
alarm system will remain disarmed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
! Remote start confirmation transmitter feature
Your remote engine start transmitter is
equipped with a unique bidirectional confirmation feature. This feature will allow
the transmitter’s backlit button to display
the status of the system under the condition that the vehicle and transmitter are
within the operational range of the system.
Typical transmitter button flash sequences
are outlined in the following chart.
Transmitter flash sequence Feature description
Flashes when button is
pressed Indicates that the system is transmitting an RF signal.
Two long flashes following remote start activation (transmitter button is pressed two times
within 3 seconds)
Indicates that the transmitter did not receive the remote start
activation confirmation from the vehicle system. The transmitter
will automatically send one additional remote start activation
attempt. This usually occurs when the operational range is at its
limit or has been exceeded.
One flash following remote
start activation (transmitter
button is pressed two times
within 3 seconds)
Indicates that the engine is running via remote start. If the
transmitter is moved outside of the operating range of the
system, this sequence will timeout after the normal 15-minute
vehicle run cycle.
2 flashes every 5 seconds
Indicates that the engine is running via remote start. If the
transmitter is removed outside of the operating range of the
system, this sequence will timeout after the normal 15-minute
vehicle run cycle.
3 flashes
Indicates that the engine has turned off due to a remote start
system 15-minute timeout, vehicle safety parameter or normal
shutdown.
Information Provided by:
& Entering the vehicle while it
is running via remote start
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless access function (if equipped) or
remote keyless entry system. If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked manually using
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior
to activating the remote engine start
system) and the engine will turn off.
Perform either of the following procedures
to disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Alarm system” F2-25.
. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn it to the “ON” position (models
without “keyless access with pushbutton start system”)
. Turn the push-button ignition switch
to the “Acc” or “ON” position (models
with “keyless access with push-button
start system”)
. Press any button on the access key/
remote keyless entry transmitter.
2. Enter the vehicle.
3. The engine will shut down when any
door or rear gate is opened.
4. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”, insert the
key into the ignition switch and turn to the
“START” position to restart the engine. For
models with “keyless access with pushbutton start system”, press the pushbutton ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal to restart the engine.
& Entering the vehicle following remote engine start shutdown
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry
system/keyless access function within a
few seconds immediately following remote
engine start shutdown.
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling
the interior of the vehicle
Models with automatic climate control
system:
After the system starts the engine, the
automatic climate control system will
activate the “FULL AUTO” mode and heat
or cool the interior to the predetermined
median (room) temperature. No presetting of controls is necessary.
Models without automatic climate control system:
Before exiting the vehicle, set the temperature controls to the desired setting
and operation. After the system starts the
engine, the heater or air conditioning will
activate and heat or cool the interior to
your setting.
& Service mode (models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
In service mode, the remote engine start
function is temporarily disabled to prevent
the system from unexpectedly starting the
engine while being serviced.
To engage or disengage service mode:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle
doors and the rear gate.
2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P”
position (AT and CVT models)
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position
5. Press and release the remote engine
start transmitter “ ” button three times.
The system will honk the vehicle’s horn
each time the button is pressed.
6. The system will pause for 1 second
then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to
indicate that the service mode has been
engaged or honk one time to indicate that
the service mode has been disengaged.
NOTE
When taking your vehicle in for service,
it is recommended that you inform the
Starting and operating 7-17
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-18 Starting and operating
service personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with a remote engine start
system.
& Remote transmitter program
(models without “keyless access with push-button start
system”)
New transmitters can be programmed to
the remote engine start system in the
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,
damaged or additional transmitters are
desired (the system will accept up to eight
transmitters). New remote engine start
transmitters can be programmed according to the following procedure.
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain opened throughout the
entire process).
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
“LOCK”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”, then
back to “ON” again and leave the ignition
“ON” throughout the programming process.
4. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn three times, indicating that
the system has entered the transmitter
learn mode.
5. Press and release the “ ” button on
the transmitter that you want to program.
6. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn one time, indicating that the
system has learned the transmitter. Upon
successful programming, the remote start
confirmation transmitter button will flash
one time.
7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
transmitters (the system will accept up to
eight transmitters).
8. The system will exit the transmitter
learn mode if the key is turned to the
“LOCK” position, the door is closed or
after 2 minutes.
& System maintenance
NOTE
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
replaced, discharged or disconnected,
it will be necessary to start the vehicle
a minimum of one time using the key
prior to activating the remote engine
start system. This is required to allow
the vehicle electronic systems to resynchronize.
! Changing the batteries
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitter when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the remote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any removed parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of battery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system:
Perform the procedure described in “Replacing battery of access key” F11-54.
Information Provided by:
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system:
The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
CR-2032) supplied in your remote engine
start transmitter should last approximately
one year, depending on usage. When the
batteries begin to weaken, you will notice
a decrease in range (distance from the
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote engine start transmitter batteries.
1. Remove the small Phillips type screw
located on the back side lower left corner
of the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
transmitter halves apart using a small flathead screwdriver.
3. Remove the circuit board from the
bottom half of the case and remove the
batteries and replace with new ones. Be
sure to observe the (+) sign on the old
batteries before removing them to ensure
that the new batteries are inserted properly (battery “+” should be pointed away
from the transmitter circuit board on both
batteries).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the Phillips type screw
and test the remote engine start system.
NOTE
. This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment and void warranty.
. To comply with the FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, no
change to the antenna or the device is
permitted. Any change to the antenna
or the device could result in the device
exceeding the RF exposure requirements and void user’s authority to
operate the device.
Starting and operating 7-19
Information Provided by:
7-20 Starting and operating
Manual transmission
WARNING
. Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or
with the shift lever in the neutral
position. Engine braking has no
effect in either of these conditions and the risk of an accident
is consequently increased.
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,
release the clutch pedal) suddenly when starting the vehicle.
By doing so the vehicle might
unexpectedly accelerate or the
transmission could malfunction.
The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed, 6-forward-speed and 1-reverse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift
lever knob.
& Selecting reverse gear
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmission to try shifting into reverse when
the vehicle is moving.
1) Slider
You must raise the slider and hold it in that
position before you can move the shift
lever to the “R” position.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch
pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal.
& Shifting speeds
! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel economy and vehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
Information Provided by:
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (64)
4th to 5th 45 (72)
5th to 6th 50 (80)
! Maximum allowable speeds
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
engine over-revving and this in turn
can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can
lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may
be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
The following table shows the maximum
speeds that are possible with each different gear. The tachometer’s needle will
enter the red area if these speeds are
exceeded.
With the exception of cases where sudden
acceleration is required, the vehicle
should not be driven with the tachometer’s
needle inside the red area. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
excessive engine wear and poor fuel
economy.
mph (km/h)
Gear Legacy Outback
1st 29 (47) 29 (47)
2nd 52 (84) 52 (84)
3rd 78 (126) 78 (126)
NOTE
Never exceed posted speed limits.
& Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
shift lever. This may cause wear on the
transmission components.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
lower gear before the engine starts to
labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the
transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
phenomenon does not indicate a problem.
Starting and operating 7-21
Information Provided by:
7-22 Starting and operating
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission
The automatic transmission is electronically controlled and provides 5 forward
speeds and 1 reverse speed. The continuously variable transmission is electronically controlled and provides an infinite
number of forward speeds and 1 reverse
speed.
Both the automatic transmission and
continuously variable transmission have
a manual mode.
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
to lurch forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position
only after the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting while the
vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is applied or
when chocks are used in the
wheels. This may cause the
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Avoid shifting from one of the
forward driving positions into the
“R” position or vice versa until
the vehicle has completely
stopped. Such shifting may
cause damage to the transmission.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Avoid parking
for a long time with the select
lever in any other position as
doing so could result in a dead
battery.
NOTE
. For AT models, when the engine
coolant temperature is still low, the
transmission will upshift to higher
engine speeds than when the coolant
temperature is sufficiently high in order
to shorten the warm-up time and
improve driveability. The gearshift timing will automatically shift to the normal timing after the engine has warmed
up.
. Immediately after transmission fluid
is replaced, you may feel that the
transmission operation is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalidation
of data which the on-board computer
has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
. When driving a vehicle that is
equipped with CVT under continuous
heavy load conditions such as towing a
camper or climbing a long, steep hill,
the engine speed or the vehicle speed
may automatically be reduced. This is
not a malfunction. This phenomenon
results from the engine control function maintaining the cooling performance of the vehicle. The engine and
vehicle speed will return to a normal
speed when the engine is able to
maintain the optimum cooling performance after the heavy load decreases.
Driving under a heavy load must be
performed with extreme care. Do not
try to pass a vehicle in front when
driving on an uphill slope while towing.
. The continuously variable transmission is a chain type system that
Information Provided by:
provides superior transmission efficiency for maximum fuel economy. At
times, depending on varying driving
conditions, a chain operating sound
may be heard that is characteristic of
this type of system.
& Select lever
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while pressing the button in
: Shift while pressing the button in
: Shift without pressing the button
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has a manual gate
for using the manual mode.
NOTE
For some models, to protect the engine
while the select lever is in the “P” or
“N” position, the engine is controlled
so that the engine speed may not
become too high even if the accelerator
pedal is depressed hard.
! P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle
from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the select
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop
the vehicle completely then move the
lever to the “R” position.
! N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine.
In this position the wheels and transmission are not locked. In this position, the
transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll
freely, even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the transmission
neutral.
During coasting, there is no engine braking effect.
NOTE
If the select lever is in the “N” position
when you stop the engine for parking,
you may not subsequently be able to
move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If
this happens, turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position. You will then be able
to move the select lever to the “P”
position.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently increased.
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission automatically shifts into a
suitable gear according to the vehicle
Starting and operating 7-23
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-24 Starting and operating
speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift.
When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
To use the manual mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate.
NOTE (AT models only)
Automatic downshifts to 4th or 3rd may
occur even when driving on a level
road depending on conditions, such as
how hard you depress the brake pedal.
! While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is
prevented from taking place when the
accelerator is released. This minimizes
the chance of subsequent downshifting to
a lower gear when accelerating again.
This prevents repeated upshifting and
downshifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift, depending on the way the accelerator
pedal is depressed to accelerate the
vehicle again.
& Shift lock function
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved from
the “P” position to any other position
before the brake pedal is depressed.
Depress the brake pedal first, and then
operate the select lever.
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the key from the “Acc” position to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove the
key from the ignition key cylinder.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select
lever is in the “N” position, the select lever
may not be moved to the “P” position after
a period of time. Therefore, move the
select lever to the “P” position with the
brake pedal depressed soon after the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
! Shift lock release
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the select lever button
pressed and brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, perform
the following steps.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button” F7-25.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
Within 60 seconds after placing the ignition switch in the “Acc” position, move the
select lever to the “P” position with the
select lever button pressed and brake
pedal depressed.
If you must perform the above procedure,
the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
as possible.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, refer to
“Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” F7-25.
Information Provided by:
! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button
Perform the following procedure to release
the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Remove the shift lock cover using a
flat-head screwdriver.
3. While depressing the brake pedal,
insert the electronic parking brake release
tool into the hole, press the shift lock
release button using the tool, and then
move the select lever.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the shift lock
cover, cover the tip of the flat-head
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth
before removing the cover.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection
as soon as possible.
& Selection of manual mode
With the vehicle either moving or stationary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the
manual mode.
Starting and operating 7-25
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-26 Starting and operating
Type A
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
Type B
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indicator and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate. The gear
position indicator shows the currently
selected gear in the 1st-to-5th-gear range
(AT models) or 1st-to-6th gear range (CVT
models). The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gearshift is possible.
When the upshift indicator “ ” is on,
upshifting is possible. When the downshift
indicator “ ” is on, downshifting is possible. When both indicators are on, upshifting and downshifting are both possible.
When the vehicle stops (for example, at
traffic signals), the downshift indicator
turns off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
shift paddle behind the steering wheel.
To upshift to the next higher gear position,
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”
indicated on it.
To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
position.
While driving with the select lever in the
“D” position, if you change gears by
operating the shift paddle, the gear position indicator light illuminates and shows
the current gear condition.
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
Do not place or hang anything on
the shift paddles. Doing so may
result in accidental gear shifting.
NOTE
Please read the following points carefully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when
a downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the downshift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmission will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the shift paddle twice in rapid succession.
. The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the transmission fluid becomes too high, the “AT
OIL TEMP” warning light will illuminate.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and let the engine idle until the
warning light turns off.
& Driving tips
. On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
gravel-covered road), you can pull away
from a standstill safely and easily by first
selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
mode.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Always apply the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
“D” position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
malfunction.
. A slight reduction in output torque may
occur in the models with a 3.6 L engine
before the engine warms up.
Power steering
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the
fully locked position left or right for
more than 5 seconds. This may
damage the power steering pump.
The power steering system operates only
when the engine is running.
If you lose power steering assist because
the engine stops or the system fails to
function, you can steer but it will take
much more effort.
NOTE
Right after the engine has been started
and before it has warmed up, you may
hear a noise coming from areas adjacent to the power steering pump which
is located at the right-front area of the
engine compartment. This noise is
normal. It does not indicate power
steering system trouble.
Starting and operating 7-27
Information Provided by:
7-28 Starting and operating
Braking
& Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads and linings.
! When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to
get stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake system
! Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake
system. Each circuit works diagonally
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
brake system should fail, the other half of
the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not
turn off the engine while driving because
that will turn off the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to depress the pedal much
harder than normal and the braking distance will increase.
! Brake assist system
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capability. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indiInformation Provided by:
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and generates a greater braking force.
. You might hear the sound of ABS
operating from the engine compartment.
& Disc brake pad wear warning
indicators
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle inspected by
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving with an ABS
equipped vehicle could easily lead
to a serious accident.
CAUTION
. The ABS system does not always
decrease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS
system than one without. When
driving under these conditions,
therefore, reduce your speed and
leave ample distance from other
vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS system
operating, you should maintain
constant brake pedal pressure.
Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the
operation of the ABS system.
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
wheels which may occur during sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of
steering control and directional stability
caused by wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
when the ABS operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the
vehicle speed is below approximately 6
mph (10 km/h).
& ABS system self-check
You may feel a slight shock in the brake
pedal and hear the operating sound of
ABS from the engine compartment just
after the vehicle is started. This is caused
by an automatic functional test of the ABS
system being carried out and does not
indicate any abnormal condition.
& ABS warning light
Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-20.
Starting and operating 7-29
Information Provided by:
7-30 Starting and operating
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS system and uses some of the ABS
system’s components to perform its function of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components
used by the EBD function fails, the EBD
system also stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
& Steps to take if EBD system
malfunctions
Type A
Type B
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
light illuminate simultaneously.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”
F11-23.
Information Provided by:
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the
brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
Vehicle Dynamics Control
system
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics Control system equipped
vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, winter tires should be
used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having a
Vehicle Dynamics Control system does not guarantee that the
vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is an
indication that the road being
travelled on has a slippery surface; since having Vehicle Dynamics Control is no guarantee
that full vehicle control will be
maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension components, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle equipped with the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, have
an inspection of that system
performed by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating properly.
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear
should be the same for all
four tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
vehicle placard attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
– Use only the specified temporary spare tire to replace a
flat tire. With a temporary
Starting and operating 7-31
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-32 Starting and operating
spare tire, the effectiveness of
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is reduced and this
should be taken into account
when driving the vehicle in
such a condition.
. If non-matching tires are used,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system may not operate correctly.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Activation of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal when
the following conditions occur.
– Slight twitching of the brake
pedal is felt.
– The vehicle or steering wheel
shakes to a small degree.
– An operating sound from the
engine compartment is heard
briefly when starting the engine
and when driving off after starting
the engine.
– The brake pedal seems to jolt
when driving off after starting the
engine.
. In the following circumstances, the
vehicle may be less stable than it feels
to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control System may therefore operate.
Such operation does not indicate a
system malfunction.
– on gravel-covered or rutted
roads
– on unfinished roads
– when the vehicle is towing a
trailer
– when the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if the vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle Dynamics Control.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
system monitor
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light” F3-24 and “Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light”F325.
Information Provided by:
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch
Pressing the switch to deactivate the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system can
facilitate the following operations.
. a standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When the switch is pressed during engine
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light on the combination
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will be deactivated. When
the switch is pressed again to reactivate
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light turns off.
You should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
the above-mentioned situations.
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system helps prevent unstable vehicle
motion such as skidding using control of the brakes and engine power.
Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system unless it is absolutely necessary. If you must turn off
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, drive very carefully based on
the road surface condition.
NOTE
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reactivates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 10
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any further pressing of the
switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the
engine.
. When the switch is pressed to
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the vehicle’s running performance is comparable with that of a
vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Dynamics Control system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system except when absolutely necessary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is deactivated, components of the brake control system may
still activate. When the brake control
system is activated, the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
light illuminates.
Starting and operating 7-33
Information Provided by:
7-34 Starting and operating
Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light (type A)
Low tire pressure warning light (type B)
The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,
this system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a
sharp object).
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly and keep driving
straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the tire
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures increase
accordingly. Be sure to let the tires
cool thoroughly before adjusting
their pressures to the standard
values shown on the tire placard.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-28.
The tire pressure monitoring system
does not function when the vehicle
is stationary. After adjusting the tire
pressures, increase the vehicle
speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)
to start the TPMS re-checking of the
tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
low pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
Information Provided by:
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking for
approximately one minute, promptly
contact a SUBARU dealer to have
the system inspected.
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts under the driver’s seat. This
may cause poor reception of the
signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Parking your vehicle
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to them.
. Do not park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust system parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.
Starting and operating 7-35
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-36 Starting and operating
& Electronic parking brake
1) Parking brake switch
2) Hill Holder switch
3) Indicator light
WARNING
. Before exiting the vehicle, make
sure that you turn off the engine.
Otherwise, the parking brake
may be released and an accident
may occur.
. If the brake system warning light
flashes, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe location, use
tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving
and contact your SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
. When the electronic parking
brake system has a malfunction
and the parking brake cannot be
applied, contact your SUBARU
dealer immediately for an inspection. If you have to park your
vehicle in such conditions, perform the following procedure.
– Stop your vehicle in a flat
location.
– Shift the shift lever in the “1”
or reverse position (MT models).
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
position (AT or CVT models).
When the select lever cannot
be shifted into the “P” position, you must release shift
lock. Refer to “Shift lock function” F7-24.
– Use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
. Never drive while the parking
brake is applied because this will
cause unnecessary wear on the
brake linings. Before starting to
drive, always make sure that the
parking brake has been released
and the brake system warning
light has turned off.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
parking brake. You can apply/release the
parking brake by operating the parking
brake switch.
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and
press the parking brake switch firmly.
To release: Pull the parking brake switch
toward you while the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position and the brake pedal (all
models) and the clutch pedal (MT models)
are depressed.
When the parking brake is applied while
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the brake system warning light and the
indicator light on the parking brake switch
illuminate. Refer to “Brake system warning
light” F3-21.
NOTE
. If the parking brake switch is pulled
with the ignition switch in the “Acc” or
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the parking
brake is not released.
. If the parking brake switch is pulled
Information Provided by:
without depressing the brake pedal or
the clutch pedal, the parking brake is
not released.
. When the parking brake is being
applied or released, noise may be
noticed. However, this is not a malfunction.
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction or the electronic parking brake operation is prohibited temporarily, if the parking brake
switch is operated, a chirp sound is
heard and the brake system warning
light flashes.
. When you cannot release the parking brake due to, for example, a system
malfunction, you can release it by
using the parking brake release tool.
Refer to “Electronic parking brake – if
the electronic parking brake cannot be
released” F9-17.
! Automatic release function by accelerator pedal
The electronic parking brake system has
an automatic release function. The parking brake will be automatically released by
depressing the accelerator pedal. However, the automatic release function does
not operate under the following conditions.
. Any door (other than the trunk lid or
rear gate) is open.
. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
If the parking brake is automatically
released, the brake system warning light
and the indicator light on the parking brake
switch turn off.
NOTE
Even if you have applied the parking
brake by pressing the parking brake
switch, the parking brake will be automatically released when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
! Hill Holder function
The electronic parking brake system has a
Hill Holder function. If the Hill Holder
function is activated, the parking brake
will be automatically applied when stopping on an uphill slope with the brake
pedal depressed. In this case, the brake
system warning light and the indicator light
on the parking brake switch illuminate.
NOTE
. The Hill Holder function may not
activate on a gentle uphill slope. In this
case, manually apply the electronic
parking brake.
. If you do not depress the brake
pedal sufficiently, the Hill Holder function may not operate properly. However, this is not a malfunction. When
stopping on an uphill slope, depress
the brake pedal firmly and release it
after the brake system warning light
illuminates.
. Depending on the condition of the
road surface and braking force, the
brakes operate temporarily and feel
different than usual.
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction while the Hill
Holder function is activated, a chirp
sound is heard, the Hill Holder indicator light turns off and the brake system
warning light flashes.
. The Hill Holder function does not
reactivate when parking with the electronic parking brake released after the
Hill Holder function is activated. If
necessary, manually apply the electronic parking brake.
. If the seatbelt is not fastened when
the Hill Holder function is activated, the
vehicle may not start moving smoothly
from a stop, or a noise may be heard
from the brake components.
! Hill Holder switch
WARNING
When stopping on an uphill slope
with the Hill Holder function activated, release the brake pedal after
Starting and operating 7-37
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-38 Starting and operating
the brake system warning light has
illuminated. Otherwise, the Hill
Holder function may not operate
properly and an accident may occur.
1) Parking brake switch
2) Hill Holder switch
3) Indicator light
You can activate/deactivate the Hill Holder
function by pressing the Hill Holder switch.
To activate: Press the Hill Holder switch.
To deactivate: Press the Hill Holder
switch again.
Deactivate the Hill Holder function under
the following conditions.
. When towing a trailer
. When carrying a heavy load
. When you do not frequently use the
parking brake when stopping on an uphill
slope
NOTE
. If the Hill Holder switch is pressed
for more than 30 seconds, the Hill
Holder indicator light turns off, the
brake system warning light flashes
and the system ignores any further
pressing of the switch. To activate the
switch again, turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart
the engine.
. When the Hill Holder function is
deactivated while the Hill Holder function has a malfunction, if you press the
Hill Holder switch, a chirp sounds.
! Hill Holder indicator light
Type A
Type B
When the Hill Holder function is activated,
the Hill Holder indicator light illuminates.
Refer to “Hill Holder indicator light” F3-23.
Information Provided by:
! Emergency brake
CAUTION
Use the emergency brake only in
case of an emergency. If the emergency brake is excessively used,
the brake parts will wear down
faster or the brake may not work
sufficiently due to rear wheel brake
overheating.
NOTE
While using the emergency brake, the
brake system warning light and the
indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you
can stop the vehicle by pressing the
parking brake switch continuously.
While applying the emergency brake, the
brake system warning light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch
illuminate and a chirp sounds.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
CAUTION
If the brake system warning light
flashes, the electronic parking brake
system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in the
nearest safe location and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
If a malfunction occurs in the electronic
parking brake system, the brake system
warning light flashes. Refer to “Electronic
parking brake system warning” F3-22.
& Parking tips
When parking your vehicle, always perform the following items.
. Apply the parking brake.
. For MT models, put the shift lever in the
“1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a
downgrade.
. For AT and CVT models, put the select
lever in the “P” (Park) position.
Never rely on the transmission alone to
hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel as described here. When
the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front
wheels should be turned away from the
curb.
Starting and operating 7-39
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-40 Starting and operating
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
Cruise control
NOTE
For models with EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
. towing a trailer
NOTE
Make sure the cruise control system is
turned off when the cruise control is
not in use to avoid unintentionally
setting of the cruise control.
& To set cruise control
Cruise control main button
1. Press the cruise control main button.
Cruise control indicator light (type A)
Information Provided by:
Cruise control indicator light (type B)
The cruise control indicator light on the
combination meter will illuminate.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side and release it. Then release
the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control set indicator light (type A)
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
Cruise control set indicator light (type B)
At this time, the cruise control set indicator
light is illuminated in the combination
meter. For models with a type A combination meter, the set speed will be shown on
the combination meter.
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
Starting and operating 7-41
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-42 Starting and operating
& To temporarily cancel the
cruise control
The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways.
. Press the “CANCEL” button.
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models
only).
WARNING
For AT and CVT models, do not
place the select lever in the “N”
position while driving. If the select
lever is shifted into the “N” position,
cruise control can be canceled but
the engine brake will no longer
work. This could result in an accident.
The cruise control set indicator light in the
combination meter turns off when the
cruise control is canceled.
To resume the cruise control after it has
been temporarily canceled and with vehicle speed of approximately 20 mph (32
km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “RES” side to return to the
original cruising speed automatically.
The cruise control set indicator light in the
combination meter will automatically illuminate at this time.
& To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
. Press the cruise control main button
again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or
“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
& To change the cruising speed
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/
SET” switch)
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
U.S. spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
Information Provided by:
by pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
“RES” side quickly.
Except U.S. spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be
increased 1 km/h each time by pressing
the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” side
quickly.
! To increase the speed (by accelerator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed
is set and the vehicle will keep running at
that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
. U.S. spec. models
If the difference between the actual
vehicle speed when the switch is
pressed and the speed last time you
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the
cruise control system regards this
operation as that intended to decrease
the vehicle speed.
. Except U.S. spec. models
If the difference between the actual
vehicle speed when the switch is
pressed and the speed last time you
set is less than 4.4 km/h, the vehicle
speed will be lowered by 1 km/h. This
occurs because the cruise control
system regards this operation as that
intended to decrease the vehicle
speed.
! To decrease the speed (by the
“RES/SET” switch)
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
U.S. spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side quickly.
Except U.S. spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be
lowered 1 km/h each time by pressing the
“RES/SET” switch to the “SET” side
quickly.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed, press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Starting and operating 7-43
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
7-44 Starting and operating
& Cruise control indicator light
Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”
F3-32.
& Cruise control set indicator
light
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
F3-32.
Information Provided by:
New vehicle break-in driving – the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6
Legacy................................................................ 8-6
Outback .............................................................. 8-6
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8
Driving on snowy and icy roads ......................... 8-10
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-11
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-11
Tire chains......................................................... 8-11
Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-12
Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Roof rails with integrated crossbars
(Outback) ........................................................ 8-14
Trailer hitch (Outback — if equipped) .............. 8-18
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-18
When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-20
Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-20
Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-20
Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-20
Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-24
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-24
Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-26
Driving tips
8
Information Provided by:
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km)
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid
acceleration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an
emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to a newly installed or overhauled
engine or when brake pads or brake
linings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints
The following suggestions will help to save
your fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as
possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which
is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the front and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
. The indication of the ECO gauge
shows a reference for saving fuel. For
details, refer to “ECO gauge” F3-11.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system always works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
Information Provided by:
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid (Legacy) or
rear gate (Outback) closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
Catalytic converter
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g.
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high temperatures.
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
2.5 L models
3.6 L models
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a
small amount of leaded gasoline will
damage the catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, backfiring or incomplete combustion), have
Driving tips 8-3
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8-4 Driving tips
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust system.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” performed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3.
. Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.
Information Provided by:
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because you are driving an AllWheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing a tire, you must
use a tire that is of the same size,
circumference, construction,
brand (tread pattern), speed symbol and load index as the original
tires listed on the tire placard.
Using tires of other sizes, circumferences or constructions
may result in severe mechanical
damage to the drive train of your
vehicle and may affect ride,
handling, braking, speedometer/
odometer calibration, and clearance between the body and tires.
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control.
. You must install four tires that are
of the same size, circumferences,
construction, manufacturer,
brand (tread pattern), degree of
wear, speed symbol and load
index. Mixing tires of other sizes,
circumferences or constructions
may result in severe mechanical
damage to the drive train of your
vehicle and may affect ride,
handling, braking and speedometer/odometer calibration. It
also may be dangerous and lead
to loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may
result in severe mechanical damage
to the drive train of your vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
By shifting power between the front and
rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
provide added traction during acceleration, and added engine braking force
during deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging
the AWD system, you should keep the
following tips in mind:
. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
Driving tips 8-5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8-6 Driving tips
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handling,
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the
tire placard, which is located on the door
pillar on the driver’s side.
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
F9-14.
Off road driving
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because you are driving an AllWheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
& Legacy
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed
primarily for on-road use. The AWD
feature gives it some limited off-road
capabilities in situations in which the
driving surface is relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar to on-road
driving conditions. Operating it under other
than those conditions could subject the
vehicle to excessive stress which might
result in damage not eligible for repair
under warranty. If you do take your
SUBARU off road, you should review the
common sense precautions in the next
section (applicable to the Outback) for
general guidance. But please keep in
mind that your vehicle’s off-road capabilities are more limited than those of the
Outback.
Never attempt to drive through pools and
puddles, or roads flooded with water.
Water entering the engine air intake or
the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall.
& Outback
Because of the AWD feature and higher
ground clearance, your SUBARU can be
driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But
please keep in mind that an AWD
SUBARU is a passenger car and is
neither a conventional off-road vehicle
nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take
your SUBARU off-road, certain common
sense precautions such as those in the
following list should be taken:
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
Information Provided by:
. Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much
more easily tip over sideways than it can
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
down slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
with your fingers and thumbs on the
outside of the rim.
. If driving through water, such as when
crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the
stream bed for firmness and ensure that
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
and completely through the stream. The
water should be shallow enough that it
does not reach the vehicle’s undercarriage. Water entering the engine air intake
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing
onto electrical parts may damage your
vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never
attempt to drive through rushing water;
regardless of its depth, it can wash away
the ground from under your tires, resulting
in possible loss of traction and even
vehicle rollover.
. Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat
that process several times to dry out the
brake discs and brake pads.
. Do not drive or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass or
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after the
engine stops. This could create a fire
hazard.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
fire could occur.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not
piled higher than the seatbacks. During
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo
could be thrown around in the vehicle and
cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity and make it more prone
to tip over.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the shift lever/
select lever back and forth between “1”/
“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
. When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT, ATand CVT).
For AT and CVT models, refer to “Selection of manual mode” F7-25.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this manual.
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after offroad driving. Suspension components are
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
need to be washed thoroughly.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
under hard-driving conditions such as
rough roads or off roads will necessitate
more frequent replacement of engine oil,
brake fluid and transmission oil than that
specified in the maintenance schedule
described in the “Warranty and MainteDriving tips 8-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8-8 Driving tips
nance Booklet”.
Remember that damage done to your
SUBARU while operating it off-road and
not using common sense precautions
such as those listed above is not eligible
for warranty coverage.
Winter driving
& Operation during cold
weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand,
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold
temperatures reduce battery capacity.
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine
in very cold weather conditions. Use an
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil
will make it harder to start the engine.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen,
use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid Concentration Freezing Temperature
30% 10.48F (−128C)
50% −48F (−208C)
100% −498F (−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
Information Provided by:
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
! Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and
driving dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has
accumulated under the fenders to avoid
making steering difficult. During severe
winter driving, stop when and where it is
safe to do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
Do not use the parking brake when
parking for long periods in cold weather
since it could freeze in that position.
Instead, you should observe the following
tips.
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for MT
models, or the select lever in “P” for AT
models and CVT models.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or
when it snows, raise the wiper blades off
the glass to prevent damage to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked
after use on roads heavily covered with
snow, or has been left parked during a
snowstorm, icing may develop on the
brake system, which could cause poor
braking action. Check for snow or ice
buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,
being careful not to damage the disc
brakes and brake hoses and ABS harness.
! Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
Driving tips 8-9
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8-10 Driving tips
If your SUBARU is not going to be used
for an extended period, it is best to have
the fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on snowy and icy
roads
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’s intake system and may
hinder the airflow, which could result in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, highspeed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehicle’s braking performance on snowy and icy roads. For
information about braking on slippery
surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System)” F7-29 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Control system” F7-31.
! Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the
windshield or rear window, perform the
following procedure.
. To thaw the windshield wiper blades,
use the defroster with the airflow selection
in “ ” and the temperature set for
maximum warmth until the wiper blades
are completely thawed. Refer to “Climate
control” F4-1.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defogger and deicer” F3-49.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade, use the
rear window defogger. Refer to “Defogger
and deicer” F3-49.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
with the airflow selection in “ ” and the
temperature set for maximum warmth.
After the windshield gets warmed enough
to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
using the windshield washer. Refer to
“Windshield washer” F3-47.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers.
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-7.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and freezing temperatures. Blades of this type give
superior wiping performance in snowy
conditions. Be sure to use blades that
are suitable for your vehicle.
CAUTION
During high-speed driving, nonfreezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
Information Provided by:
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freezing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion protection
Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
& Snow tires
WARNING
. When replacing original tires with
winter (snow) tires, make sure
you use only tires of the same
size, circumference, construction, brand (tread pattern), speed
symbol and load index as the
original tires listed on the tire
placard. Using tires of other sizes
and constructions may affect
speedometer/odometer calibration and clearance between the
body and tires. It also may be
dangerous and lead to loss of
vehicle control.
. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, circumference, construction, manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), degree of wear, speed symbol and
load index. Mixing tires of other
sizes or constructions may result
in severe mechanical damage to
the drive train of your vehicle and
may affect ride, handling, braking
and speedometer/odometer calibration. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle control.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
tires” which are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving. In winter, it may be possible to
enhance performance through use of tires
designed specifically for winter driving
conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size
and type. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction,
brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
& Tire chains
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of the lack of
clearance between the tires and
vehicle body.
NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, use
of another type of traction device (such
as spring chains) may be acceptable if
use on your vehicle is recommended
by the device manufacturer, taking into
account tire size and road conditions.
Follow the device manufacturer’s instructions, especially regarding maximum vehicle speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
Driving tips 8-11
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8-12 Driving tips
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage
caused to your vehicle by use of a
traction device is not covered under
warranty.
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with
a traction device. Overconfidence because you are using a traction device
could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (for MT, AT and CVT).
For information on holding the transmission in 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
manual mode” F7-25.
Loading your vehicle
WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback, in the trunk or
in the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury.
WARNING
. Never stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as
possible.
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure long items properly to
prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the rear
shelf behind the rear seatback
(Legacy) or the extended cargo
area cover (Outback). Such items
could tumble forward in the event
of a sudden stop or a collision.
This could cause serious injury.
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Vehicle capacity weight
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Certification label
The certification label attached to the
driver’s side door shows GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross
Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
Driving tips 8-13
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8-14 Driving tips
load. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation.
In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
vehicle scale, found at a commercial
weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
& Roof rails with integrated
crossbars (Outback)
1) Integrated crossbars
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
bars must be used as crossbars
and be used together with the
genuine SUBARU carrying attachment. The bars must never
be used alone to carry cargo.
Otherwise, damage to the roof or
paint or a dangerous road hazard
due to loss of cargo could result.
. When using the bars as crossbars, make sure that the total
weight of the carrying attachment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Overloading may cause damage to
the vehicle and create a safety
hazard.
The bars can be used as crossbars.
Cargo can be carried after setting the
bars as crossbars and installing the
genuine SUBARU carrying attachment.
When you carry cargo on the roof using
the crossbars and a carrying attachment,
never exceed the maximum load limit
explained in the following. You should
also be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,
refer to “Loading your vehicle” F8-12. The
maximum load limit of the cargo and
carrying attachment must not exceed the
allowable load limit described in the Owner’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU carrying attachment. Place the heaviest load at
the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly
distribute the cargo. Always properly
secure all cargo.
Information Provided by:
! Installing carrying attachments on
the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the crossbars, follow the manufacturer’s instructions and make sure that the attachment is
securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
attachments designed specifically for the
crossbars. A set of the crossbars is
designed to carry loads (cargo and attachment) of not more than the allowable load
limit described in the Owner’s Manual of a
genuine SUBARU carrying attachment.
Before operating the vehicle, make sure
that the cargo is properly secured on the
attachment.
NOTE
. Remember that the vehicle’s center
of gravity is altered with the weight of
the load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics. Drive carefully,
avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and
abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be
increased.
. Restore the bars to the original
position when the bars are not used
as crossbars.
! How to use as crossbars
CAUTION
. Do not raise the bar higher than
necessary. The base of the bar
may be damaged.
. Be careful not to contact the bars
while sliding them. Otherwise,
the bars may be scratched or
the latch portions may be damaged.
. Do not slide the bar more than
necessary when sliding the bar.
The base of the bar may be
damaged.
. Do not allow the bar to fall on or
contact the roof panel or the
moonroof when sliding the bar.
Otherwise the roof panel may be
dented or the glass of the moonroof may be damaged.
1. Pull out the integrated crossbars from
the roof rail holders by pulling up the
covers.
2. Slide the bars in the direction shown in
the illustration.
Driving tips 8-15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8-16 Driving tips
3. Install the bars into the holders.
4. Make sure that the latches are fitted
securely.
! How to change the position of the
crossbar
WARNING
Carefully read the warning label
attached to the roof rail.
You can change the position of the rear
crossbar. To change the position, perform
the following procedure.
1. Take out the torque wrench from the
jack holder.
2. Undo the cap of the roof rail holder by
using the torque wrench.
3. Undo the bolt of the crossbar by using
the torque wrench.
4. Pull out the crossbar from the roof rail
holder by pulling up the cover.
5. Install the crossbar into the other
holder.
6. Tighten the bolt of the crossbar by
using the torque wrench. The tightening
Information Provided by:
torque is approximately 8.9+ 2.2 lbf·ft (12
+ 3.0 N·m, 1.2 + 0.3 kgf·m).
7. Tighten the cap of the holder by using
the torque wrench. The tightening torque
is approximately 8.9 + 2.2 lbf·ft (12 + 3.0
N·m, 1.2 + 0.3 kgf·m).
! How to re-stow bars
CAUTION
Do not use the bars as roof rails
when the bars are stowed.
1. Check that the rear crossbar is stowed
in the front side holder.
2. Pull out the crossbars from the roof rail
holders by pulling up the covers.
3. Slide the bars in the direction shown in
the illustration.
4. Install the bars into the holders.
5. Make sure that the latches are fitted
securely.
Driving tips 8-17
Information Provided by:
8-18 Driving tips
Trailer hitch (Outback — if
equipped)
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situation. For possible recommendations and limitations, refer to
“Trailer towing” F8-20.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
has safety chains and that each
chain will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if
the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
could get loose and create a
traffic safety hazard.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight
distributing hitch.
The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class
1 rated load. The maximum gross trailer
weight and maximum gross tongue weight
are indicated in the following table.
Maximum
gross trailer
weight
Maximum
gross tongue
weight
3.6 L models 3,000 lbs(1,360 kg) 200 lbs
(90 kg)
2.5 L models 2,700 lbs(1,224 kg)
When you tow a trailer, refer to “Trailer
towing” F8-20.
& Connecting a trailer
1. Remove the receiver cover from the
hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball
mount into the hitch receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the
hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes
through the ball mount.
Information Provided by:
3. Insert the safety pin onto the hitch pin
securely.
4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it
does not come off the hitch receiver.
1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate
for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on the
ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. The chains
should cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight turn situations into
account; however, be careful not to let
them drag on the ground.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to part
of the vehicle other than the safety
chain hooks.
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness.
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
wire harness by individually activating the
brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before launching or retrieving a
watercraft.
Driving tips 8-19
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8-20 Driving tips
& When you do not tow a trailer
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
onto the hitch receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch wire harness to
protect against possible damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal grease.
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious operation of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appropriate for your
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the
instructions on correct installation and use
provided by the trailer and other towing
equipment manufacturers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
& Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused
by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance
will be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
with any new powertrain component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving.
& Maximum load limits
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are acceptaInformation Provided by:
ble.
! Total trailer weight
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum weight.
! Legacy
The total trailer weight must not exceed
1,000 lbs (453 kg).
! Outback
The maximum total trailer weight is indicated in the following tables.
3.6 L models
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 3,000 lbs (1,360 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
2.5 L models
Model Conditions Maximum total trailer
weight
MT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
CVT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill
grade continuously for over 5 miles (8
km) with an outside temperature of
1048F (408C) or above.
1,350 lbs (612 kg)
Driving tips 8-21
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8-22 Driving tips
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
combined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
GVWR is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door of your
vehicle.
Certification label
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front and rear GAWR are also
shown on the certification label.
Certification label
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
Information Provided by:
! Tongue load
Tongue load
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced during cornering, resulting in oversteer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight
and does not exceed the maximum value
of 200 lbs (90 kg).
NOTE
For vehicles with trailer brakes, the
trailer tongue load exceeds 200 lbs (90
kg) when calculated at 8% of the
maximum total trailer weight.
Even in this case, the maximum value
is 200 lbs (90 kg).
1) Jack
2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the following
illustration. When weighing the tongue
load, be sure to position the towing
coupler at the height at which it would be
during actual towing, using a jack as
shown.
F: Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by
proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front; approximately
60 percent of the trailer load should be in
the front and approximately 40 percent in
the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly
as possible on both the left and right
sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
Driving tips 8-23
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8-24 Driving tips
& Trailer hitches
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or underbody of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a
hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
trailer.
! Outback
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer
hitch is recommended. A genuine
SUBARU hitch is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoidable, be sure the hitch is suited to your
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a professional hitch supplier to assist you in
choosing an appropriate hitch for your
vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch
manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
to handle that type of load.
For all types of hitches, regularly check
that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are
tight.
! Legacy
SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer
hitches. Consult with a professional hitch
supplier to assist you in choosing an
appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure
to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
to handle that type of load.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting
bolts and nuts are tight.
& Connecting a trailer
! Trailer brakes
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Do not directly connect your
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in
your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicle’s brake
performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped with its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surge brakes are
recommended, and must be installed
properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
Information Provided by:
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.
! Trailer safety chains
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Pass the chains crossing each
other under the trailer tongue to prevent
the trailer from dropping onto the ground
in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
slack in the chains taking tight turn
situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.
For more information about the safety
chain connection, refer to the instructions
for your hitch and trailer.
! Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that the standard side mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations.
! Trailer lights
CAUTION
Direct splicing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehicle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s electrical system requires modifications to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to
increase its capacity and accommodate
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
are connected properly, please consult
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
operation of the turn signals and the stop
lights each time you hitch up.
! Tires
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to
sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing
can result in failure of the spare tire
and/or less stability of the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F129 and in “GAS STATION REFERENCE” at
the end of this manual.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
Driving tips 8-25
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
8-26 Driving tips
road service to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare
tire is firmly secured.
& Trailer towing tips
CAUTION
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when towing a trailer in hilly
country on hot days.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be different from normal operation. For
safety’s sake, you should employ
extra caution when towing a
trailer and you should never
speed. You should also keep the
following tips in mind:
! Before starting out on a trip
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-tohitch mounting are in good condition. If
any problems are apparent, do not tow the
trailer.
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is
tipped sharply up at the front and down at
the rear, check the total trailer weight,
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
confirm that the load and its distribution
are acceptable.
. Check that the tire pressures are
correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that
– the trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
– the trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailer’s stop lights
illuminate when the vehicle’s brake
pedal is pressed, and that the trailer’s
turn signal lights flash when the
vehicle’s turn signal lever is operated.
– the safety chains are connected
properly.
– all cargo in the trailer is secured
safety in position.
– the side mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a significant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
before starting out on a trip. In an area free
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
backing up.
! Driving with a trailer
. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
control.
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. For MT models, always start out
in first gear and release the clutch pedal at
moderate engine revolution.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
longer than normal turning radius because
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
a tight turn, the trailer could hit your
vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
weather conditions or the passing of large
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and slow down
immediately but gradually.
. When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required because of the
added weight and length caused by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
Information Provided by:
1) Left turn
2) Right turn
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
takes practice. When backing up with a
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
When turning back, grip the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
for a right turn.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed
immediately by the nearest SUBARU
dealer.
! Driving on grades
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
engine braking effect and prevent overheating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather,
because the engine and transmission are
relatively prone to overheating, pay attention to the following items.
– Temperature gauge (if equipped)
– Coolant temperature high warning
light (if equipped)
– AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT and
CVT models)
. If any of the following conditions occur,
immediately turn off the air conditioner and
stop the vehicle in the nearest safe
location. Refer to “If you park your vehicle
in an emergency” F9-2 and “Engine
overheating” F9-13.
– Temperature gauge needle approaches the OVERHEAT zone (if
equipped). Refer to “Temperature
gauge (models with type A combination meter)” F3-11.
– Coolant temperature high warning
light illuminates (if equipped). Refer to
“Coolant temperature low indicator
light/Coolant temperature high warning light” F3-16.
– AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates (AT and CVT models). Refer to
“AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT and
CVT models)” F3-18.
. For AT and CVT models, avoid using
the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on
an uphill slope instead of using the
parking brake or foot brake. That may
cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
! Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake. You should not park on
a hill or slope. But if parking on a hill or
slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
models) or “P” (AT and CVT models) and
shut off the engine.
Driving tips 8-27
Information Provided by:
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Information Provided by:
If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2
Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3
Legacy................................................................ 9-4
Outback .............................................................. 9-5
Flat tires............................................................... 9-6
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-6
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped)...................................................... 9-9
Jump starting ..................................................... 9-10
How to jump start............................................... 9-11
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-13
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment.................................................... 9-13
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment.................................................... 9-13
Towing ................................................................ 9-14
Towing and tie-down hooks/holes ...................... 9-14
Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-16
Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-17
Electronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released................. 9-17
Access key – if access key does not
operate properly ............................................. 9-20
Locking and unlocking....................................... 9-20
Switching power ................................................ 9-20
Starting engine .................................................. 9-21
Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot
be opened ....................................................... 9-21
Rear gate (Outback) – if the rear gate
cannot be unlocked........................................ 9-22
In case of emergency
9
Information Provided by:
9-2 In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an
emergency
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pressing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pressing the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Temporary spare tire
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is unable to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire
other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and reinstall the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2).
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following precautions.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on
the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be used
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
Maintenance tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
. Jack
. Jack handle
. Screwdriver
. Towing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)
. Wheel nut wrench
. Electronic parking brake release tool
. Torque wrench (Outback)
CAUTION
The torque wrench is designed to be
used only when changing the position of the crossbar. Do not use the
torque wrench in other cases. Otherwise, the torque wrench may be
deformed.
In case of emergency 9-3
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
9-4 In case of emergency
& Legacy
1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer
to “Under-floor storage compartment”
F6-17.)
2) Electronic parking brake release tool
3) Jack handle
4) Spare tire
5) Tool bucket
1) Wheel nut wrench
2) Screwdriver
3) Jack
4) Towing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)
The jack handle is stored on the back of
the floor cover of the trunk. The electronic
parking brake release tool is stored under
the floor of the trunk. The other tools are
stored in the tool bucket that is located in
the recess of the spare tire wheel.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” F9-6.
For the method to use the electronic
parking brake release tool, refer to “Electronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released” F9-17.
Information Provided by:
& Outback
1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer
to “Under-floor storage compartment”
F6-17.)
2) Electronic parking brake release tool
3) Jack handle
4) Spare tire
5) Tool bucket
1) Wheel nut wrench
2) Torque wrench
3) Screwdriver
4) Jack
5) Towing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)
The jack handle is stored under the cargo
area. The electronic parking brake release
tool is stored under the floor of the cargo
area. The other tools are stored in the tool
bucket that is located in the recess of the
spare tire wheel.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” F9-6.
For the method to use the electronic
parking brake release tool, refer to “Electronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released” F9-17.
In case of emergency 9-5
Information Provided by:
9-6 In case of emergency
Flat tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire
WARNING
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a
serious accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out
of the jacking point due to a jolt
and this can result in a serious
accident.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake and shift the
shift lever in reverse (MT models) or the
select lever in the “P” (Park) position (AT
and CVT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored
under the floor of the trunk (Legacy) or the
cargo area (Outback). Refer to “Maintenance tools” F9-3.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubricated before using it.
Legacy
Information Provided by:
Outback
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the
attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
9. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
In case of emergency 9-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
9-8 In case of emergency
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
with a cloth.
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
illustration.
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
to “Tires” F12-9. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
Models with P205/60R16 tires
Others
Information Provided by:
15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
compartment.
Put the spacer and tighten the attaching
bolt firmly.
Also store the jack and jack handle in their
storage locations.
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light (type A)
Low tire pressure warning light (type B)
The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused running over
a sharp object).
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly and keep driving
straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
significant damage and a fast leak
that causes the tire to lose air
rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
it with a spare tire as soon as
In case of emergency 9-9
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
9-10 In case of emergency
possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors.
If the light illuminates steadily after
blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system inspected.
Jump starting
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly flush the exposed
area with water immediately. Get
medical help if the fluid has
entered your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
eye protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
. Do not jump start unless cables
in suitable condition are available.
. A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it is
done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
Information Provided by:
& How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
In case of emergency 9-11
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
9-12 In case of emergency
1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive
(+) terminal on the discharged battery.
2) Connect the other end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster battery.
3) Connect one end of the other cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the booster
battery.
4) Connect the other end of the cable to the
strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
Information Provided by:
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been
shut off and has fully cooled down.
When the engine is hot, the coolant
is under pressure. Removing the
cap while the engine is still hot
could release a spray of boiling hot
coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, pull off the road
safely and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment
Turn off the engine and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
& If no steam is coming from
the engine compartment
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine coolant” F11-16.
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine
compartment. Refer to “Engine hood”
F11-7.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your authorized
dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If any of the following conditions occur,
turn off the engine.
. The temperature gauge stays in the
overheated zone (if equipped). Refer
to “Temperature gauge (models with
type A combination meter)” F3-11.
. The coolant temperature high warning light remains illuminated (if
equipped). Refer to “Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant temperature high warning light” F3-16.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
tank.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
In case of emergency 9-13
Information Provided by:
9-14 In case of emergency
Towing
WARNING
Never tow AWD vehicles (including
AT, MT and CVT) with the front
wheels raised off the ground while
the rear wheels are on the ground,
or with the rear wheels raised off the
ground while the front wheels are on
the ground. This will cause the
vehicle to spin away due to the
operation or deterioration of the
center differential.
If towing is necessary, it is best done by
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety.
& Towing and tie-down hooks/
holes
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
from mud, sand or snow).
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hooks and tie-down hooks/holes.
Never use suspension parts or
other parts of the body for towing
or tie-down purposes.
. Never use the tie-down hole closest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
bumper and the towing hook, do
not apply excessive lateral load
to the towing hooks.
Front towing hook:
1. Take out the towing hook and screwdriver from the on board tool bucket. Take
out the jack handle from the trunk (Legacy) or cargo area (Outback).
2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until the threads can no
Information Provided by:
longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely
using the jack handle.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
Rear towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the
tool bucket. Take the jack handle out of
the trunk (Legacy) or cargo area (Outback).
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until its thread can no
longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely
using the jack handle.
In case of emergency 9-15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
9-16 In case of emergency
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
Do not use the towing hook except
when towing your vehicle.
Front tie-down hooks:
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
Rear tie-down holes:
1) Rear tie-down hole
The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
& Using a flat-bed truck
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position for AT and CVT models or the
shift lever into “1st” for MT models.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
Information Provided by:
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
& Towing with all wheels on the
ground
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the vehicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the
direction of the wheels will be
locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not function when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flatbed truck.
. Do not run the engine while being
towed using this method. Transmission damage could result if
the vehicle is towed with the
engine running.
. For AT and CVT models, the
traveling speed must be limited
to less than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
the traveling distance to less
than 31 miles (50 km). For greater
speeds and distances, transport
your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
1. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in neutral.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“Acc” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Electronic parking brake – if
the electronic parking brake
cannot be released
WARNING
. When the electronic parking
brake cannot be released, the
electronic parking brake system
may malfunction. Driving in such
conditions may cause an unexpected accident. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for inspection
as soon as possible.
. You can release the electronic
parking brake by using the electronic parking brake release tool
in case of an emergency. However, after releasing the electronic parking brake by using the
electronic parking brake release
tool, contact your SUBARU dealer for inspection as soon as
possible.
. Release the electronic parking
brake by using the electronic
parking brake release tool on a
level road. Otherwise, the vehicle
may move, which could cause an
accident.
In case of emergency 9-17
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
9-18 In case of emergency
. When releasing the electronic
parking brake by using the electronic parking brake release tool,
always perform the following
items.
– Shift the shift lever in the “1”
or “R” position (MT models).
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
position (AT and CVT models).
– Use tire stops under the tires.
. When releasing the electronic
parking brake by using the electronic parking brake release tool,
make sure that the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position. Otherwise, the electronic parking brake system may
operate and the electronic parking brake release tool may rotate
and unexpected accident may
occur.
CAUTION
. Under certain weather conditions
(rain, snow, sandstorm, etc.), do
not release the electronic parking
brake by using the electronic
parking brake release tool. If
water or dust enters the device,
the device may malfunction.
. If the cap cannot be removed,
contact your SUBARU dealer for
inspection.
. After releasing the electronic
parking brake by using the electronic parking brake release tool,
make sure that the cap is reinstalled to the parking brake release device. If the cap is not
reinstalled, water or dust enters
the device and the device may
malfunction.
NOTE
It may be difficult to release the electronic parking brake by using the
electronic parking brake release tool.
Have your SUBARU dealer release the
electronic parking brake if necessary.
In the event that you cannot release the
electronic parking brake by pulling the
electronic parking brake switch or by
depressing the accelerator pedal, you
can release the electronic parking brake
manually by using the electronic parking
brake release tool.
1. Shift the shift lever in the “1” or “R”
position (MT models) or the select lever in
the “P” position (AT and CVT models).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
3. Make sure that the brake system
warning light and the indicator light on
the parking brake switch have turned off.
4. Use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
5. Take out the electronic parking brake
release tool. Refer to “Maintenance tools”
F9-3.
Information Provided by:
6. Insert the electronic parking brake
release tool into the cap of the parking
brake release device.
7. Remove the cap of the parking brake
release device by turning the electronic
parking brake release tool counterclockwise.
8. Break the white film and insert the
electronic parking brake release tool into
the parking brake release device.
9. Turn the electronic parking brake
release tool clockwise approximately 200
to 250 rotations.
10. To confirm that the electronic parking
brake is released, shift the shift lever or
the select lever to the “N” position, slightly
move the tire stops and have someone
push the vehicle slightly while you remain
in the driver’s seat. If the vehicle moves,
the electronic parking brake has been
released.
11. Readjust the tire stops.
12. Reinstall the cap to the parking brake
release device.
CAUTION
. Do not turn the electronic parking
brake release tool counterclockwise or turn it around more than
300 times. Doing so may result in
a malfunction of the electronic
parking brake.
. Do not use electric power tools to
turn the electronic parking brake
release tool. Doing so may result
in a malfunction of the electronic
parking brake.
In case of emergency 9-19
Information Provided by:
9-20 In case of emergency
Access key – if access key
does not operate properly
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key and the push-button
ignition switch.
If the locking/unlocking procedures, power
switch procedures or engine start procedures cannot be operated because of
strong radio signals in the surrounding
area or a low battery condition of the
access key, perform the following procedure. When the battery of the access key
is discharged, replace it with a new one.
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key”
F11-54.
& Locking and unlocking
1) Knob
2) Mechanical key
While pulling the knob of the access key,
take out the mechanical key.
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
mechanical key in the procedure described in “Locking and unlocking from
the outside” F2-6.
NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
attach the mechanical key back to the
access key.
& Switching power
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key with the buttons
facing you, and touch the push-button
ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key and the vehicle is completed,
a chime (ding) will sound. At the same
time, the status of the push-button ignition
switch changes to either of the following.
. When the keyless access with pushbutton start system is deactivated:
“Acc”
. Under other conditions: “ON”
5. When the keyless access with pushbutton start system is deactivated, press
the push-button ignition switch with the
brake pedal released. The status of the
push-button ignition switch then changes
Information Provided by:
to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
& Starting engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key with the buttons
facing you, and touch the push-button
ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key and the vehicle is completed,
a chime (ding) will sound. At the same
time, the push-button ignition switch turns
to the “Acc” or “ON” position.
5. Within 5 seconds after the push-button
ignition switch turns to the “Acc” or “ON”
position, while depressing the brake pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
If the engine does not start even
though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the
trunk lid cannot be opened
NOTE
If you open the trunk lid with a key
while the alarm system is armed, the
alarm system is triggered and the
vehicle’s horn sounds. In this case,
perform any of the following operations.
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter.
. Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm system” F2-25.
The trunk lid can also be opened using the
key.
In case of emergency 9-21
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
9-22 In case of emergency
To open the trunk lid, insert the key into
the key cylinder and turn it clockwise.
Rear gate (Outback) – if the
rear gate cannot be unlocked
In the event that you cannot unlock the
rear gate by operating the power door
locking switches, keyless access function
or the remote keyless entry system, you
can unlock it from inside the cargo area.
1. Remove the access cover at the
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using
flat-head screwdriver.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever
behind the rear gate trim panel.
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate lock
release lever with your fingers because doing so may cause an injury.
Always use a flat-head screwdriver
or a similar tool.
3. To unlock the rear gate, turn the lever
to the right position using a flat-head
screwdriver or a similar tool.
4. Open the rear gate from outside by
raising the rear gate handle.
Information Provided by:
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2
Washing............................................................. 10-2
Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4
Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5
Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5
Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, switches, combination
meter, and other plastic surface ....................... 10-6
Monitor (if equipped).......................................... 10-6
Appearance care
10
Information Provided by:
10-2 Appearance care
Exterior care
& Washing
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compartment and areas adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake, electrical parts or the power
steering fluid reservoir, it will
cause engine trouble or a malfunction of the power steering.
. Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents
is used to wash the cover surface, completely rinse off the
detergent with water. Otherwise,
the cover surface may be damaged.
. Outback: Since your vehicle is
equipped with a rear wiper, automatic car-wash brushes could
become tangled around it, damaging the wiper arm and other
components. Ask the automatic
car-wash operator not to let the
brushes touch the wiper arm or
to fix the wiper arm on the rear
window glass with adhesive tape
before operating the machine.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car wash is of
suitable type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash
the vehicle with hot water and in direct
sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sap, and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required.
If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth.
! Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
water at frequent intervals to reduce the
harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corrosion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or
sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
the underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
parts, as they are particularly prone to
mud and sand buildup. Do not use a
sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor harnesses, and
Information Provided by:
other parts when washing suspension components.
. Be careful not to flush the engine
bottom for a long time. It may
cause damage of some electrical
parts.
! Using a warm water washer
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continuously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are
of the high temperature, high pressure
type, and they can damage or deform the
resin parts such as mouldings, or cause
water to leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the
surface with a fine-grained compound.
Never polish just the affected area, but
include the surrounding area as well.
Always polish in only one direction. A
No. 2000 grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained
compound. Coarser grained compounds
have a smaller grain-size number and
could damage the paint. After polishing
with a compound, coat with wax to restore
the original luster. Frequent polishing with
a compound or an incorrect polishing
technique will result in removing the paint
layer and exposing the undercoat. When
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a polish
or wax with organic solvents is
applied to the cover surface, completely wipe off the polish or wax.
Otherwise, the cover surface may be
damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
& Cleaning aluminum wheels
. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
is left on too long, it may be difficult to
clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels) with water as soon as
possible when it has been splashed with
sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other
agents.
Appearance care 10-3
Information Provided by:
10-4 Appearance care
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most common causes of
corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust
control chemicals, or used in coastal
areas where there is more salt in the air,
or in areas where there is considerable
industrial pollution.
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
3. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
& To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces.
. roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. mud, sand, or gravel
. coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to
make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically.
Information Provided by:
Cleaning the interior
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe
using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Use the cleaner according to its instructions.
CAUTION
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Leather seat materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
cloth should be performed monthly, taking
care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
woolen fabrics may be used to remove
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
genuine leather.
& Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
CAUTION
Strong cleaning agents such as
solvents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or gasoline must never be
used on leather or synthetic interior
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
Appearance care 10-5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
10-6 Appearance care
& Climate control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel,
console panel, switches,
combination meter, and other
plastic surface
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
CAUTION
. Do not use organic solvents such
as paint thinners or gasoline, or
strong cleaning agents that contain those solvents. Doing so
could damage the surface and
cause the color to deteriorate.
. Do not use chemical solvents
that contain silicone on the vehicle audio system, electrical components of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres
to these parts, it may cause
damage to electrical components.
& Monitor (if equipped)
To clean the audio/navigation monitor,
wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft
cloth. If the monitor is extremely dirty,
clean it with a soft cloth moistened with
neutral detergent then carefully wipe off
any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, gasoline, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.
Information Provided by:
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3
Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment.................................................... 11-4
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment (2.5 L models) ............................. 11-4
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-5
Maintenance tips ................................................ 11-5
Removing and reinstalling clips.......................... 11-5
Removing air intake duct.................................... 11-7
Pulling off the fender lining ................................ 11-7
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-7
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-9
2.5 L models ...................................................... 11-9
3.6 L models .................................................... 11-10
Engine oil.......................................................... 11-11
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-11
Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-13
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-15
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-15
Cooling system ................................................ 11-15
Cooling fan, hose and connections................... 11-16
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-16
Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-17
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-17
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-18
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-18
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-19
Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-19
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-19
Automatic transmission fluid.......................... 11-19
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-19
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-20
Continuously variable transmission fluid ...... 11-21
Front differential gear oil (AT and CVT
models).......................................................... 11-21
Checking the oil level ...................................... 11-21
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-22
Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-22
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-22
Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-22
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-22
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-23
Brake fluid........................................................ 11-23
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-23
Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-24
Clutch fluid (MT models) ................................. 11-24
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-24
Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-25
Brake booster .................................................. 11-25
Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-26
Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-26
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-26
Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-26
Checking the clutch function............................ 11-26
Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-27
Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-27
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-27
Maintenance and service
11
Information Provided by:
Maintenance and service
Tires and wheels .............................................. 11-28
Types of tires ................................................... 11-28
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped)................................................... 11-28
Tire inspection ................................................. 11-30
Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-30
Wheel balance.................................................. 11-32
Wear indicators ................................................ 11-32
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-33
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-33
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-34
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-34
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-35
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-35
Replacement of wiper blades.......................... 11-37
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-37
Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-38
Rear window wiper blade assembly
(Outback) ....................................................... 11-39
Rear window wiper blade rubber (Outback) ....... 11-39
Battery............................................................... 11-41
Fuses................................................................ 11-42
Installation of accessories .............................. 11-43
Replacing bulbs............................................... 11-43
Headlight......................................................... 11-43
Front turn signal light ...................................... 11-45
Parking light .................................................... 11-46
Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-46
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-47
Tail/Backup light (Outback) .............................. 11-49
License plate light ........................................... 11-50
Dome light....................................................... 11-51
Map light ......................................................... 11-52
Vanity mirror light ............................................ 11-52
Door step light................................................. 11-53
Cargo area light (Outback) ............................... 11-53
Trunk light (Legacy) ......................................... 11-53
Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-53
Replacing battery............................................. 11-54
Replacing battery of access key....................... 11-54
Replacing battery of transmitter ....................... 11-56
Information Provided by:
Maintenance schedule
The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
For details about your maintenance schedule, read the separate “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service
by yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this
section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive
vehicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel
dynamometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to do so will
result in transmission damage
and in uncontrolled vehicle
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons
nearby.
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experienced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use
safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or allow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
by your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
Maintenance and service 11-3
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-4 Maintenance and service
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inoperative. NEVER use a circuit
tester for these wiring. If your
SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner needs service, consult
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
& Before checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and apply
the parking brake to prevent the
vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after
the engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. Always remove the key from the
ignition switch. When the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position,
the cooling fan may operate
suddenly even when the engine
is stopped.
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system temporarily place that system in the
service mode to prevent it from
unexpectedly starting the engine.
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
(2.5 L models)
CAUTION
. Do not contact the belt cover
while checking the components
in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause your hand
to slip off the belt cover and
result in an unexpected injury.
. Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down completely. Doing so may result in a
burn or other injury. Note that the
oil filter becomes very hot when
the engine is running and remains hot for some time after
Information Provided by:
the engine has stopped.
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
while the engine is running
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, belts and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
Maintenance tips
Some clips and fender linings must be
removed before replacing the air cleaner
elements or specific bulbs.
& Removing and reinstalling
clips
! Removing clips
There are several types of clips used for
your vehicle.
! Type A clips
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using
a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
! Type B clips
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip
using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in
the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.
Maintenance and service 11-5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-6 Maintenance and service
! Type C clips
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
! Reinstalling clips
Type A clips
Type B clips
Type C clips
Insert the clip without the center portion
first and then push the center portion of
the clip into the hole.
Information Provided by:
& Removing air intake duct
Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on the
air intake duct, then remove the air intake
duct. Refer to “Type A clips” F11-5.
& Pulling off the fender lining
It is necessary to pull off the fender lining
when replacing some bulbs.
1. Start the engine and turn the steering
wheel fully in the opposite direction of the
bulb to be replaced.
2. Stop the engine.
3. Remove the clip from the fender lining.
Refer to “Type B clips” F11-5.
4. Pull off the fender lining.
Engine hood
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
positions.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
Maintenance and service 11-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-8 Maintenance and service
3. Release the secondary hood release
by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lower the hood to a height of approximately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
2. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position. Do not push
the hood forcibly to close it. It could
deform the metal.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily injury.
Information Provided by:
Engine compartment overview
& 2.5 L models
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-22)
2) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-24)
3) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-23)
4) Fuse box (page 11-42)
5) Battery (page 11-41)
6) Windshield washer tank (page 11-35)
7) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-11)
8) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-16)
9) Radiator cap (page 11-16)
10) Engine oil filter (page 11-13)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-11)
12) Air cleaner case (page 11-17)
Maintenance and service 11-9
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-10 Maintenance and service
& 3.6 L models 1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-22)
2) Differential gear oil level gauge
(page 11-21)
3) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-19)
4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-23)
5) Fuse box (page 11-42)
6) Battery (page 11-41)
7) Windshield washer tank (page 11-35)
8) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-11)
9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-16)
10) Radiator cap (page 11-16)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-11)
12) Air cleaner case (page 11-17)
Information Provided by:
Engine oil
Engine low oil level warning light (type A)
Engine low oil level warning light (type B)
NOTE
. When the engine low oil level warning light illuminates, have your vehicle
inspected by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
. The engine oil consumption rate is
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be
determined until the vehicle has traveled at least several thousand miles
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions such as those mentioned in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet, engine oil is consumed
or deteriorated more quickly than under normal driving conditions. If you
drive your vehicle under these severe
conditions, you should check the oil
level at least at every second fuel fill-up
time, and change the oil more frequently. Please refer to the Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet for more details.
. If the oil consumption rate seems
abnormally high after the break-in
period, for example more than 1 quart
per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000
kilometers, we recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level at each fuel
stop.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine. If you check the oil level
just after stopping the engine, wait a few
minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan before checking the level.
2.5 L models
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
3) Oil filter
Maintenance and service 11-11
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-12 Maintenance and service
3.6 L models
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops.
2.5 L models
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
3.6 L models
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
5. 2.5 L models:
Check the oil levels on both sides of the
level gauge. The engine oil level must be
judged by the lowest of the two levels. If
the oil level is below the low level mark,
add oil so that the full level is reached.
3.6 L models:
Check the oil level on the gauge. If the oil
level is below the low level mark, add oil
so that the full level is reached.
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
. For 2.5 L models, be careful not
to touch the engine oil filter when
removing the oil filler cap. Doing
so may result in a burn, a
pinched finger, or may cause
some other injury.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and viscosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
. If the level gauge cannot be
pulled out easily, twist the level
gauge right and left, then gently
pull it out. Otherwise, you may be
injured by accidentally straining
yourself.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct.
NOTE
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do
not add any additional oil above the full
level when the engine is cold.
& Changing the oil and oil filter
CAUTION
. If you change your own oil, be
sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal.
. Do not dispose of used engine oil
by placing it in the trash, or by
pouring it onto the ground, into
sewers, or into any body of water.
Check with your local government office for the proper disposal options available to you.
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule when driving
on dusty roads, when short trips are
frequently made, or when driving in
extremely cold weather.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the
engine idle for approximately 10 minutes
to ease draining the engine oil.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
2.5 L models
3.6 L models
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
Maintenance and service 11-13
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-14 Maintenance and service
the drain plug while the engine is still
warm. The used oil should be drained into
an appropriate container and disposed of
properly.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself with
hot engine oil.
5. Wipe the seating surface and around
the drain plug with a clean cloth and
tighten it securely with a new sealing
washer after the oil has completely
drained out.
2.5 L models
3.6 L models
6. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench.
7. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a
thin coat of engine oil to the seal.
8. Clean the rubber seal seating area of
the bottom of engine and install the oil
filter by hand turning. Be careful not to
twist or damage the seal.
9. Tighten the oil filter by the amount
indicated in the following table after the
seal makes contact with the bottom of
engine.
Model Oil filtercolor
Part
number
Amount of
rotation
2.5 L
models Blue 15208AA12A
7/8
rotation
3.6 L
models Black 15208AA031
3/4
rotation
CAUTION
. Never over tighten the oil filter
because that can result in an oil
leak.
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine
oil that has spilled over the
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.
If left unremoved, the oil could
catch fire.
10. Reinstall the cover under the oil filter
(3.6 L models).
11. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
For the oil capacity (guideline), refer to
“Engine oil” F12-4. The necessary quantity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that
has been drained. The quantity of drained
oil differs slightly depending on the temperature of the oil and the time the oil is
left flowing out. After refilling the engine
with oil, therefore, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the level is correct.
12. Start the engine and make sure that no
Information Provided by:
oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber
seal and drain plug.
13. Keep the engine idling until the engine
reaches the normal operating temperature
range, as indicated by the temperature
gauge on the combination meter. After
that, check the engine oil level again. For
further details about the check procedure,
refer to “Checking the oil level” F11-11.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the engine.
& Synthetic oil
You should use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine
oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
Warranty and Maintenance booklet.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recommended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
Cooling system
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU Super Coolant that
does not require the first change
for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
years/220,000 km). This coolant
should not be mixed with any
other brand or type of coolant
during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the
life of the coolant. Should it be
necessary to top off the coolant
for any reason, use only
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
Maintenance and service 11-15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-16 Maintenance and service
shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling fan, hose and connections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the following conditions occur,
the cooling fan circuit may be defective.
. The engine coolant temperature gauge
exceeds the normal operating range (if
equipped). Refer to “Temperature gauge
(models with type A combination meter)”
F3-11.
. The coolant temperature high warning
light blinks or illuminates in RED (if
equipped). Refer to “Coolant temperature
low indicator light/Coolant temperature
high warning light” F3-16.
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” F11-42 and “Fuses and
circuits” F12-10. If the fuse is not blown,
have the cooling system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the engine
cooling system. It is recommended that
the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
& Engine coolant
! Checking the coolant level
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
as required.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the caps and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
! Changing the coolant
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant changed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Information Provided by:
Air cleaner element
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner element, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the element is perforated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is
unnecessary to clean or wash the element.
& Replacing the air cleaner
element
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
1) Hydraulic hose
2) Connector
3) Connector cable
4) Clamp
5) Clips
1. Remove the hydraulic hose in the
Maintenance and service 11-17
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-18 Maintenance and service
power steering system from the clip on the
right side of the air cleaner case.
2. Unplug the connector that is attached
to the top of the air cleaner case.
3. To remove the connector cable from
the air cleaner case, remove the clip that
is attached to the connector cable from the
guide lug on the right side of the air
cleaner case.
4. Loosen the screw on the clamp.
5. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case cover.
6. Open the air cleaner case and remove
the air cleaner element.
7. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
and case cover with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
8. To install the air cleaner case, insert
the three projections on the air cleaner
case into the slits on the air cleaner case
cover.
9. Install the removed or loosened parts
in the reverse order of removal.
Spark plugs
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
& Recommended spark plugs
Refer to “Electrical system” F12-9.
Information Provided by:
Drive belts
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of
the drive belt periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement of
the belt should be done according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the belt is loose, cracked or worn,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Manual transmission oil
It is unnecessary to check the manual
transmission oil level. However, if necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer for
inspection.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-7.
Automatic transmission fluid
& Checking the fluid level
The automatic transmission fluid expands
largely as its temperature rises; the fluid
level differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, there are two different scales
for checking the level of hot fluid and cold
fluid on the level gauge.
Though the fluid level can be checked
without warming up the fluid on the
“COLD” range, we recommend checking
the fluid level when the fluid is at operating
temperature.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is hot
Check the fluid level monthly.
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise
the temperature of the transmission fluid
up to normal operating temperature; 158
to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
set the parking brake.
3. First shift the select lever in each
position. Then shift it in the “P” position,
and run the engine at idling speed.
Maintenance and service 11-19
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-20 Maintenance and service
1) Yellow handle
1) HOT range
2) COLD range
3) Upper level
4) Lower level
4. Pull out the level gauge and check the
fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the
lower level on the “HOT” range, add the
recommended automatic transmission
fluid up to the upper level.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked
without time to warm up the automatic
transmission, check to see that the fluid
level is between the lower level and upper
level on the “COLD” range. If it is below
that range, add fluid up to the upper level.
Be careful not to overfill.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill automatic
transmission fluid when adding it.
If automatic transmission fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If automatic transmission fluid
gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to
wipe it off.
& Recommended fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-8.
NOTE
Using any non-specified type of automatic transmission fluid could result in
damage inside the transmission. When
replacing the automatic transmission
fluid, be sure to use the specified type.
Information Provided by:
Continuously variable transmission fluid
There is no fluid level gauge. It is
unnecessary to check the continuously
variable transmission fluid level. However,
if necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer
for inspection.
Front differential gear oil
(AT and CVT models)
& Checking the oil level
! AT models
1) Yellow handle
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
3. Pull out the level gauge again and
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
lower level, add oil to bring the level up to
the upper level.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill front differential gear oil when adding it. If oil
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
Maintenance and service 11-21
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-22 Maintenance and service
! CVT models
There is no oil level gauge. To check the
front differential gear oil level, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU
dealer for inspection.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-7.
Rear differential gear oil
There is no oil level gauge. To check the
rear differential gear oil level, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU
dealer for inspection.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-7.
Power steering fluid
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself
because the fluid may be hot.
CAUTION
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
. Be careful not to spill power
steering fluid when adding it. If
Information Provided by:
power steering fluid touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
power steering fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
The power steering fluid expands greatly
as its temperature rises; the fluid level
differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, the reservoir tank has two
different checking ranges for hot and cold
fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level
monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,
and stop the engine.
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir
tank.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has
been run: Check that the oil level is
between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on
the surface of the reservoir tank.
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
run: Check that the oil level is between
“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the
surface of the reservoir tank.
3. If the fluid level is lower than the
applicable “MIN” line, add the recommended fluid as necessary to bring the
level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may
indicate possible leakage. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for inspection.
& Recommended fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-8.
Brake fluid
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Maintenance and service 11-23
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-24 Maintenance and service
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
Check the fluid level monthly.
1) “MAX” level mark
2) “MIN” level mark
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add
the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed
container.
& Recommended brake fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-8.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
Clutch fluid (MT models)
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
Never let clutch fluid contact your
eyes because clutch fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
. When clutch fluid is added, be
careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
. Never splash the clutch fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Information Provided by:
Alcohol contained in the clutch
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
when adding it. If clutch fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
1) “MAX” level mark
2) “MIN” level mark
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level
mark, add the recommended clutch fluid
to “MAX” level mark.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
container.
& Recommended clutch fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-8.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of clutch
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as
described in the following procedure, have
it checked by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake
pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the
pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine. The pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately 1 minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
Maintenance and service 11-25
Information Provided by:
11-26 Maintenance and service
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal
free play
1) 0.08 – 0.18 in (2 – 5 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Checking the brake pedal
reserve distance
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact with your
SUBARU dealer.
Clutch pedal (MT models)
Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the clutch function
Check the clutch engagement and disengagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check that the engine and
transmission smoothly couple without
any sign of slippage.
Information Provided by:
& Checking the clutch pedal
free play
1) 0.19 – 0.44 in (5 – 11 mm)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with
your finger until you feel resistance, and
check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Replacement of brake pad
and lining
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will
result in the need for costly brake
rotor repair or replacement.
The disc brakes have audible wear
indicators on the brake pads. If the brake
pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible
scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
& Breaking-in of new brake
pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be
broken in as follows:
! Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times.
! Parking brake lining
The break-in maintenance for the parking
brake linings should be performed at a
SUBARU dealer.
Maintenance and service 11-27
Information Provided by:
11-28 Maintenance and service
Tires and wheels
& Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
! All season tires
The factory-installed tires on your new
vehicle are all season tires.
All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snowcovered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
not react immediately to a sudden drop in
tire pressure (for example, a blow-out
caused by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
pressures higher than those shown on the
tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an
extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
the temperature in the garage and the
temperature outside. By way of example,
the following table shows the required tire
pressures that correspond to various outside temperatures when the temperature
in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
Example:
Tire size: P215/70R16 99S, P225/60R17
98T
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
Front Rear
308F (−18C) 35 (240, 2.4) 33 (230, 2.3)
108F (−128C)
37
(255, 2.55)
35
(240, 2.4)
−108F
(−238C) 39 (270, 2.7) 37 (255, 2.55)
Example:
Tire size: P205/60R16 91V, P215/50R17
90V, P225/50R17 93V, 225/45R18 91W
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Information Provided by:
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
Front Rear
308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
108F (−128C)
38
(265, 2.65)
37
(255, 2.55)
−108F
(−238C) 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not go off, the
tire pressure monitoring system may not
be functioning normally. In this event, go
to a SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction between tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by
an increase in the outside air temperature
or by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to go off.
System resetting is necessary when the
wheels are changed (for example, a
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
valves are installed on the newly fitted
wheels. Have this work performed by a
SUBARU dealer following wheel replacement.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system. As with wheel replacement, therefore, you should have the work performed
by a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned ON or the
light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute,
you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
Maintenance and service 11-29
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-30 Maintenance and service
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
& Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are
free from serious damage, nails, and
stones. At the same time, check the tires
for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a
rough surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
This type of damage does not become
evident until time has passed. Try not
to drive over curbs, potholes or on
other rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
down to a walking pace or less, and
approach the curbs as squarely as
possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you
park the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration while
driving or find it difficult to steer the
vehicle in a straight line, one of the
tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized
SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle
inspected.
& Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures
helps to maximize the tires’ service lives
and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month (for example,
during a fuel stop) and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressures when the tires
are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
the tire pressures to the values shown on
the tire placard. The tire placard is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
it expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire increases
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours or has been driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from conInformation Provided by:
trollability and ride comfort, and they
cause the tires to wear abnormally.
. Correct tire pressure (tread worn
evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering is
responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
fuel consumption is also lower.
. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
worn at shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.
Maintenance and service 11-31
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-32 Maintenance and service
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread
worn in center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
magnifies the effects of road surface
bumps and dips, possibly resulting in
vehicle damage.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
& Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you suspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel alignment
causes the tires to wear on one side
and reduces the vehicle’s running
stability. Contact your SUBARU
dealer if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
NOTE
The suspension system is designed to
hold each wheel at a certain alignment
(relative to the other wheels and to the
road) for optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance.
& Wear indicators
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible when
the depth of the tread grooves decreases
to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn
beyond the acceptable limit and
must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
Information Provided by:
cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visible.
& Tire rotation direction mark
Example of tire rotation direction mark
1) Front
If the tire has a rotation direction specification, the tire rotation direction mark is
placed on its sidewall.
When you install a tire that has the tire
rotation direction mark, install the tire with
the direction mark facing forward.
& Tire rotation
Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirectional tires
1) Front
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires
1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To
maximize the life of each tire and ensure
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to
rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000
km). Move the tires to the positions shown
in the applicable illustration each time they
are rotated.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tire at the time of rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the tire pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again
and retighten any nut that has become
loose.
Maintenance and service 11-33
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-34 Maintenance and service
& Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standard equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
those shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropriately changes the vehicle’s ground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at
the same time.
WARNING
. When replacing a tire, you must
use a tire that is of the same size,
circumference, construction,
brand (tread pattern), speed symbol and load index as the original
tires listed on the tire placard.
Using tires of other sizes, circumferences or constructions
may result in severe mechanical
damage to the drive train of your
vehicle and may affect ride,
handling, braking, speedometer/
odometer calibration, and clearance between the body and tires.
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control.
. You must install four tires that are
of the same size, circumference,
construction, manufacturer,
brand (tread pattern), degree of
wear, speed symbol and load
index. Mixing tires of different
types, sizes or degrees of wear
can result in damage to the
vehicle’s power train. Use of
different types or sizes of tires
can also dangerously reduce
controllability and braking performance and can lead to an
accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously reduce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
& Wheel replacement
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper operation and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing during turns. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Information Provided by:
Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels is removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat, always check the tightness of the
wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for aluminum wheels.
Windshield washer fluid
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
Windshield washer fluid warning light
(type A)
Windshield washer fluid warning light
(type B)
If you spray washer fluid on the windshield
but the windshield washer fluid warning
light illuminates or the supply of washer
fluid runs out, add washer fluid in the tank.
Maintenance and service 11-35
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-36 Maintenance and service
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
add fluid until it reaches the “FULL” mark
on the tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter,
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid
Concentration
Freezing
Temperature
30% 10.48F (−128C)
50% −48F (−208C)
100% −498F (−458C)
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
Information Provided by:
Replacement of wiper blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials
on the windshield or the wiper blade
results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove the
streaks after operating the windshield
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,
clean the outer surface of the windshield
(or rear window) and the wiper blades
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
the windshield with water.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. When you wish to raise the
passenger-side wiper arm, first
raise the driver-side wiper arm.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
. Return the passenger-side wiper
arm to its original position before
returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
. When returning the raised wipers
to the original positions, return
the wipers slowly on the windshield by hand. Returning the
wipers from the detached positions by the spring operation
might change the shape of the
wiper arm or scratch the windshield.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following procedures.
& Windshield wiper blade assembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
1) Open the cover
2) Pull down the wiper blade
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
opening the cover and pulling it down in
the direction shown in the illustration.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Maintenance and service 11-37
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-38 Maintenance and service
& Windshield wiper blade rubber
1) Support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
support.
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
3. Align the claws of the support with the
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade
rubber assembly into the support until it
locks.
1) Claw
2) Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the
end of the support between the stoppers
on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is
not retained properly, the wiper blade may
scratch the windshield.
Information Provided by:
& Rear window wiper blade
assembly (Outback)
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
you to remove it from the wiper arm.
& Rear window wiper blade
rubber (Outback)
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
Maintenance and service 11-39
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-40 Maintenance and service
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
the plastic support.
1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber
with the stoppers on the plastic support
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Information Provided by:
Battery
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean
over a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention immediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short circuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a wellventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
Maintenance and service 11-41
Information Provided by:
11-42 Maintenance and service
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
The other one (main fuse box) is housed
in the engine compartment.
The spare fuses are stored in the main
fuse box cover in the engine compartment.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.
1) Good
2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the
Information Provided by:
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,
replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
F12-10.
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle. We recommend that you
install only genuine SUBARU accessories
on your vehicle.
Replacing bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is
the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb
chart” F12-14.
& Headlight
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are fingerMaintenance and service 11-43
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-44 Maintenance and service
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, consult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. We recommend that you have
the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
! Low beam light bulbs
1. Pull off the fender lining. For details,
refer to “Pulling off the fender lining” F117.
2. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the retainer spring.
5. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer
spring securely.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Install the bulb cover.
8. After replacing the bulb, reattach the
fender lining.
Information Provided by:
! High beam light bulbs
1. Remove the air intake duct (right-hand
side). For the method to remove the air
intake duct, refer to “Removing air intake
duct” F11-7.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
3. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
7. Install the air intake duct with clips
(right-hand side).
& Front turn signal light
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Turn over the protective cover of the
engine compartment.
Maintenance and service 11-45
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-46 Maintenance and service
2. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
pull it out.
3. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
4. After replacing the bulbs, reposition
the protective cover of the engine compartment.
& Parking light
1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
pull it out.
2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
& Front fog light (if equipped)
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Remove the clips.
2. Turn over the mud guard.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Information Provided by:
Legacy Outback
4. Remove the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb with a new one.
6. After replacing the bulb, reattach the
mud guard.
& Rear combination lights
! Legacy
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Turn the knobs of the cover 90
degrees counterclockwise to remove the
cover.
Maintenance and service 11-47
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-48 Maintenance and service
1) Stop/tail and rear side marker light
2) Rear turn signal light
3) Backup light
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise. Use pliers if necessary.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
5. Securely lock the cover against the
trunk trim.
! Outback
1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo
the clips, refer to “Type C clips” F11-6.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Remove the upper and lower screws.
4. Slide the rear combination light assembly straight rearward and remove it
from the vehicle.
Information Provided by:
1) Tail and rear side marker light
2) Stop light
3) Rear turn signal light
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
8. Reinstall the rear combination light
assembly by sliding the two-pronged part
of the combination light assembly securely
to each holder of the vehicle side.
9. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
10. Reinstall the side cover.
& Tail/Backup light (Outback)
1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the
light cover as shown in the illustration, and
pry the light cover off from the rear gate
trim.
Maintenance and service 11-49
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-50 Maintenance and service
1) Backup light
2) Tail light
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.
& License plate light
! Legacy
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the trunk trim lining by removing the 12 clips and the trunk trim
handle.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
6. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.
Information Provided by:
! Outback
1. Remove the mounting screws using a
Phillips screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens.
6. Tighten the mounting screws.
& Dome light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at
its ends are aligned vertically.
3. Pull the bulb straight downward to
remove it.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens.
Maintenance and service 11-51
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-52 Maintenance and service
& Map light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at
its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb
straight downward to remove it.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Vanity mirror light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
Information Provided by:
& Door step light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Cargo area light (Outback)
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Trunk light (Legacy)
1. Push both sides of the light cover, and
then remove the cover by pulling it out.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the cover.
& Other bulbs
Other bulbs may be difficult to replace.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
Maintenance and service 11-53
Information Provided by:
11-54 Maintenance and service
Replacing battery
The access key / transmitter battery may
be discharged under the following conditions.
. The operation of the keyless access
function is unstable
. The operating distance of the remote
keyless entry system is unstable
. The transmitter does not operate properly when used within the standard distance
Replace the battery with a new one.
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the access key/transmitter
when replacing battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the access key/transmitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any removed parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion
if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of the
battery.
. Batteries shall not be exposed to
excessive heat such as bright
sunlight, fire or the like.
NOTE
. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recommended by the manufacturer.
. Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
. Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
may result in a malfunction.
. It is recommended that the battery
should be replaced by a SUBARU
dealer.
. Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
that the access key/transmitter functions properly.
& Replacing battery of access
key
CAUTION
When removing or fitting the access
key cover, make sure that the plastic
part does not come off or become
misaligned.
Battery: Button battery CR1632
1) Knob
2) Mechanical key
1. Take out the mechanical key.
Information Provided by:
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap (A)
to remove the cover.
3. Remove the board in the cover (B).
Place it with the battery side facing
upward.
4. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with
insulating tape, and insert it between the
battery and the board (B). Take out the
battery as shown in the figure.
5. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
side facing upward as shown in the figure.
Attach the cover firmly.
Maintenance and service 11-55
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
11-56 Maintenance and service
& Replacing battery of transmitter
1. Remove the screw on the key head.
2. Open the key head using a flat-head
screwdriver.
3. Remove the transmitter case from the
key head.
4. Open the transmitter case by releasing
the hooks.
1) Negative (−) side facing up
5. Replace the old battery with a new
battery (Type CR1620 or equivalent)
making sure to install the new battery with
the negative (−) side facing up.
6. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
7. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
8. Reinstall the screw on the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” button
six times to synchronize the unit.
Information Provided by:
Specifications..................................................... 12-2
Dimensions........................................................ 12-2
Engine ............................................................... 12-3
Fuel ................................................................... 12-3
Engine oil .......................................................... 12-4
Manual transmission, front differential and rear
differential gear oil ........................................... 12-7
Fluids ................................................................ 12-8
Engine coolant ................................................... 12-8
Electrical system................................................ 12-9
Tires.................................................................. 12-9
Fuses and circuits ........................................... 12-10
Fuse panel located in the passenger
compartment ................................................. 12-10
Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment ................................................. 12-12
Bulb chart......................................................... 12-14
Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-17
Specifications
12
Information Provided by:
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Item
Legacy Outback
2.5 L 3.6 L 2.5 L 3.6 L
Drive system AWD
Transmission type MT CVT AT MT CVT AT
Overall length 187.2 (4,755) 189.0 (4,800)
Overall width 71.7 (1,820) 71.7 (1,820)
Overall height
59.3 (1,505) 66.1 (1,680)
*2
65.7 (1,670)*3
Wheelbase 108.3 (2,750) 107.9 (2,740)
Tread Front 61.6 (1,565) 61.6 (1,565) 61.0 (1,550)
Rear 61.8 (1,570) 61.8 (1,570) 61.0 (1,550)
Ground clearance*1 5.9 (150) 8.7 (220)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty
*2: Measured when roof rails are used as crossbars
*3: Measured when roof rails are not used as crossbars
AT: Automatic transmission
MT: Manual transmission
CVT: Continuously variable transmission
AWD: All-Wheel Drive
Information Provided by:
& Engine
Engine model FB25
(2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
EZ36D
(3.6 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 152.4 (2,498) 221.5 (3,630)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.7 6 3.5 (94.0 6 90.0) 3.62 6 3.58 (92.0 6 91.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 10.5 : 1
Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4 1 – 6 – 3 – 2 – 5 – 4
& Fuel
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher 18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
Specifications 12-3
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
12-4 Specifications
& Engine oil
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-11.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
! Alternative engine oil
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
. Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower
viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the
engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity
as those recommended by SUBARU.
Information Provided by:
! 2.5 L models
Oil grade SAE viscosity No. andapplicable temperature Engine oil capacity
API classification SM or SN with
the words
“ENERGY CONSERVING” or
“RESOURCE CONSERVING”
or ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can
be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst
mark)
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil
for optimum engine performance and
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may
be used if replenishment is needed but
should be changed to 0W-20 synthetic
oil at the next oil change.
– Adding the oil from low level to
full level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
– Changing the oil and oil filter:
5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
Specifications 12-5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
12-6 Specifications
! 3.6 L models
Oil grade SAE viscosity No. andapplicable temperature Engine oil capacity
API classification SM or SN with
the words
“ENERGY CONSERVING” or
“RESOURCE CONSERVING”
or ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can
be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst
mark)
Your vehicle is designed to use 5W-30
conventional motor oil, however 5W-30
synthetic may be used for optimum
engine performance.
If you do choose to use synthetic oil,
we recommend that you continue using
synthetic for the life of your vehicle.
– Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
– Changing the oil and oil filter:
6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
Information Provided by:
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil grade API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable
temperature
Oil capacity*1
– Remarks*2
Manual transmission oil 3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9 Imp qt) “Manual transmission oil” F11-19
Front differential gear oil
AT models 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt) “Front differential gear oil (AT and
CVT models)” F11-21CVT models 1.43 US qt (1.35 liters, 1.19 Imp qt)
Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt) “Rear differential gear oil” F11-22
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
Specifications 12-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
12-8 Specifications
& Fluids
Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3
Automatic transmission fluid (5AT
models)
· SUBARU ATF
· IDEMITSU ATF HP 10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt)
“Automatic transmission fluid”
F11-19
Continuously variable transmission
fluid (CVT models) Consult your SUBARU dealer. 13.1 US qt (12.4 liters, 10.9 Imp qt)
“Continuously variable transmission fluid” F11-21
Power steering fluid · SUBARU ATF
· IDEMITSU ATF HP
· “Dexron III” Type Automatic
Transmission Fluid
0.7 US qt (0.7 liters, 0.6 Imp qt) · “Power steering” F7-27· “Power steering fluid” F11-22
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid –
“Brake fluid” F11-23
Clutch fluid (MT models) FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid –
“Clutch fluid (MT models)” F1124
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant
Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type
2.5 L models MT models 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)
SUBARU Super CoolantCVT models 7.9 US qt (7.5 liters, 6.6 Imp qt)
3.6 L models 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-15.
Information Provided by:
& Electrical system
Battery type and capacity (5HR) 75D23R (12V-52AH)
Alternator 2.5 L models 12V-110A
3.6 L models 12V-130A
Spark plugs 2.5 L models SILZKAR7B11 (NGK)
3.6 L models SILFR6C11 (NGK)
& Tires
Tire size P205/60R16
91V
P215/70R16
99S
P225/60R17
98T
P215/50R17
90V
P225/50R17
93V
Wheel size 16 6 6 1/2J 17 6 7J 17 6 7 1/2J
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa) 32 psi (220 kPa) 33 psi (230 kPa)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa) 30 psi (210 kPa) 32 psi (220 kPa)
Temporary spare tire Size T135/80R16 T145/80R17 T135/80R16 T135/70R17
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa)
Wheel nut tightening torque 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*1*2
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.
*2: For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-6.
Specifications 12-9
Information Provided by:
12-10 Specifications
Fuses and circuits
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating Circuit
1 15A . Trailer hitch connector
2 20A . Rear power window
(left side)
3 20A . Power window (driver’s
side)
4 7.5A . Navigation system
. Front wiper deicer
. Moonroof
5 7.5A . Combination meter
6 7.5A . Remote control rear
view mirrors
7 7.5A . Integrated unit
8 15A . Stop light
9 15A . Seat heater relay
10 7.5A . Power supply (battery)
11 7.5A . Turn signal unit
12 15A . Integrated unit
. Automatic transmission
unit
Information Provided by:
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating Circuit
13 20A . Socket
14 10A . Integrated unit
15 20A . Rear power window
(right side)
16 Empty
17 15A . Front wiper deicer
18 7.5A . Backup light
19 7.5A . Electronic parking
brake unit
. Hill Holder system unit
20 10A . Accessory power outlet
21 7.5A . Starter relay
22 15A . Air conditioner
23 Empty
24 15A . Audio
. Navigation system
25 15A . SRS airbag system
26 7.5A . Main fan
27 30A . Power window relay
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating Circuit
28 Empty
29 20A . Power window
(passenger’s side)
30 Empty
31 7.5A . Automatic air conditioner unit
32 7.5A . Steering lock
33 7.5A . ABS/Vehicle dynamics
control unit
. Power steering
Specifications 12-11
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
12-12 Specifications
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
A) Main fuse
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating Circuit
1 7.5A . CVT control unit
2 7.5A . Horn (right side)
3 7.5A . Horn (center)
4 15A . Low beam headlight
(right side)
5 15A . Low beam headlight
(left side)
6 20A . Fuel pump
7 10A . High beam headlight
(left side)
8 10A . High beam headlight
(right side)
9 20A . Continuously variable
transmission control
unit
10 7.5A . Alternator
11 10A . EyeSight system
12 20A . Moonroof
13 7.5A . Engine control unit
Information Provided by:
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating Circuit
14 15A . Engine control unit
15 15A . Ignition coil
16 15A . Engine control unit
17 15A . Engine control unit
18 10A . Automatic transmission
control unit
19 10A . Illumination
20 10A . Rear combination light
21 15A . Turn and hazard warning flasher (body control
unit)
22 20A . Door lock (body control
unit)
23 15A . Rear wiper
. Rear washer
24 10A . Front washer
25 30A . Front wiper
26 25A . Rear window defogger
. Mirror heater
. Front wiper deicer
27 15A . Blower fan
28 15A . Blower fan
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating Circuit
29 25A . Audio unit
30 25A . Sub fan
31 25A . Main fan
32 30A . ABS/Vehicle dynamics
control unit
33 10A . Fog light (right side)
34 10A . Fog light (left side)
35 20A . Back-up (body control
unit)
Specifications 12-13
Information Provided by:
12-14 Specifications
Bulb chart
NOTE
Lights A, B and C are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
Information Provided by:
Wattage Bulb No.
1) High beam headlight 12V-60W HB3 (9005)
2) Parking light 12V-5W W5W
3) Low beam headlight 12V-55W H7
4) Front turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W
5) Map light 12V-8W
6) Dome light 12V-8W
7) Door step light 12V-5W W5W
8) Front fog light
Legacy 12V-19W H16
Outback 12V-55W H11
9) Front side marker light 12V-5W W5W
10) Vanity mirror light 14V-1.4W HTU
11) Cargo area light 12V-13W
12) Backup light (Outback) 12V-16W W16W (921)
13) Tail light (Outback) 12V-5W W5W
14) Licence plate light (Outback) 12V-5W W5W
15) Rear turn signal light (Outback) 12V-21W WY21W
Specifications 12-15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
12-16 Specifications
Wattage Bulb No.
16) Stop light (Outback) 12V-21W W21W
17) Tail and rear side marker light
(Outback) 12V-5W W5W
18) Trunk light (Legacy) 12V-5W W5W
19) Tail light (Legacy) 12V-5W W21/5W
20) Stop/Tail and rear side marker light
(Legacy) 12V-21/5W W21/5W
21) License plate light (Legacy) 12V-5W W5W
22) Backup light (Legacy) 12V-16W W16W (921)
23) Rear turn signal light (Legacy) 12V-21W WY21W
A) High-mounted stop light (Outback) – –
B) High-mounted stop light (Legacy) – –
C) Side turn signal light (if equipped) – –
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
Information Provided by:
Vehicle identification 1) Emission control label
2) Vehicle identification number
3) Certification and bar code label
4) Tire inflation pressure label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
Specifications 12-17
Information Provided by:
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Information Provided by:
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2
Tire information.................................................. 13-2
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-9
Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities ............................................... 13-13
Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-13
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-13
Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-14
Treadwear ....................................................... 13-14
Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-14
Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Reporting safety defects (USA) ...................... 13-15
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Information Provided by:
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A.
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
Tire information
& Tire labeling
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These marking
can provide you with useful information on the tire.
! Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its individual elements.
! P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimensional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as passenger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating Descriptions
The load and speed rating descriptions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates
the tire’s speed rating.
Information Provided by:
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum load
a tire can carry at the speed
indicated by its speed symbol, at
maximum inflation pressure.
For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs
(615 kg), “90”means 1,323 lbs (600
kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s capability
to travel at established and predetermined speeds.
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded,
or otherwise altered from
their original condition. If
t ires are repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered, they may not be suitable for original equipment
tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review
of the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
(1) Manufacturer’s Identification
Mark
(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
! Other markings
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be
inflated. For example, “350 kPa
(51 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg
(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1
NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-
STER”
! Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG)
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
quality grading standards” F13-14.
& Recommended tire inflation
pressure
! Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
For the recommended cold tire
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tires, refer to “Tires” F12-9.
! Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is affixed to the
driver’s side B-pillar.
Example:
Information Provided by:
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading information.
! Adverse safety consequences
of under-inflation
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper inflation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a
short distance warms up the tires
and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected
by the outside temperature. It is
best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
& Glossary of tire terminology
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
the rim.
. Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
. Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
tire.
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corresponding standard
tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains
the inflating medium within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the
same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has
a particular side that must always face outward when mounting on a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column
of Table 1 that is appended to the
end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
Information Provided by:
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs.
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
. Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or
other mater ia ls , that , when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special
trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pressure
The cold inflation pressure recommended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire.
. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
. Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
. Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code.
. Rim width
Nominal distance between rim
flanges.
. Section width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or
protective bands.
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber comConsumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
pound from the cord material in the
sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes
into contact with the road.
. Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire.
. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capacity.
. Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 that is appended to the end of this section)
and dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
Information Provided by:
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in secondseat.
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
& Tire care – maintenance and
safety practices
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visible. When a tire’s tread wear
indicator becomes visible, the tire
is worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving
at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the
right-hand side of the vehicle and
similarly switching the front and
rear tires on the left-hand side of
the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept
on its original side of the vehicle.)
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tire at the time of rotation.
After tire rotation, adjust the tire
pressures and make sure the wheel
nuts are correctly tightened. For
information about the tightening
torque and tightening sequence
for the wheel nuts, refer to “Flat
tires” F9-6.
& Vehicle load limit – how to
determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the
statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
The vehicle placard also shows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all passengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
can be calculated by the following
method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment + tongue
load of a trailer (if applicable))
For towing capacity information and
weight limits, refer to “Trailer towing” F8-20.
! Calculating total and load capacities varying seating configurations
Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
Information Provided by:
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to two), the calculations are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
Information Provided by:
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.
& Determining compatibility of
tire and vehicle load capacities
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and each
axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to
the driver’s door.
The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehicle’s suspension, axles and other
parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse safety consequences of overloading on
handling and stopping and
on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle
and tire as shown in the following.
This could lead to an accident and
possibly result in severe personal
injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other parts of the body could break
or experience accelerated wear
that will shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be
five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 − 750 (5 6
150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Uniform tire quality grading
standards
This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited production tires.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
& Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
& Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on speInformation Provided by:
cified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
& Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire
that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Reporting safety defects
(USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Subaru of
America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
New Jersey Avenue, SE, West
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-15
– CONTINUED –
Information Provided by:
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Building, Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
Information Provided by:
Index
14
Information Provided by:
14-2 Index
A
Abbreviation ................................................................... 2
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-29
Warning light ......................................................... 3-20
Access key ................................................................. 2-9
Warning light ......................................................... 3-25
Accessories....................................................... 5-3, 11-43
Accessory power outlet............................................... 6-10
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-17
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control system ............................... 4-5
Manual climate control system................................... 4-6
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-10
Airflow selection........................................................... 4-6
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-25
All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-24
Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-35
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3
Antenna system........................................................... 5-3
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-29
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-26
Armrest..................................................................... 1-14
Ashtray ..................................................................... 6-12
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-18
Audio
Antenna system....................................................... 5-3
Auxiliary input jack ................................................. 5-25
Bluetooth® audio.................................................... 5-39
CD player operation ............................................... 5-19
Control button........................................................ 5-37
FM/AM radio operation ........................................... 5-10
iPod® operations .................................................... 5-28
Power and audio controls ......................................... 5-7
Satellite radio operations ......................................... 5-16
Set ........................................................................ 5-4
USB storage device operations ................................ 5-28
Auto on/off headlights ................................................. 3-41
Sensor .................................................................. 3-42
Auto-dimming mirror................................... 3-51, 3-57, 3-58
Automatic climate control system................................... 4-5
Automatic rain sensing windshield wipers ...................... 3-46
Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-22
Fluid ........................................................... 11-19, 12-8
Manual mode......................................................... 7-25
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............. 3-18
Select lever ........................................................... 7-23
Shift lock function ................................................... 7-24
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-15
Auxiliary input jack...................................................... 5-25
B
Battery .................................................................... 11-41
Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-8
Jump starting ......................................................... 9-10
Replacement (access key)..................................... 11-54
Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........... 7-18
Replacement (transmitter)...................................... 11-56
Bluetooth® audio ........................................................ 5-39
Booster seat .............................................................. 1-31
Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-9
Brake
Assist.................................................................... 7-28
Information Provided by:
Booster........................................................ 7-28, 11-25
Fluid............................................................ 11-23, 12-8
Pad and lining ...................................................... 11-27
Parking ................................................................. 7-36
Pedal .................................................................. 11-26
System ................................................................. 7-28
Brake pedal
Free play ............................................................. 11-26
Reserve distance .................................................. 11-26
Brake system ............................................................ 7-28
Warning light ......................................................... 3-21
Braking..................................................................... 7-28
Tips...................................................................... 7-28
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-27
Bulb
Chart .................................................................. 12-14
Replacing............................................................. 11-43
C
Cargo area
Cover ................................................................... 6-15
Light............................................................. 6-3, 11-53
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-17
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3
Center
Console .................................................................. 6-6
Changing
Coolant................................................................ 11-16
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-6
Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-13
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-17
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
light ....................................................................... 3-16
Checking
Brake pedal free play............................................ 11-26
Brake pedal reserve distance................................. 11-26
Clutch function ..................................................... 11-26
Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-27
Coolant level........................................................ 11-16
Fluid level (automatic transmission fluid).................. 11-19
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-23
Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-24
Fluid level (power steering fluid) ............................. 11-22
Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-35
Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-11
Oil level (front differential gear oil) .......................... 11-21
Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-25
Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-31
Installation with A/ELR seatbelt ................................ 1-28
Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-33
Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-35
Child safety ................................................................... 5
Locks.................................................................... 2-31
Chime
Key........................................................................ 3-4
Light ..................................................................... 3-41
Seatbelt................................................................. 3-13
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Ventilation grille ....................................................... 4-9
Climate control system ................................................. 4-3
Index 14-3
Information Provided by:
14-4 Index
Automatic................................................................ 4-5
Manual ................................................................... 4-6
Clock................................................................ 3-32, 3-33
Clutch
Fluid............................................................ 11-24, 12-8
Pedal .................................................................. 11-26
Coat hook ................................................................. 6-13
Console ...................................................................... 6-6
Continuously variable transmission............................... 7-22
Fluid............................................................ 11-21, 12-8
Manual mode ........................................................ 7-25
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............ 3-18
Select lever ........................................................... 7-23
Shift lock function................................................... 7-24
Coolant............................................................ 11-16, 12-8
Temperature high warning light ................................ 3-16
Temperature low indicator light................................. 3-16
Cooling system......................................................... 11-15
Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4
Crossbars ................................................................. 8-14
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-40
Indicator light......................................................... 3-32
Set indicator light ................................................... 3-32
Cup holder .................................................................. 6-8
Front passenger’s .................................................... 6-9
Rear passenger’s..................................................... 6-9
D
Daytime running light system....................................... 3-43
Defogger................................................................... 3-49
Defrosting ................................................................... 4-8
Deicer ....................................................................... 3-49
Differential gear oil
Front........................................................... 11-21, 12-7
Rear ........................................................... 11-22, 12-7
Dimensions................................................................ 12-2
Disarming the alarm system......................................... 2-29
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-29
Dome light ......................................................... 6-2, 11-51
Door
Locks..................................................................... 2-6
Open indicator light................................................. 3-23
Open warning light.................................................. 3-23
Step light............................................................. 11-53
Double trip meter......................................................... 3-9
Drive belts ............................................................... 11-19
Driving
All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-24
AWD vehicles ......................................................... 8-5
Car phone/cell phone.................................................. 7
Drinking..................................................................... 6
Drugs........................................................................ 7
Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4
Off road.................................................................. 8-6
Pets.......................................................................... 8
Snowy and icy roads .............................................. 8-10
Tips ................................................. 7-21, 7-27, 8-2, 8-5
Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 7
Winter .................................................................... 8-8
E
ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-11
Information Provided by:
Electrical system........................................................ 12-9
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system................................................................... 7-30
Warning ................................................................ 3-22
Electronic parking brake.............................................. 7-36
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal......... 7-37
Hill Holder ............................................................. 7-37
Warning ........................................................ 3-22, 7-39
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-15
Engine
Compartment overview ........................................... 11-9
Coolant........................................................ 11-16, 12-8
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 6, 8-2
Hood .................................................................... 11-7
Low oil level warning light ....................................... 3-18
Oil............................................................... 11-11, 12-4
Overheating .......................................................... 9-13
Starting & stopping........................................... 7-9, 7-11
Event data recorder......................................................... 9
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2
F
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-6
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-14
Fluid level
Automatic transmission .......................................... 11-19
Brake .................................................................. 11-23
Clutch.................................................................. 11-24
Continuously variable transmission.......................... 11-21
Power steering ..................................................... 11-22
Fog light
Bulb.......................................................... 11-46, 12-14
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Switch................................................................... 3-44
Folding mirror switch................................................... 3-63
Front
Differential gear oil........................................ 11-21, 12-7
Fog light ............................................ 3-44, 11-46, 12-14
Fog light indicator light ............................................ 3-32
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-23
Turn signal light.................................................... 11-45
Front fog light........................................................... 11-46
Bulb.......................................................... 11-46, 12-14
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Front seats ................................................................. 1-2
Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-3
Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-8
Power seat ............................................................. 1-4
Reclining ................................................................ 1-4
Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ........................ 1-4
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3
Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-4
Gauge................................................................... 3-10
Requirements ................................................. 7-3, 12-3
Fuses ..................................................................... 11-42
Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-10
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-13
Glove box................................................................... 6-6
Index 14-5
Information Provided by:
14-6 Index
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-13
H
Hands-free system ..................................................... 5-45
Hazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-7, 9-2
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat ............................................................... 1-8
Rear seat.............................................................. 1-12
Headlight ......................................................... 3-41, 11-43
Bulb wattage ....................................................... 12-14
Control switch........................................................ 3-41
Flasher ................................................................. 3-43
Indicator light......................................................... 3-32
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-31
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-42
Hill Holder ................................................................. 7-37
Indicator light......................................................... 3-23
Switch .................................................................. 7-37
HomeLink® ........................................................ 3-51, 3-58
Hook
Coat ..................................................................... 6-13
Convenient tie-down............................................... 6-17
Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-13
Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-14
Horn......................................................................... 3-65
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-16
I
Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3
Light....................................................................... 3-4
Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-44
Immobilizer ................................................................. 2-4
Indicator light (security indicator light)........................ 3-30
Indicator light
Coolant temperature low.......................................... 3-16
Cruise control ........................................................ 3-32
Cruise control set ................................................... 3-32
Door open ............................................................. 3-23
Front fog light......................................................... 3-32
Headlight............................................................... 3-32
High beam............................................................. 3-31
Hill Holder ............................................................. 3-23
Immobilizer ............................................................ 3-30
Security................................................................. 3-30
Select lever/Gear position........................................ 3-30
Turn signal ............................................................ 3-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-25
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-25
Inside mirror ..................................... 3-50, 3-51, 3-57, 3-58
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-36
iPod® operations ........................................................ 5-28
J
Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-6
Jump starting ............................................................. 9-10
K
Key............................................................................ 2-3
Number .................................................................. 2-3
Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-4
Replacement........................................................... 2-5
Information Provided by:
Keyless access entry function...................................... 2-13
Keyless access with push-button start system ................. 2-9
Disabling keyless access functions........................... 2-17
Locking and unlocking doors ................................... 2-13
Opening rear gate .................................................. 2-15
Warning chimes and warning light ............................ 3-25
When access key does not operate properly ............. 9-20
Keyless entry system ................................................. 2-19
L
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5
License plate light ..................................................... 11-50
Light
Backup ................................................................ 11-47
Cargo area.................................................... 6-3, 11-53
Control switch........................................................ 3-41
Daytime running............................................ 3-43, 11-46
Dome ........................................................... 6-2, 11-51
Door step............................................................. 11-53
Front fog...................................................... 3-44, 11-46
Front side marker................................................... 3-41
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-4
License plate........................................................ 11-50
Map ............................................................. 6-2, 11-52
Parking ................................................................ 11-46
Rear combination.................................................. 11-47
Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-47
Rear turn signal (Sedan) ........................................ 11-47
Rear turn signal (Station wagon) ............................. 11-48
Stop light ............................................................. 11-47
Stop/Tail (Sedan) .................................................. 11-47
Stop/Tail and rear side marker (Legacy) .................. 11-47
Tail and rear side marker (Outback) ........................ 11-48
Tail light (Station wagon) ....................................... 11-48
Tail/Backup (Outback) ........................................... 11-49
Trunk .................................................................. 11-53
Turn signal ........................................ 3-43, 11-45, 11-47
Vanity mirror .................................................. 6-5, 11-52
Loading your vehicle ................................................... 8-12
Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-23
Low tire pressure warning light ..................................... 3-18
Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-33
M
Maintenance
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Schedule ............................................................... 11-3
Seatbelt................................................................. 1-22
Tips ...................................................................... 11-5
Tools...................................................................... 9-3
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light).... 3-16
Manual
Climate control system ............................................. 4-6
Mode .................................................................... 7-25
Seat....................................................................... 1-3
Transmission ......................................................... 7-20
Transmission oil ........................................... 11-19, 12-7
Map light ........................................................... 6-2, 11-52
Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-20
Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-7
Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-49
Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-50
Index 14-7
Information Provided by:
14-8 Index
Moonroof .................................................................. 2-39
Multi function display .................................................. 3-33
N
New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2
O
Odometer.................................................................... 3-8
Off road driving............................................................ 8-6
Oil filter.................................................................... 11-13
Oil level
Engine................................................................. 11-11
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-21
Manual transmission.............................................. 11-19
Rear differential gear ............................................. 11-22
Warning light ......................................................... 3-18
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-17
Outside
Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-49
Mirrors.................................................................. 3-63
Overhead console........................................................ 6-8
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13
P
Parking ..................................................................... 7-35
Brake ................................................................... 7-36
Light.................................................................... 11-46
Tips...................................................................... 7-39
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-3
Pocket ........................................................................ 6-8
Power
Door locking switch.................................................. 2-8
Outlets .................................................................. 6-10
Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-63
Seat....................................................................... 1-4
Steering ................................................................ 7-27
Steering fluid................................................ 11-22, 12-8
Windows ............................................................... 2-32
Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-25, 1-68
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8
Printed antenna........................................................... 5-3
Push-button
Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-5
Starting and stopping engine.............................. 7-9, 7-11
R
Rear
Combination lights ................................................ 11-47
Differential gear oil........................................ 11-22, 12-7
Gate ............................................................. 2-38, 9-22
Turn signal light.................................................... 11-47
Rear seat ................................................................... 1-9
Armrest ................................................................. 1-14
Folding down ......................................................... 1-11
Head restraint adjustment........................................ 1-12
Reclining ............................................................... 1-10
Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-18
Rear window
Defogger ............................................................... 3-49
Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-48
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-39
Information Provided by:
Recommended
Automatic transmission fluid .................................... 12-8
Brake fluid............................................................. 12-8
Clutch fluid............................................................ 12-8
Continuously variable transmission fluid .................... 12-8
Engine oil.............................................................. 12-4
Front differential gear oil ......................................... 12-7
Manual transmission oil .......................................... 12-7
Power steering fluid................................................ 12-8
Rear differential gear oil .......................................... 12-7
Spark plugs........................................................... 12-9
Refueling .................................................................... 7-4
Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-13
Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 2-19
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-27
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-37
Replacing
Access key battery................................................ 11-54
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-17
Battery (keyless access with push-button start
system).............................................................. 11-54
Battery (remote engine start transmitter) ................... 7-18
Battery (remote keyless entry system) ..................... 11-56
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system)......... 2-22
Replacing bulbs .............................................. 11-43, 12-14
Backup light (Legacy) ............................................ 11-47
Brake/tail light....................................................... 11-47
Cargo area light .................................................... 11-53
Daytime running light............................................. 11-46
Dome light ........................................................... 11-51
Door step light ..................................................... 11-53
Front fog light....................................................... 11-46
Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-45
Headlight............................................................. 11-43
License plate light................................................. 11-50
Map light ............................................................. 11-52
Parking light......................................................... 11-46
Rear combination light .......................................... 11-47
Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-47
Rear turn signal light............................................. 11-47
Stop/Tail and rear side marker light (Legacy) ........... 11-47
Stop/Tail light (Sedan) ........................................... 11-47
Tail and rear side marker light (Outback) ................. 11-48
Tail light (Station wagon) ....................................... 11-48
Tail/Backup light (Outback) .................................... 11-49
Trunk light ........................................................... 11-53
Vanity mirror light.................................................. 11-52
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-12
Roof rails with integrated cross bars ............................. 8-14
S
Safety
Precautions when driving............................................. 4
Symbol...................................................................... 2
Warnings ................................................................... 2
Satellite radio ............................................................. 5-16
Seat
Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Front...................................................................... 1-2
Heater.................................................................... 1-8
Height adjustment.................................................... 1-4
Index 14-9
Information Provided by:
14-10 Index
Memory function ...................................................... 1-5
Power..................................................................... 1-4
Rear....................................................................... 1-9
Seatbelt ................................................................. 4, 1-14
Fastening.............................................................. 1-16
Maintenance.......................................................... 1-22
Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-23
Safety tips............................................................. 1-14
Warning light and chime ......................................... 3-13
Security
Alarm system ........................................................ 2-25
ID plate................................................................... 2-5
Immobilizer.............................................................. 2-4
Indicator light......................................................... 3-30
Shock sensors....................................................... 2-31
Select lever ............................................................... 7-23
Position indicator ................................................... 3-30
Shift lock function................................................... 7-24
Shock sensors........................................................... 2-31
Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-13
Snow tires........................................................ 8-11, 11-28
Snowy and icy roads .................................................. 8-10
Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-21
Spark plugs...................................................... 11-18, 12-9
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2
Speedometer............................................................... 3-8
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-38
SRS airbag system
Monitors................................................................ 1-65
Servicing............................................................... 1-67
Warning light ......................................................... 3-15
Starting & stopping engine..................................... 7-9, 7-11
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7
Steering wheel
Power ................................................................... 7-27
Tilt/telescopic ......................................................... 3-64
Stop light................................................................. 11-47
Storage compartment................................................... 6-5
Sun shade................................................................. 2-41
Sun visors .................................................................. 6-4
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-38
Synthetic leather upholstery ......................................... 10-5
T
Tachometer................................................................ 3-10
Temperature gauge..................................................... 3-11
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-18
Coolant ................................................................. 3-16
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2
Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-33, 1-35
Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-14
Tire................................................................. 11-28, 12-9
Chains .................................................................. 8-11
Inspection............................................................ 11-30
Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-30
Replacement........................................................ 11-34
Rotation .............................................................. 11-33
Size and pressure .................................................. 12-9
Types.................................................................. 11-28
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....... 7-34, 9-9, 11-28
Warning light.......................................................... 3-18
Information Provided by:
Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-28
Tools .......................................................................... 9-3
Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-33, 1-35
Towing...................................................................... 9-14
All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-17
Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-16
Hooks................................................................... 9-14
Weight.................................................................. 8-20
Trailer
Connecting............................................................ 8-18
Hitch ............................................................ 8-18, 8-24
Towing.................................................................. 8-20
Towing tips............................................................ 8-26
Trip meter ................................................................... 3-9
Trunk lid ........................................................... 2-35, 9-21
Release handle ..................................................... 2-36
Trunk light ................................................................ 11-53
Turn signal
Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-31
Lever.................................................................... 3-43